Brother Xl 3030 Owner S Manual

2014-07-05

: Brother Brother-Xl-3030-Owner-S-Manual brother-xl-3030-owner-s-manual brother pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 324 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Be sure to read this document before using the machine.

We recommend that you keep this document nearby for future reference.

Operation Manual

Embroidery and Sewing Machine

Product Code: 882-C40/C42

TRADEMARKS

IMPORTANT:

READ BEFORE DOWNLOADING, COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING.

By downloading, copying, installing or using the software you agree to this license. If you do not agree

to this license, do not download, install, copy or use the software.

Intel License Agreement For Open Source Computer Vision Library

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

• Redistribution’s of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

• Redistribution’s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

• The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software

without specific prior written permission.

This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties,

including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are

disclaimed. In no event shall Intel or contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary,

or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use,

data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict

liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if

advised of the possibility of such damage.

All information provided related to future Intel products and plans is preliminary and subject to change at any time, without notice.

SD is a registered trademark or a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

CompactFlash is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sandisk Corporation.

Memory Stick is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sony Corporation.

SmartMedia is a registered trademark or a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.

MultiMediaCard (MMC) is a registered trademark or a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.

xD-Picture Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.

IBM is a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.

All other brands and product names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective companies. However, the

explanations for markings such as ® and ™ are not clearly described within the text.

INTRODUCTION

B-1

Thank you for purchasing this machine. Before using this machine, carefully read the “IMPORTANT

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”, and then study this manual for the correct operation of the various functions.

In addition, after you have finished reading this manual, store it where it can quickly be accessed for

future reference.

Please read these safety instructions before attempting to use the machine.

DANGER - To reduce the risk of electrical shock

1Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet immediately after using, when cleaning, making any user

servicing adjustments mentioned in this manual, or if you are leaving the machine unattended.

WARNING - To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electrical shock, or injury to

persons.

2Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet when making any adjustments mentioned in the instruction

manual.

• To unplug the machine, switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off, then grasp the plug and pull

it out of the electrical outlet. Do not pull on the cord.

• Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord.

• Always unplug your machine if the power is cut.

3Electrical Hazards:

• This machine should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. Do not

connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power source you have, contact a

qualified electrician.

• This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only.

4Never operate this machine if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, has been dropped or

damaged, or water is spilled on the unit. Return the machine to the nearest authorized dealer for examination,

repair, electrical or mechanical adjustment.

• While the machine is stored or in use if you notice anything unusual, such as an odor, heat, discoloration or

deformation, stop using the machine immediately and unplug the power cord.

• When transporting the sewing machine, be sure to carry it by its handle. Lifting the sewing machine by any other

part may damage the machine or result in the machine falling, which could cause injuries.

• When lifting the sewing machine, be careful not to make any sudden or careless movements, otherwise you may

injure your back or knees.

INTRODUCTION

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

B-2

5Always keep your work area clear:

• Never operate the machine with any air openings blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the sewing machine and

foot control free from the build up of lint, dust, and loose cloth.

• Do not store objects on the foot controller.

• Do not use extension cords. Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet.

• Never drop or insert foreign objects in any opening.

• Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are being used or where oxygen is being administered.

• Do not use the machine near a heat source, such as a stove or iron; otherwise, the machine, power cord or

garment being sewn may ignite, resulting in fire or an electric shock.

• Do not place this sewing machine on an unstable surface, such as an unsteady or slanted table, otherwise the

sewing machine may fall, resulting in injuries.

6Special care is required when sewing:

• Always pay close attention to the needle. Do not use bent or damaged needles.

• Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special care is required around the machine needle.

• Switch the sewing machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off when making any adjustments in the needle

area.

• Do not use a damaged or incorrect needle plate, as it could cause the needle to break.

• Do not push or pull the fabric when sewing, and follow careful instruction when free motion stitching so that

you do not deflect the needle and cause it to break.

7This machine is not a toy:

• Your close attention is necessary when the machine is used by or near children.

• The plastic bag that this sewing machine was supplied in should be kept out of the reach of children or disposed

of. Never allow children to play with the bag due to the danger of suffocation.

• Do not use outdoors.

8For a longer service life:

• When storing this machine, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or store the machine

near a space heater, iron, halogen lamp, or other hot objects.

• Use only neutral soaps or detergents to clean the case. Benzene, thinner, and scouring powders can damage the

case and machine, and should never be used.

• Always consult the operation manual when replacing or installing any assemblies, the presser feet, needle, or

other parts to assure correct installation.

9For repair or adjustment:

• If the light unit is damaged, it must be replaced by an authorized dealer.

• In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the back of

the operation manual to inspect and adjust the machine yourself. If the problem persists, please consult your

local authorized Brother dealer.

Use this machine only for its intended use as described in the manual.

Use accessories recommended by the manufacturer as contained in this manual.

Use only the interface cable (USB cable) included with this machine.

Use only the sensor pen included with this machine.

The contents of this manual and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.

For additional product information and updates, visit our website at www.brother.com

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

B-3

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

This machine is intended for household use.

This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced

physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge,

unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the

appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Children should be supervised

to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.

This appliance can be used by children aged from 8 years and above and persons

with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities or lack of experience and

knowledge if they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the

appliance in a safe way and understand the hazards involved. Children shall not

play with the appliance. Cleaning and user maintenance shall not be made by

children without supervision.

FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA

AND CYPRUS ONLY

IMPORTANT

• In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the mark,

rating as marked on plug.

• Always replace the fuse cover. Never use plugs with the fuse cover omitted.

• If the available electrical outlet is not suitable for the plug supplied with this equipment, you should contact your

authorized dealer to obtain the correct lead.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

B-4

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Declaration of Conformity (For USA Only)

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15

of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,

there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause

harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,

the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

• The included interface cable should be used in order to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B digital

device.

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation

100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard

Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA

TEL : (908) 704-1700

declares that the product

Product Name:

Model Number:

Brother Sewing Machine

VM6200D

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

B-5

Laser Notices (For U.S.A. only)

Laser Safety

This sewing machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS)

Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the

sewing machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation.

IEC 60825-1 Specification

This sewing machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825-1:2007 specifications.

The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the machine

contains 7-milliwat, 650-660nanometer wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 24-34 degree at perpendicular

divergence angle, InGaAlP laser diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling or altering this machine.

Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.

FDA Regulations

U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured on and after August 2,

1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label shown on the back of the sewing machine

indicates compliance with the FDA regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.

Brother Industries, Ltd.

15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561, JAPAN

This product complies with FDA performance standards for laser

products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50,

dated June 24, 2007.

CAUTION

• Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual

may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

B-6

Laser Notices (For countries except U.S.A.)

IEC 60825-1 Specification

This sewing machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825-1:2007 specifications.

The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the machine

contains 7-milliwat, 650-660nanometer wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 24-34 degree at perpendicular

divergence angle, InGaAlP laser diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling or altering this machine.

Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.

CAUTION

• This sewing machine has a Class 3B Laser Diode in the Laser Unit. The Laser Unit should not be opened

under any circumstances.

• Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual

may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

OUTSTANDING FEATURES

B-7

Setting Laser Guideline Marker

as a Guide to Sew

The guideline marker shows the sewing position.

You can adjust the sewing position by moving the

guideline marker while checking the guideline

marker on the fabric. You don’t need to look for

the needle drop point to check the sewing

position.

Other various adjustments are available using the

guideline marker.

See “USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH

SEWING STITCH” on page B-76.

Useful Sensor Function - Variety

of Functions

When sewing, you can specify easily the guideline

marker position, the needle drop position, the

width and “L/R SHIFT” of the stitch, and sewing

end point, using the sensor pen.

See “USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH

SEWING STITCH” on page B-76.

Expanding Your Creativity with

Dual Feed Foot

Do you feel like trying a new material, like thin

fabric or nylon fabric?

Included dual feed foot works very effectively

when sewing those difficult materials. This foot

also works effectively when you sew the different

type of materials together, like thin fabric with

thick fabric. You can adjust the feed length for the

various fabric types.

See “Using the Dual Feed Foot” on page B-67.

Sensor Function - Automatic

Pattern Placement

When embroidering, you can set the pattern

position quickly with the automatic positioning

function using the sensor pen.

See “USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN

“EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE”

on page B-83.

LED Pointer Shows You the

Needle Drop Position

Included Embroidery foot with LED pointer

indicates that needle position with a red LED

point.

The LED pointer shows you the location of the

needle penetration so that it is easier to adjust the

embroidery position.

See “Using the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED

Pointer” on page B-61.

OUTSTANDING FEATURES

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE

B-8

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE

BBasic operations

After purchasing your machine, be sure to read this section first. This section provides details on the

initial setup procedures as well as descriptions of this machine’s more useful functions.

Chapter 1 Getting Ready

To learn the operation of the principal parts and the

screens

Page B-20

Chapter 2 Sensor Functions

Try the new function using the supplied sensor pen

Page B-70

SSewing

This section describes procedures for using the various utility stitches as well as other functions. It

provides details on basic machine sewing in addition to the more expressive features of the machine,

from sewing tubular pieces and buttonholes to sewing the character and decorative stitch patterns.

Chapter 1 Sewing Basics

To learn how to prepare for sewing and basic sewing

operations

Page S-2

Chapter 2 Utility Stitches

Pre-programmed with more than 100 frequently used

stitches

Page S-20

Chapter 3 Character/Decorative

Stitches

The variety of stitches widen your creativity

Page S-70

Chapter 4 MY CUSTOM STITCH

Create original decorative stitches

Page S-96

EEmbroidering

This section provides instruction to embroider designs with this machine.

Chapter 1, “Embroidery”, provides details on sewing embroidery patterns stored on the machine as well

as patterns that have been imported. Chapter 2, “Embroidery Edit”, provides details on editing

embroidery patterns to create custom embroidery.

Chapter 1 Embroidery

Maximum 30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches)

for large embroidery designs

Page E-2

Chapter 2 Embroidery Edit

Designs can be combined, rotated or enlarged

Page E-56

AAppendix

This section provides important information for operating this machine.

Chapter 1 How to Create Bobbin

Work

To learn how to create bobbin work

Page A-2

Chapter 2 Maintenance and

Troubleshooting

Find troubleshooting tips and pointers as well as how

to keep your machine in the best working condition.

Page A-18

CONTENTS

B-9

TRADEMARKS

INTRODUCTION................................................. 1

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................ 1

OUTSTANDING FEATURES ................................. 7

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE..... 8

NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR

FUNCTIONS........................................................ 12

Machine .............................................................................. 12

Needle and Presser Foot Section .......................................... 13

Embroidery Unit .................................................................. 14

Operation Buttons................................................................ 14

Using the Flat Bed Attachment............................................. 15

Included Accessories ........................................................... 16

Options................................................................................ 18

BBasic operations

Chapter1 Getting Ready 20

TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF .................. 21

Setting Your Machine for the First Time ............................... 22

LCD SCREEN ...................................................... 24

Using the Machine Setting Mode Key ................................. 28

Using the Sewing Machine Help Key .................................. 36

Using the Operation Guide Function ................................... 37

Using the Sewing Guide Function........................................ 38

Using the Pattern Explanation Function................................ 39

LOWER THREADING......................................... 40

Winding the Bobbin............................................................. 40

Setting the Bobbin................................................................ 45

Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread.............................................. 47

UPPER THREADING .......................................... 48

Upper Threading.................................................................. 48

Using the Twin Needle Mode .............................................. 51

Using Threads that Unwind Quickly .................................... 53

CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT ...................... 55

Removing the Presser Foot ................................................... 55

Attaching the Presser Foot.................................................... 55

Attaching the Optional Presser

Foot with the Included Adapter............................................ 55

CHANGING THE NEEDLE.................................. 57

ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC ................... 58

About the Needle................................................................. 58

Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations.................................... 59

BEFORE EMBROIDERING .................................. 60

Embroidery Step by Step ...................................................... 60

Using the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer.............. 61

Attaching the Embroidery Unit............................................. 64

USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE

ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE........................ 66

Using USB Media or Embroidery Card Reader/USB Card Writer

Module* .............................................................................. 66

Connecting the Machine to the Computer............................ 66

Using a USB Mouse ............................................................. 67

Using the Dual Feed Foot .................................................... 67

Chapter2 Sensor Functions 70

CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE

SENSOR PEN ...................................................... 71

CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN ..................... 71

Using the Sensor Pen Holder ............................................... 72

USING THE SENSOR PEN .................................. 73

Using the Sensor Pen ........................................................... 73

Important Information about Sensor Pen............................... 73

Calibrating the Sensor Pen.................................................... 74

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING

STITCH .............................................................. 76

Sensor Function Area ........................................................... 76

Specifying the Guideline Marker Position

With the Sensor Pen ............................................................. 76

Specifying the Needle Drop Position With the Sensor Pen

...... 78

Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Stitching Width

and Stitch Position................................................................ 79

Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Sewing End Point.......... 81

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN

“EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE

..... 83

Specifying the Embroidering Position With the Sensor Pen

....... 83

SSewing

Chapter1 Sewing Basics 2

SEWING .............................................................. 3

Sewing a Stitch....................................................................... 3

Sewing Reinforcement Stitches............................................... 5

Automatic Reinforcement Stitching ........................................ 5

Sewing Curves........................................................................ 7

Changing Sewing Direction.................................................... 7

Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics.................................................. 7

Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener............................................ 8

Sewing Lightweight Fabrics .................................................... 9

Sewing Stretch Fabrics............................................................ 9

STITCH SETTINGS ............................................. 10

Setting the Stitch Width ........................................................ 10

Setting the Stitch Length ....................................................... 10

Setting the “L/R SHIFT”......................................................... 11

Setting the Thread Tension ................................................... 12

USEFUL FUNCTIONS ........................................ 13

Automatic Thread Cutting .................................................... 13

Adjusting the Needle Drop Position

with the Guideline Marker

(For models equipped with the guideline marker) ................. 14

Using the Knee Lifter ............................................................ 15

Pivoting................................................................................ 15

Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot

Pressure)............................................................................... 17

Needle Position – Stitch Placement ...................................... 18

Locking the Screen ............................................................... 18

Chapter2 Utility Stitches 20

SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES ......................... 21

Selecting a Stitch .................................................................. 21

Saving Your Stitch Settings ................................................... 22

SEWING THE STITCHES .................................... 24

Straight Stitches .................................................................... 24

Dart Seam ............................................................................ 28

Gathering ............................................................................. 29

Flat Fell Seam....................................................................... 29

Pintuck................................................................................. 30

Zigzag Stitches ..................................................................... 31

Elastic Zigzag Stitches .......................................................... 33

Overcasting.......................................................................... 33

Quilting................................................................................ 35

Blind Hem Stitches............................................................... 40

Appliqué .............................................................................. 42

Shelltuck Stitches ................................................................. 43

Scallop Stitches .................................................................... 44

Crazy Quilting...................................................................... 45

Smocking Stitches ................................................................ 45

CONTENTS

B-10

Fagoting ............................................................................... 46

Tape or Elastic Attaching ...................................................... 47

Heirloom.............................................................................. 48

One-step Buttonholes........................................................... 49

Darning................................................................................ 53

Bar Tacks ............................................................................. 54

Button Sewing...................................................................... 55

Eyelet ................................................................................... 57

Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)

...... 57

Zipper Insertion.................................................................... 58

STITCH SETTING CHART................................... 62

Chapter3 Character/Decorative Stitches 70

SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS.......................... 71

Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch

Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch

Patterns/Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns.......... 72

Characters ............................................................................ 72

SEWING STITCH PATTERNS.............................. 75

Sewing Attractive Finishes.................................................... 75

Basic Sewing ........................................................................ 75

Making Adjustments............................................................. 76

EDITING STITCH PATTERNS ............................. 78

Changing the Size ................................................................ 80

Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)

...... 80

Creating a Vertical Mirror Image .......................................... 80

Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image...................................... 80

Sewing a Pattern Continuously ............................................. 80

Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only)...... 81

Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern ............................. 81

Checking the Image.............................................................. 82

COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS ...................... 83

Before Combining ................................................................ 83

Combining Various Stitch Patterns........................................ 83

Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns........................... 84

Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns.............. 85

Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length ...................... 85

Making Step Stitch Patterns

(for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ..................................... 86

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.................... 88

Stitch Data Precautions ........................................................ 88

Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory................... 89

Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media..................................... 90

Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer ................................. 91

Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ......... 92

Recalling from USB Media ................................................... 93

Recalling from the Computer................................................ 94

Chapter4 MY CUSTOM STITCH 96

DESIGNING A STITCH....................................... 97

ENTERING STITCH DATA .................................. 99

USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES .............. 104

Storing Custom Stitches in Your List ................................... 104

Retrieving Stored Stitches ................................................... 105

EEmbroidering

Chapter1 Embroidery 2

SELECTING PATTERNS......................................... 3

Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Brother “Exclusives”/Floral

Alphabet/Bobbin Work Patterns ............................................. 4

Selecting Character Patterns ................................................... 5

Selecting Frame Patterns......................................................... 7

Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards .............................. 7

Selecting Patterns from USB Media/Computer ........................ 8

VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN............ 9

PREPARING THE FABRIC ................................... 11

Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric............. 11

Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame....................... 13

Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges......................... 16

ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME .......... 17

CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION ......... 19

Checking the Pattern Position .............................................. 19

Previewing the Completed Pattern ....................................... 20

SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN............... 21

Embroidery Attractive Finishes............................................. 21

Sewing Embroidery Patterns................................................. 22

Sewing Embroidery Patterns Which Use Appliqué ............... 23

ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY

PROCESS ............................................................. 26

If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread ........................................ 26

If the Thread Breaks During Sewing ..................................... 27

Restarting from the Beginning.............................................. 28

Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power.............. 28

MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS........... 30

Adjusting Thread Tension .................................................... 30

Adjusting the Bobbin Case (with No Color on the Screw)

...... 31

Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function

(END COLOR TRIM)............................................................ 32

Using the Thread Trimming Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)

..... 32

Adjusting the Embroidery Speed .......................................... 33

Changing the Thread Color Display ..................................... 34

Changing the “Embroidery Frame Display”.......................... 35

REVISING THE PATTERN................................... 36

Moving the Pattern .............................................................. 36

Aligning the Pattern and the Needle .................................... 36

Changing the Size of the Pattern .......................................... 37

Rotating the Pattern ............................................................. 38

Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ..................................... 39

Enlarging the Editing Screen................................................. 39

Changing the Density (Alphabet Character and Frame

Patterns Only)...................................................................... 40

Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns............ 40

Embroidering Linked Characters .......................................... 41

Uninterrupted Embroidering (Monochrome - Using a Single

Color) .................................................................................. 43

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ................... 44

Embroidery Data Precautions............................................... 44

Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory......... 45

Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media ........................... 46

Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer ....................... 47

Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory .................. 48

Recalling from USB Media................................................... 49

Recalling from the Computer............................................... 50

EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS .......................... 51

Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1)................... 51

Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2)................... 52

Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns......................................... 53

Chapter2 Embroidery Edit 56

EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS....................... 57

SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT ....................... 58

Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Brother “Exclusives”/Floral

Alphabet Patterns/Frame/Bobbin Work Patterns ................... 59

Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns.................................. 59

EDITING PATTERNS .......................................... 61

Moving the Pattern .............................................................. 63

Rotating the Pattern ............................................................. 63

Changing the Size of the Pattern .......................................... 63

Deleting the Pattern ............................................................. 63

Displaying Patterns in the Screen Magnified by 200% ......... 63

Changing the Configuration of Character Patterns................ 64

Changing Character Spacing................................................ 64

Reducing Character Spacing ................................................ 65

Separating Combined Character Patterns ............................. 65

Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character in a Pattern

...... 66

Embroidering Linked Characters .......................................... 67

Changing the Thread Color.................................................. 67

Creating a Custom Thread Table.......................................... 68

CONTENTS

B-11

Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table................. 71

Designing Repeated Patterns................................................ 72

Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly ................................... 76

Duplicating a Pattern ........................................................... 78

After Editing ......................................................................... 79

COMBINING PATTERNS ................................... 80

Editing Combined Patterns ................................................... 80

Sewing Combined Patterns .................................................. 83

VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS ......... 84

Uninterrupted Embroidering (Monochrome - Using a Single

Color) .................................................................................. 84

Basting Embroidery .............................................................. 84

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.................... 85

AAppendix

Chapter1 How to Create Bobbin Work 2

ABOUT BOBBIN WORK ...................................... 3

PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK ....................... 3

Required Materials................................................................. 3

Upper Threading.................................................................... 4

Preparing the Bobbin Thread ................................................. 5

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING) ............... 9

Positioning the Fabric and Sewing ......................................... 9

Bobbin Work Free Motion Sewing ....................................... 11

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)..... 12

Selecting the Pattern ............................................................ 12

Start Embroidering ............................................................... 14

ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION ................ 16

TROUBLESHOOTING........................................ 17

Chapter2 Maintenance and

Troubleshooting 18

CARE AND MAINTENANCE............................... 19

Restrictions on oiling ........................................................... 19

Precautions on storing the machine ..................................... 19

Cleaning the LCD Screen ..................................................... 19

Cleaning the Machine Casing .............................................. 19

Cleaning the Race ................................................................ 19

Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area ....................... 21

About the Maintenance Message ......................................... 21

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN.................................. 22

Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen Display..................... 22

Touch Panel is Malfunctioning............................................. 22

TROUBLESHOOTING........................................ 23

Frequent troubleshooting topics ........................................... 23

Upper thread tightened up ................................................... 23

Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric ................................ 24

Incorrect thread tension ....................................................... 26

Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed...... 27

List of Symptoms.................................................................. 30

ERROR MESSAGES ............................................. 34

SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... 37

UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE

..... 38

Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media ................................. 38

Upgrade Procedure Using Computer ................................... 39

INDEX ................................................................ 40

NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

B-12

The names of the various parts of the sewing machine and their functions are described below. Before

using the sewing machine, carefully read these descriptions to learn the names of the machine parts.

Machine

■Front View

aTop cover

Open the top cover to thread the machine and wind the

bobbin.

bPre-tension disk

Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk when winding the

bobbin thread. (page B-40)

cThread guide for bobbin winding

Pass the thread through this thread guide when winding the

bobbin thread. (page B-40)

dSpool pin

Place a spool of thread on the spool pin. (page B-48)

eSpool cap

Use the spool cap to hold the spool of thread in place.

(page B-48)

fSupplemental spool pin

Use this spool pin to wind the bobbin thread, or to sew with the

twin needle. (page B-40, B-51)

gBobbin winder

Use the bobbin winder when winding the bobbin. (page B-40)

hLCD (liquid crystal display)

Settings for the selected stitch and error messages appear in

the LCD. (page B-24)

iSpeaker

jKnee lifter

Use the knee lifter to raise and lower the presser foot.

(page S-15)

kKnee lifter slot

Insert the knee lifter into the slot. (page S-15)

lOperation buttons (7 buttons) and sewing speed

controller

Use these buttons and the slide to operate the sewing

machine. (page B-14)

mFlat bed attachment with accessory compartment

Store presser feet and bobbins in the accessory compartment

of the flat bed attachment. When sewing cylindrical pieces,

remove the flat bed attachment. (page B-15)

nThread cutter

Pass the threads through the thread cutter to cut them.

(page B-50)

oThread guide plate

Pass the thread around the thread guide plate when threading

upper thread. (page B-48)

■Right-side/Rear View

aConnector for the presser foot

Connect the dual feed foot or embroidery foot with LED

pointer. (page B-61, B-67)

bHandle

Carry the sewing machine by its handle when transporting the

machine.

cPresser foot lever

Raise and lower the presser foot lever to raise and lower the

presser foot. (page B-55)

dAir vent

The air vent allows the air surrounding the motor to circulate.

Do not cover the air vent while the sewing machine is being

used.

eMain power switch

Use the main power switch to turn the sewing machine ON and

OFF. (page B-21)

fFoot controller

Depress the foot controller to control the speed of the machine.

(page S-4)

gPower cord receptacle

Insert the power cord into the machine receptacle. (page B-21)

hSensor pen holder connector

Connect the included sensor pen holder. (page B-72)

iSensor pen jack

Connect the sensor pen. (page B-71)

jFoot controller jack

Insert the foot controller plug into its jack on the machine.

(page S-4)

kUSB port for computer

In order to import/export patterns between a computer and the

machine, plug the USB cable into the USB port. (page B-66,

S-91, E-47)

lUSB port for mouse / media

In order to send patterns from/to USB media, plug the USB

media directly into the USB port. (page B-66, S-90, E-46)

Connect the USB mouse to operate with mouse. (page B-67)

mHandwheel

Rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to raise

and lower the needle. The wheel should be turned toward the

front of the machine.

NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

B-13

Needle and Presser Foot Section

aButtonhole lever

The buttonhole lever is used with the one-step buttonhole foot

to create buttonholes. (page S-49)

bPresser foot holder screw

Use the presser foot holder screw to hold the presser foot in

place. (page B-55, B-61)

cPresser foot holder

The presser foot is attached to the presser foot holder.

(page B-55)

dPresser foot

The presser foot consistently applies pressure to the fabric as

sewing takes place. Attach the appropriate presser foot for the

selected stitch. (page B-55)

eFeed dogs

The feed dogs feed the fabric in the sewing direction.

fBobbin cover

Open the bobbin cover to set the bobbin. (page B-45, S-32)

gNeedle plate cover

Remove the needle plate cover to clean the race. (page S-26,

E-22)

hNeedle plate

The needle plate is marked with guides to help sew straight

seams. (page S-26)

iNeedle bar thread guide

Pass the upper thread through the needle bar thread guide.

(page B-48)

jNeedle clamp screw

Use the needle clamp screw to hold the needle in place.

(page B-55)

Measurements on the needle plate, bobbin cover

(with mark) and needle plate cover

The measurements on the bobbin cover are

references for patterns with a middle (center)

needle position. The measurements on the needle

plate and the needle plate cover are references for

stitches with a left needle position.

aFor stitches with a middle (center) needle position

bFor stitches with a left needle position

cLeft needle position on the needle plate <inch>

dLeft needle position on the needle plate <cm>

eMiddle (center) needle position on the bobbin cover

(with mark) <inch>

fLeft needle position on the needle plate cover

<inch>

NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

B-14

Embroidery Unit

aCarriage

The carriage moves the embroidery frame automatically when

embroidering. (page B-64)

bRelease button (located under the embroidery unit)

Press the release button to remove the embroidery unit.

(page B-64)

cEmbroidery frame holder

Insert the embroidery frame into the embroidery frame holder

to hold the frame in place. (page E-17)

dFrame-securing lever

Press the frame-securing lever down to secure the embroidery

frame. (page E-17)

eEmbroidery unit connection

Insert the embroidery unit connection into the connection port

when attaching the embroidery unit. (page B-64)

Operation Buttons

a“Start/Stop” button

Press this button and the machine will sew a few stitches at a

slow speed and then begin sewing at the speed set by the

sewing speed controller. Press the button again to stop the

machine. Hold the button in to sew at the machine’s slowest

speed. The button changes color according to the machine’s

operation mode.

b“Reverse Stitch” button

For straight, zigzag, and elastic zigzag stitch patterns that take

reverse stitches, the machine will sew reverse stitches at low

speed only while holding down the “Reverse Stitch” button.

The stitches are sewn in the opposite position.

For other stitches, use this button to sew reinforcement

stitches at the beginning and end of sewing. Press and hold

this button, and the machine sews 3 stitches in the same spot

and stops automatically. (see page S-5)

c“Reinforcement Stitch” button

Use this button to sew a single stitch repeatedly and tie-off.

For character/decorative stitches, press this button to end with

a full stitch instead of at a mid-point. The LED light beside this

button lights up while the machine is sewing a full motif, and

automatically turns off when the sewing is stopped. (see page

S-5)

d“Needle Position” button

Use this button when changing sewing direction or for detailed

sewing in small areas. Press this button to raise or lower the

needle position. With this button, you can lower and raise the

needle to sew a single stitch.

e“Thread Cutter” button

Press this button after sewing to automatically trim the excess

thread.

f“Presser Foot Lifter” button

Press this button to lower the presser foot and apply pressure

to the fabric. Press this button again to raise the presser foot.

gSewing Speed controller

Use this controller to adjust the sewing speed. Move the slide

to the left to sew at slower speeds. Move the slide to the right

to sew at higher speeds. Beginners should sew at a slow

speed.

h“Automatic Threading” button

Use this button to automatically thread the needle.

CAUTION

• Before inserting or removing the embroidery

unit, turn the main power to OFF.

• After the embroidery frame is set in the frame

holder, be sure the frame-securing lever is

correctly lowered.

Green: The machine is ready to sew or is sewing.

Red: The machine cannot sew.

CAUTION

• Do not press the thread cutter button after the

threads have been cut. The needle may break

and threads may become tangled, or damage

to the machine may occur.

NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

B-15

Using the Flat Bed Attachment

Pull the top of the flat bed attachment to open the

accessory compartment.

A presser foot storage tray is stored in the accessory

compartment of the flat bed attachment.

aStorage space of the flat bed attachment

bPresser foot storage space of the flat bed

attachment

cPresser foot storage tray

There are also storage spaces for optional presser

feet, such as the vertical stitch alignment foot “V”.

NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

B-16

Included Accessories

12345 67

8*91011

12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

38 39 40*41 42 43 44 45*

46*47 48 49 50 51 52 53

*Included accessories vary depending on the countries or regions.

75/11 2 needles

90/14 2 needles

90/14 2 needles:

Ball point needle (gold colored)

2.0/11 needle

75/11

2 needles

NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

B-17

54*55 56 57 58*

No. Part Name Part Code

Americas Others

1 Zigzag foot “J” (on machine) XF3022-001

2 Monogramming foot “N” X53840-351

3 Overcasting foot “G” XC3098-051

4 Zipper foot “I” X59370-051

5 Buttonhole foot “A” X57789-251

6 Blind stitch foot “R” X56409-051

7 Button fitting foot “M” 130489-001

8Straight stitch foot*SA167 F042N:

XC1973-052

9 Embroidery foot “W+” with

LED pointer

FLED1: XF4168-001 (EU area)

XF3124-001 (other area)

10 1/4” quilting foot with guide SA185 F057:

XC7416-252

11 Free motion open toe quilting

foot “O”

XF4873-001

12 Dual feed foot DF1: XF4166-001 (EU area)

XF3165-001 (other area)

13 Adapter XF3613-001

14 Screw (small) XA4813-051

15 Needle set X58358-051

16 Twin needle X59296-151

17 Ball point needle set XD0705-051

18 Bobbin × 10

(One is on machine.)

SA156 SFB:

XA5539-151

19 Seam ripper XF4967-001

20 Scissors XC1807-121

21 Cleaning brush X59476-051

22 Eyelet punch XZ5051-001

23 Screwdriver (small) X55468-051

24 Screwdriver (large) XC4237-021

25 Disc-shaped screwdriver XC1074-051

26 Vertical spool pin XC8619-052

27 Spool cap (small) 130013-154

28 Spool cap (medium) × 2

(One is on machine.)

X55260-153

29 Spool cap (large) 130012-054

30 Spool cap (special) XA5752-121

31 Bobbin clip × 10 XE3060-001

32 Spool felt (on machine) X57045-051

33 Spool net × 2 XA5523-050

34 Embroidery needle plate

cover

XE5131-001

35 Touch pen (stylus) XA9940-051

36 Knee lifter XA6941-052

37 USB cable XD0745-051

38 Alternate bobbin case

(no color on the screw)

XC8167-551

39 Bobbin case (gray, for bobbin

work)

XE8298-001

40 Straight stitch needle plate*XF3076-001

41 Cord guide bobbin cover

(with single hole)

XE8991-101

42 Bobbin cover (with mark) XF0750-101

43 Bobbin cover (on machine) XE8992-101

44 Foot controller XD0501-151(EU area)

XC8816-051 (other area)

45 Embroidery frame set

(medium) H 10 cm × W 10 cm

(H 4 inches × W 4 inches)*

SA438 EF74:

XC8480-152

46 Embroidery frame set (large)

H 18 cm × W 13 cm

(H 7 inches × W 5 inches)*

SA439 EF75:

XC8481-152

47 Embroidery frame set

(extra large)

H 30 cm × W 18 cm

(H 12 inches × W 7 inches)

SA440 EF76:

XC8482-152

48 Embroidery bobbin thread SA-EBT XC6283-001

49 Stabilizer material SA519 BM3:

XE0806-001

50 Grid sheet set SA507 GS3:

X81277-151

51 Chalk pencil XE8568-001

52 Sensor pen XF4992-001 (EU area)

XF3116-001 (other area)

53 Pen holder XF2973-001

54 Dust cover* XF4569-001 (882-C40)

XF4113-001 (882-C42)

55 Accessory bag XC4487-021

56 Operation manual This manual

57 Quick Reference Guide XF3617-001

58 MY CUSTOM STITCH CD*XE8901-001

Memo

• Foot controller: Model T

This foot controller can be used on the

machine with product code 882-C40/C42.

The product code is mentioned on the

machine rating plate.

Memo

• Always use accessories recommended for

this machine.

• Placing bobbin clips on bobbins helps

prevent the thread from unwinding from the

bobbin. In addition, snapping bobbin clips

together allows the bobbins to be

conveniently stored and prevents them from

rolling around if they are dropped.

No. Part Name Part Code

Americas Others

NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

B-18

Options

The following are available as optional accessories to be purchased separately from your authorized

Brother dealer.

123456

78910111213

14 15 16 17 18 19

No. Part Name Part Code

Americas Others

1 Multi function foot controller SAMFFC

(U.S.A.)

SAMFFCC

(Canada)

MFFC1:

XF4159-001

MFFC1OC:

XF4471-001

(Australia)

2 Square embroidery frame

H 15 cm x W 15 cm (H 6

inches x W 6 inches)

SA448

(U.S.A.)

SA448C

(Canada)

SEF150:

XF4163-001

3 Embroidery foot “W” XF4012-001

4 Border embroidery frame

H 30 cm x W 10 cm (H 12

inches x W 4 inches)

SABF6200D1

(U.S.A.)

SABF6200D1C

(Canada)

BF3:

XF4170-001

5 10 spool stand SA561

(U.S.A.)

SA561C

(Canada)

TS5:

XF4175-001

6 King spool thread stand SA562

(U.S.A.)

SA562C

(Canada)

TS6:

XF4180-001

7 Wide table SAWT6200D

(U.S.A.)

SAWT6200DC

(Canada)

WT10:

XF4184-001

8 Embroidery card Reader SAECRI

9 Embroidery card –

10 Stabilizer material SA519 BM3:

XE0806-001

Water soluble stabilizer SA520 BM5:

XE0615-001

11 Seam guide SA538 SG1:

XC8483-052

12 Walking foot SA140 F033N:

XC2214-052

13 Side cutter foot SA177 F054:

XC3879-152

14 Free motion quilting foot “C” XF4737-001

15 Free motion echo quilting

foot “E”

XE0766-001

16 Free-motion quilting foot SA129 F005N:

XC1948-052

17 Circular attachment SACIRC1 CIRC1:

XE3527-001

18 Stitch in the ditch foot SA191 F065:

XF2339-001

19 Vertical stitching alignment

foot “V”

SA189 F063:

XE5224-001

Memo

• All specifications are correct at the time of

printing. Please be aware that some

specifications may change without notice.

Note

• Embroidery cards purchased in foreign

countries may not work with your machine.

• Visit your dealer or nearest authorized

Brother dealer for a complete listing of

optional accessories and embroidery cards

available for your machine.

No. Part Name Part Code

Americas Others

Basic

operations

This section provides details on the initial setup procedures as well as descriptions of this machine’s more

useful functions.

Page number starts with “B” in this section.

Chapter1 Getting Ready .......................................................B-20

Chapter2 Sensor Functions ...................................................B-70

Chapter 1

BBasic operations

Getting Ready

TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF........................21

Setting Your Machine for the First Time ...................................22

LCD SCREEN............................................................24

■Home Page Screen ................................................................... 24

■Utility Stitch Screen................................................................. 25

■Key Functions........................................................................... 26

Using the Machine Setting Mode Key ......................................28

■Selecting the “Eco Mode” or “Shutoff Support Mode”............. 32

■Changing the Pointer Shape When a USB Mouse Is Used ........ 32

■Selecting the Initial Screen Display.......................................... 32

■Choosing the Display Language................................................ 33

■

Changing the Background Colors of the Embroidery Patterns

....... 33

■Specifying the Size of Pattern Thumbnails ............................... 34

■Saving a Settings Screen Image to USB Media.......................... 35

Using the Sewing Machine Help Key .......................................36

Using the Operation Guide Function ........................................37

Using the Sewing Guide Function .............................................38

Using the Pattern Explanation Function ....................................39

LOWER THREADING ..............................................40

Winding the Bobbin..................................................................40

■Using the Supplemental Spool Pin............................................ 40

■Using the Spool Pin.................................................................. 43

■Untangling Thread from Beneath the Bobbin Winder Seat ...... 44

Setting the Bobbin ....................................................................45

Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread...................................................47

UPPER THREADING................................................48

Upper Threading.......................................................................48

Using the Twin Needle Mode ..................................................51

Using Threads that Unwind Quickly .........................................53

■Using the Spool Net................................................................. 53

■Using the Vertical Spool Pin .................................................... 54

CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT............................55

Removing the Presser Foot........................................................55

Attaching the Presser Foot ........................................................55

Attaching the Optional Presser Foot with the Included Adapter

.......55

■Attaching the Walking foot ...................................................... 56

CHANGING THE NEEDLE .......................................57

ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC......................... 58

About the Needle......................................................................58

Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations ........................................59

BEFORE EMBROIDERING........................................60

Embroidery Step by Step .......................................................... 60

Using the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer ................. 61

■Attaching the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer .......... 61

■Checking the Needle Drop Point With the Embroidery

Foot “W+” with LED Pointer.................................................... 62

■Adjusting the LED Pointer ........................................................ 63

■Adjusting the Brightness of the LED Pointer............................. 63

Attaching the Embroidery Unit .................................................64

■About the Embroidery Unit...................................................... 64

■Removing the Embroidery Unit ............................................... 65

USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE

ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE .............................66

Using USB Media or Embroidery Card Reader/USB Card

Writer Module*........................................................................ 66

Connecting the Machine to the Computer ............................... 66

Using a USB Mouse.................................................................. 67

■Clicking a Key...........................................................................67

■Changing Pages.........................................................................67

Using the Dual Feed Foot......................................................... 67

■Attaching the Dual Feed Foot ...................................................68

■

When the Snap-On Foot of the Dual Feed Foot is Detached

......68

■Using the Dual Feed Position Lever ..........................................68

■

Adjusting the Amount of Fabric Feeding of the Dual Feed Foot

.......69

TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-21

TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF

WARNING

• Use only regular household electricity for the power source. Using other power sources may result in fire,

electric shock, or damage to the machine.

• Make sure that the plugs on the power cord are firmly inserted into the electrical outlet and the power

cord receptacle on the machine.

• Do not insert the plug on the power cord into an electrical outlet that is in poor condition.

• Turn the main power to OFF and remove the plug in the following circumstances:

When you are away from the machine

After using the machine

When the power fails during use

When the machine does not operate correctly due to a bad connection or a disconnection

During electrical storms

CAUTION

• Use only the power cord included with this machine.

• Do not use extension cords or multi-plug adapters with many other appliances plugged in to them. Fire or

electric shock may result.

• Do not touch the plug with wet hands. Electric shock may result.

• When unplugging the machine, always turn the main power to OFF first. Always grasp the plug to remove

it from the outlet. Pulling on the cord may damage the cord, or lead to fire or electric shock.

• Do not allow the power cord to be cut, damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled, twisted, or bundled.

Do not place heavy objects on the cord. Do not subject the cord to heat. These things may damage the

cord, or cause fire or electric shock. If the cord or plug is damaged, take the machine to your authorized

dealer for repairs before continuing use.

• Unplug the power cord if the machine is not to be used for a long period of time. Otherwise, a fire may

result.

• When leaving the machine unattended, either the main switch of the machine should be turned to OFF or

the plug must be removed from the socket-outlet.

• When servicing the machine or when removing covers, the machine must be unplugged.

• For U.S.A. only

This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). To reduce the risk of electrical

shock, this plug is intended to fit in a polarized outlet only one way.

If the plug does not fit fully in the outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit, contact a qualified

electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not modify the plug in any way.

TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF

B-22

aInsert the power supply cord into the power

cord receptacle, then insert the plug into a

wall outlet.

aMain power switch

bPower supply cord

bTurn the main power switch to “I” to turn

on the machine.

aOFF

bON

cWhen the machine is turned on, the

opening movie is played. Touch anywhere

on the screen to display the Home page

screen.

dTurn the main power switch to “O” to turn

off the machine.

Setting Your Machine for the First

Time

When you first turn on the machine, set the

language and time/date to your language and local

time/date. Follow the procedure below when the

settings screen appears automatically.

aPress and to set your local language.

bPress .

cThe message screen, confirming if you want

to set time/date, appears. To set the

time/date, press ; to cancel the

setting, press .

→The screen to set time/date appears.

Note

• When the straight stitch needle plate is on

the machine, the needle will automatically

move to the middle position.

Memo

• When the machine is turned on, the needle

and the feed dogs will make sound when

they move; this is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

• Only touch the screen with your finger or the

included touch pen. Do not use a sharp pencil,

screwdriver, or other hard or sharp object. It is

not necessary to press hard on the screen.

Pressing too hard or using a sharp object may

damage the screen.

Memo

• If the machine is turned off in the middle of

sewing in the “Sewing” function, the

operation will not continued after turning the

power on again.

TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-23

dPress or to set time/date.

aPress to display the time on the screen.

bSet the year (YYYY), month (MM) and date (DD).

cSelect whether 24h or 12h setting to display.

dSet the current time.

ePress to start using your machine.

→The clock starts from 0 second of the time you set.

Note

• The time/date you set may be cleared, if

you don’t turn on the machine for a certain

period.

LCD SCREEN

B-24

■Home Page Screen

LCD SCREEN

CAUTION

• Only touch the screen with your finger or the included touch pen. Do not use a sharp pencil, screwdriver,

or other hard or sharp object. It is not necessary to press hard on the screen. Pressing too hard or using a

sharp object may damage the screen.

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page

a“Sewing” key Press this key to sew utility stitches or character or decorative stitch

patterns.

See the “Key

Functions” table.

B-26

b“Embroidery” key Attach the embroidery unit and press this key to embroider patterns. E-3

c“Embroidery Edit” key Press this key to combine embroidery patterns. With the “Embroidery

Edit” functions, you can also create original embroidery patterns or

frame patterns.

E-57

LCD SCREEN

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-25

■Utility Stitch Screen

Press a key with your finger to select the stitch pattern, to select a machine function, or to select an

operation indicated on the key. When the key display is light gray, the function is not currently available.

* All key functions of the LCD are explained in the “Key Functions” table on the following page.

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page

aNeedle position

setting display

Shows single or twin needle mode setting, and the needle stop

position.

–

Single needle/down

position

Single needle/up position

Twin needle/down

position

Twin needle/up position

bSelected stitch

display

Shows the name and code number of the selected stitch. S-3

cPresser foot display Shows the presser foot code. Attach the presser foot indicated in this

display before sewing.

B-55

dStitch preview Shows a preview of the selected stitch. When shown at 100%, the

stitch appears in the screen at nearly its actual size.

S-21

ePattern display size Shows the approximate size of the pattern selected.

: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern

: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern

: 1/4 the size of the sewn pattern

* The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type

of fabric and thread that is used.

S-21

fStitch selection

screen

Press the key for the pattern you want to sew. Use

to change to different stitch groups.

S-21

gPage display Shows additional pages that can be displayed. –

hScroll key Press or , to move one page at a time, or touch anywhere on

the bar to jump ahead for additional pages of stitches.

–

LCD SCREEN

B-26

■Key Functions

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page

a“Utility Stitch” key Press this key to select a straight stitch, zigzag stitch, buttonhole, blind hem

stitch, or other stitches commonly used in garment construction.

S-21

b“Character/

Decorative Stitch” key

Press this key to select character or decorative stitch patterns. S-71

cScreen lock key Press this key to lock the screen. When the screen is locked, the various

settings, such as the stitch width and stitch length, are locked and cannot be

changed. Press this key again to unlock the settings.

S-18

dHome page screen

key

Press this key anytime it is displayed to return to the home page screen and

select a different category - “Sewing”, “Embroidery” or “Embroidery Edit”.

B-24

eNeedle mode

selection key

(Single/Double)

Press this key to select twin needle sewing mode. The sewing mode changes

between single needle mode and twin needle mode each time you press the

key. If the key display is light gray, the selected stitch pattern cannot be sewn

in the twin needle mode.

B-51

fSensor function key Press this key to use the sensor function. B-76

gImage key Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern. S-22

hMachine’s memory

key

Press this key to select from 3 memory functions; retrieving, storing or reset. S-22,

S-89,

S-91

i“L/R SHIFT” key Shows the tendency of Left/Right of the center line of the original zigzag stitch

currently selected stitch pattern.

S-11

jThread tension key Shows the automatic thread tension setting of the currently selected stitch

pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to change the thread tension

settings.

S-12

kClock key Press this key to set the clock to your local time. B-22

lPresser foot/Needle

exchange key

Press this key before changing the needle, the presser foot, etc. This key locks

all key and button functions to prevent operation of the machine.

B-55 to

B-57

mSewing machine help

key

Press this key to see explanations on how to use the machine. B-36

nMachine setting

mode key

Press this key to change the needle stop position, change the volume of

operation sound, adjust the pattern or screen, and change other machine

settings.

B-28

a db c

lmn

LCD SCREEN

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-27

For additional operational information, refer to page reference number listed above.

oStitch width and

stitch length key

Shows the zigzag width and stitch length settings of the currently selected

stitch pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to adjust the zigzag width

and stitch length settings.

S-10

pGuideline marker key Press this key to display the guideline marker along the sewing line. The

guideline marker makes it easier to sew stitches that align with the fabric edge

or other marker on the fabric.

S-14

qMirror image key Press this key to create a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern. If the key

display is light gray, a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern cannot be

sewn.

S-21

rAutomatic thread

cutting key

Press this key to set the automatic thread cutting function. Set the automatic

thread cutting function before sewing to have the machine automatically sew

reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on the

pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches) and trim the threads after

sewing.

S-13

sAutomatic

reverse/reinforcement

stitch key

Press this key to use the automatic reverse/reinforcement stitching setting.

If you select this setting before sewing, the machine will automatically sew

reverse stitches or reinforcement stitches depending on the pattern, at the

beginning and end of sewing.

S-5

tFree motion mode

key

Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode.

The presser foot is raised to an appropriate height and the feed dog is lowered

for free motion quilting.

S-39

uPivot key Press this key to select the pivot setting. When the pivot setting is selected,

stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the presser foot

automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted, the presser foot is

automatically lowered.

• If this key appears as , the pivot function cannot be used.

• Be sure the needle position on page B-29 of Machine Settings is set to the

down position.

S-15

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page

LCD SCREEN

B-28

Using the Machine Setting Mode Key

Press to change the default machine settings (needle stop position, embroidery speed, opening

display, etc.). To display the different settings screens, press for “Sewing settings”, for

“General settings” or for “Embroidery settings”.

Sewing settings

aSelect whether to use the sewing speed controller to determine the zigzag width (see page S-38).

bMake adjustments to character or decorative stitch patterns (see page S-76).

cAdjust the presser foot height. (Select the height of the presser foot when the presser foot is raised.)

dAdjust the presser foot pressure. (The higher the number, the greater the pressure will be. Set the pressure at “3”

for normal sewing.) (see page S-17)

If the dual feed foot is installed and its roller is lowered, the pressure setting is fixed at “2” and cannot be changed.

eFine tune the feed of the dual feed foot (see page B-67).

fSelect whether “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight stitch (Middle)” is the utility stitch that is automatically

selected when the machine is turned on. (see page S-21)

gSelect whether “Utility Stitch” or “Quilt Stitch” displayed first on the stitch selection screen when the “Sewing” is

selected.

hYou can activate this setting after connecting the optional multi-function foot controller. (These settings are not

operable unless the optional multi-function foot controller is attached to the machine.)

iChange the height of the presser foot when sewing is stopped when the pivot setting is selected (see page S-15).

Adjust the presser foot to one of the three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm and 7.5 mm). (see page S-15)

jChange the height of the presser foot when the machine is set to free motion sewing mode (see page S-39).

kWhen set to “ON”, the thickness of the fabric is automatically detected by an internal sensor while sewing. This

enables the fabric to be fed smoothly (see pages S-8 and S-17).

lAdjust the guideline marker position and brightness (see page S-14).

mPress to save the current settings screen image to USB media (see page B-35)

Memo

• Press or next to the page numbers, to display a different settings screen.

LCD SCREEN

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-29

General settings

aSelect the needle stop position (the needle position when the machine is not operating) to be up or down. Select

the down position when using the pivot key. (see page S-15)

bSelect the operation of the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” button from the following two sequences (see

page S-18).

Each press of the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” button:

“ON” – raises the needle, stops it at a nearly lowered position, then lowers it

“OFF” – raises the needle, then lowers it

cChange the shape of the pointer when a USB mouse is used (see page B-32).

dTurn the “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” “ON” or “OFF”. If it is turned “OFF”, the machine can be used without

thread. (see page S-4, E-26)

eChange the speaker volume. Increase the number for louder volume, decrease for softer volume.

fSelect to save the machine power by setting the “Eco Mode” or the “Shutoff Support Mode” (see page B-32).

gSelect the initial screen that is displayed when the machine is turned on (see page B-32).

hChange the display language (see page B-33).

CAUTION

• If “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” is set to “OFF”, remove the upper thread. If the machine is used

with the upper thread threaded, the machine will not be able to detect if the thread has become tangled.

Continuing to use the machine with tangled thread may cause damage.

LCD SCREEN

B-30

aChange the brightness of the needle area and work area lights.

bChange the screen display brightness (see page A-22).

cCalibrate the sensor function (see page B-74).

dDisplay the service count which is a reminder to take your machine in for regular servicing. (Contact your

authorized dealer for details.)

eDisplay the total number of stitches sewn on this machine.

fThe “No.” is the internal machine number for the embroidery and sewing machine.

gDisplay the program version. “Version 1” shows the program version of the LCD panel, “Version 2” shows the

program version of the machine.

Memo

• The latest version of software is installed in your machine. Check with your local authorized Brother

dealer or at “ http://solutions.brother.com ” for available updates (see page A-38).

LCD SCREEN

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-31

Embroidery settings

aSelect from among 16 embroidery frame displays (see page E-35).

bChange the thread color display on the “Embroidery” screen; thread number, color name (see page E-34).

cWhen the thread number “#123” is selected, select from six thread brands (see page E-34).

dAdjust the maximum embroidery speed setting (see page E-33).

eAdjust the upper thread tension for embroidering (see page E-30).

fSelect the height of the embroidery foot “W+” during embroidering (see page E-11).

gChange the initial mode of the display (Embroidery/Embroidery Edit) (see page E-4).

hChange the color of the background for the embroidery display area (see page B-33).

iChange the color of the background for the thumbnail area (see page B-33).

jPress to specify the size of pattern thumbnails (see page B-34).

kChange the display units (mm/inch).

lAdjust the distance between the pattern and the basting stitching (see page E-84).

mAdjusting the position and brightness of the embroidery foot with LED pointer (see page B-63).

LCD SCREEN

B-32

■Selecting the “Eco Mode” or

“Shutoff Support Mode”

You can save the machine power by setting the eco

mode or the shutoff support mode.

If you leave the machine without using for a

specified period of time, the machine enters in one

of these modes.

“Eco Mode”;

Machine will enter a sleep mode. Touch the screen

or any operational button to continue sewing.

“Shutoff Support Mode”;

Machine will turn off after set period of time. Turn

machine off and then back on to restart sewing.

Press the “Start/Stop” button or touch the screen

display to recover from these modes.

aPress .

→The settings screen appears.

bPress .

→The General settings screen appears.

cDisplay page 5 of the General settings

screen.

dUse or to select the time until

entering the mode.

■Changing the Pointer Shape When a

USB Mouse Is Used

In the settings screen, the shape can be selected for

the pointer that appears when a USB mouse is

connected. Depending upon the background color,

select the desired shape from the three that are

available.

aPress .

→The settings screen appears.

bPress .

→The General settings screen appears.

cDisplay page 4 of the General settings

screen.

dUse or to choose the pointer shape

from the three settings available ( ,

and ).

ePress to return to the original screen.

■Selecting the Initial Screen Display

The Initial screen that appears on the machine can

be changed.

aPress .

→The settings screen appears.

bPress .

→The General settings screen appears.

cDisplay page 5 of the General settings

screen.

Condition Eco Mode Shutoff Support

Mode

Available time 0 - 120 (minute) 1 - 12 (hour)

“Start/Stop” button Green flashing Green slow flashing

Suspended function Machine light,

Screen display, LED

pointer, Guideline

marker

All functions

After recovering The machine starts

from the previous

operation.

You need to turn off

the machine.

Note

• If you turn off the machine while the

machine is in the “Eco Mode” or the

“Shutoff Support Mode”, wait for about 5

seconds before turning on the machine

again.

Memo

• For details on changing the background

color, refer to “Changing the Background

Colors of the Embroidery Patterns” on

page B-33.

Memo

• The setting remains selected even if the

machine is turned off.

LCD SCREEN

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-33

dUse or to select the setting for the

initial screen display.

*Opening Screen: When the machine is turned on,

the home page screen appears after the opening

movie screen is touched.

*Home Page: When the machine is turned on, the

home page screen appears.

*Sewing/Embroidery Screen: When the machine is

turned on, the “Embroidery” screen appears if the

embroidery unit is attached to the machine, or the

sewing screen appears if the embroidery unit is not

attached to the machine.

ePress to return to the original screen.

■Choosing the Display Language

aPress .

→The settings screen appears.

bPress .

→The General settings screen appears.

cDisplay page 5 of the General settings

screen.

dUse and to choose the display

language.

aDisplay language

ePress to return to the original screen.

■Changing the Background Colors of

the Embroidery Patterns

In the settings screen, the background colors can be

changed for the embroidery pattern and pattern

thumbnails. Depending on the pattern color, select

the desired background color from the 66 settings

available. Different background colors can be

selected for the embroidery pattern and pattern

thumbnails.

aPress .

→The settings screen appears.

bPress .

→The Embroidery settings screen appears.

cDisplay page 9 of the Embroidery settings

screen.

dPress .

aEmbroidery pattern background

bPattern thumbnails background

Memo

• When using the “Embroidery” or

“Embroidery Edit”, touch to

directly access the Embroidery settings

screen.

LCD SCREEN

B-34

eSelect the background color from the 66

settings available.

aEmbroidery pattern background

bSelected color

aPattern thumbnails background

bSelected color

fPress to return to the original screen.

■Specifying the Size of Pattern

Thumbnails

The thumbnails for selecting an embroidery pattern

can be set to be displayed at the smaller size or a

larger size. The larger size is 1.5 times the smaller

size.

aPress .

→The settings screen appears.

bPress .

→The Embroidery settings screen appears.

cDisplay page 9 of the Embroidery settings

screen.

Memo

• The setting remains selected even if the

machine is turned off.

LCD SCREEN

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-35

dPress or to select the desired

thumbnail size.

■Saving a Settings Screen Image to

USB Media

An image of the settings screen can be saved as a

BMP file.

A maximum of 100 images can be saved on a single

USB media at one time.

aInsert the USB media into the USB port on

the right side of the machine.

aUSB port

bUSB media

bPress .

→The settings screen appears. Select the settings

screen page, make the changes that you want, and

then save the screen image.

cPress .

→The image file will be saved to the USB media.

dRemove the USB media, and then for future

reference, check the saved image using a

computer.

The files for Settings screen images are saved with the

name “S##.BMP”.

* “##” in the name “S##.BMP” will automatically be

replaced with a number between S00 and S99.

Note

• When thumbnail size setting has been

changed the pattern selection screen will

not immediately reflect the chosen size. To

view the patterns with the new thumbnail

size, return to the category selection

screen, and then select the pattern category

again.

Note

• If 100 image files have already been saved

on the USB media, the following message

appears. In this case, delete a file from the

USB media or use different USB media.

LCD SCREEN

B-36

Using the Sewing Machine Help Key

Press to open the sewing machine help screen. Three functions are available from the screen

shown below.

aPress this key to see explanation for upper threading, winding the bobbin, changing the presser foot, preparing to

embroider a pattern, and how to use the machine (see page B-39).

bPress this key to select utility stitches when you are not sure which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch (see page

B-37).

cPress this key to see an explanation of the stitch selected (see page B-38).

LCD SCREEN

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-37

Using the Operation Guide Function

Press to open the screen shown below. Six categories are displayed at the top of the screen.

Press a key to see more information about that category.

displays information about

the main parts of the machine and their

functions. This is the first screen displayed

when you press .

displays information about

the operation buttons.

displays information about

threading the machine, changing presser

feet, etc. Some of the functions are described

in the movies. Watch these movies for a

better understanding of the functions.

displays information about

attaching the embroidery unit, preparing

fabric for embroidering, etc.

displays troubleshooting

information.

displays information about

cleaning the machine, etc.

LCD SCREEN

B-38

Example: Displaying information about

upper threading

aPress .

bPress .

cPress .

→The lower half of the screen will change.

dPress (upper threading).

→The screen shows instructions for threading the

machine.

eRead the instructions.

* Press to see a video of the displayed

instructions.

Press under movie to go back to the

beginning. Press to pause. Press to

restart after pause. Press to close out the

movie.

* Press to view the next page.

* Press to view the previous page.

fPress to return to the original screen.

Using the Sewing Guide Function

The sewing guide function can be used to select

patterns from the Utility Stitch screen.

Use this function when you are not sure which

stitch to use for your application, or to get advice

about sewing particular stitches. For example, if

you want to sew overcasting, but you do not know

which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch, you

can use this screen to get advice. We recommend

that beginners use this method to select stitches.

aEnter Utility Stitch category from the home

page.

bPress .

cPress .

→The advice screen is displayed.

dPress the key of the category whose sewing

instructions you wish to view.

* Press to return to the original screen.

LCD SCREEN

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-39

eRead the explanations and select the

appropriate stitch.

→The screen displays directions for sewing the

selected stitch. Follow the directions to sew the

stitch.

* Press to view the next page.

* Press to view the previous page.

Using the Pattern Explanation

Function

If you want to know more about the uses of a stitch

pattern, select the pattern and press and

then to see an explanation of the

stitch selection.

Example: Displaying information about

aPress .

bPress .

cPress .

→The screen shows information.

dPress to return to the original screen.

Note

• With the pattern explanation function,

descriptions can be displayed for the

patterns available on the Utility Stitch and

Character/Decorative Stitch screens.

• Descriptions are displayed for each pattern

in the Utility Stitch screen. Description for

the Character/Decorative Stitch category is

also displayed.

• If the key appears in gray, the

pattern explanation function cannot be

used.

Memo

• The settings remain displayed to allow you

to fine tune the stitch.

LOWER THREADING

B-40

Winding the Bobbin

Press → → →

→ in this order to display a video

example of bobbin winding on the LCD (see page

B-39). Follow the steps explained below to

complete the operation.

■Using the Supplemental Spool Pin

With this machine, you can wind the bobbin

without unthreading the machine. While using the

main spool pin to sew, you can conveniently wind

the bobbin using the supplemental spool pin.

aSupplemental spool pin

aTurn the main power to ON and open the

top cover.

bAlign the groove in the bobbin with the

spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set

the bobbin on the shaft.

aGroove in the bobbin

bSpring on the shaft

LOWER THREADING

CAUTION

• The included bobbin was designed specifically

for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other

models are used, the machine will not operate

correctly. Use only the included bobbin or

bobbins of the same type (part code: SA156,

(SFB: XA5539-151)).

* Actual size

aThis model

bOther models

c11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)

LOWER THREADING

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-41

cSet the supplemental spool pin in the “up”

position.

aSupplemental spool pin

dPlace the spool of thread on the

supplemental spool pin, so that thread

unrolls from the front. Push the spool cap

onto the spool pin as far as possible to

secure the thread spool.

aSpool pin

bSpool cap

cThread spool

eWith your right hand, hold the thread near

the thread spool. With your left hand, hold

the end of the thread, and use both hands to

pass the thread through the thread guide.

aThread guide

CAUTION

• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set

incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool

pin and cause the needle to break.

• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)

that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a

spool cap smaller than the thread spool is

used, the thread may become caught in the slit

on the end of the spool and cause the needle

to break.

Memo

• When sewing with fine, cross-wound

thread, use the small spool cap, and leave a

small space between the cap and the

thread spool.

aSpool cap (small)

bThread spool (cross-wound thread)

cSpace

• If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm

(1/2 inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches)

high is inserted onto the spool pin, use the

special spool cap.

aSpool cap (special)

b12 mm (1/2 inch)

c75 mm (3 inches)

LOWER THREADING

B-42

fPass the thread around the pre-tension disk

making sure that the thread is under the

pre-tension disk.

aPre-tension disk

→Make sure that the thread passes under the

pre-tension disk.

bPre-tension disk

cPull it in as far as possible.

→Check to make sure thread is securely set between

pre-tension disks.

gWind the thread clockwise around the

bobbin 5-6 Times.

hPass the end of the thread through the guide

slit in the bobbin winder seat, and pull the

thread to the right to cut the thread with

the cutter.

aGuide slit (with built-in cutter)

bBobbin winder seat

iSet the bobbin winding switch to the left,

until it clicks into place.

aBobbin winding switch

→The bobbin winding window appears.

CAUTION

• Be sure to follow the process described. If the

thread is not cut with the cutter, and the

bobbin is wound, when the thread runs low it

may tangle around the bobbin and cause the

needle to break.

Memo

• Sliding the bobbin winding switch to the left

switches the machine into bobbin winding

mode.

LOWER THREADING

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-43

jPress .

→Bobbin winding starts automatically. The bobbin

stops rotating when bobbin winding is completed.

The bobbin winding switch will automatically return

to its original position.

kCut the thread with scissors and remove the

bobbin.

■Using the Spool Pin

You can use the main spool pin to wind the bobbin

before sewing. You cannot use this spool pin to

wind the bobbin while sewing.

Note

• changes to while the bobbin

is winding.

• Stay near the machine while winding the

bobbin to make sure the bobbin thread is

being wound correctly. If the bobbin thread

is wound incorrectly, press

immediately to stop the bobbin winding.

• The sound of winding the bobbin with stiff

thread, such as nylon thread for quilting,

may be different from the one produced

when winding normal thread; however, this

is not a sign of a malfunction.

Memo

• You can change the winding speed by

pressing (to decrease) or (to

increase) in the bobbin winding window.

• Press to minimize the bobbin

winding window. Then, you can perform

other operations, such as selecting a stitch

or adjusting the thread tension, while the

bobbin is being wound.

• Press (in top right of the LCD screen)

to display the bobbin winding window

again.

Memo

• When removing the bobbin, do not pull on

the bobbin winder seat. Doing so could

loosen or remove the bobbin winder seat,

and could result in damage to the machine.

CAUTION

• Setting the bobbin improperly may cause the

thread tension to loosen, breaking the needle

and possibly resulting in injury.

LOWER THREADING

B-44

aTurn the main power to ON and open the

top cover.

bAlign the groove in the bobbin with the

spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set

the bobbin on the shaft.

aGroove in the bobbin

bSpring on the shaft

cPivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.

Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that

the thread unwinds from the front of the

spool.

aSpool pin

bSpool cap

cThread spool

dSpool felt

dPush the spool cap onto the spool pin as far

as possible, then return the spool pin to its

original position.

eWhile holding the thread with both hands,

pull the thread up from under the thread

guide plate.

aThread guide plate

fPass the thread through the thread guide.

aThread guide

gPass the thread around the pre-tension disk

making sure that the thread is under the

pre-tension disk.

aThread guide

bPre-tension disk

hFollow steps g through k on page B-42

through B-43.

■Untangling Thread from Beneath the

Bobbin Winder Seat

If the bobbin winding starts when the thread is not

passed through the pre-tension disk correctly, the

thread may become tangled beneath the bobbin

winder seat.

Wind off the thread according to the following

procedure.

aThread

bBobbin winder seat

CAUTION

• Do not remove the bobbin winder seat even if

the thread becomes tangled under the bobbin

winder seat. It may result in injuries.

LOWER THREADING

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-45

aIf the thread becomes tangled under the

bobbin winder seat, press once to

stop the bobbin winding.

bCut the thread with scissors near the

pre-tension disk.

aPre-tension disk

cPush the bobbin winder switch to the right,

and then raise the bobbin at least 10 cm

(4 inches) from the shaft.

dCut the thread near the bobbin and hold the

thread end with your left hand. Unwind the

thread clockwise near the bobbin winder

seat with your right hand as shown below.

eWind the bobbin again.

Setting the Bobbin

Press → → →

→ in this order to display a video

example of the operation on the LCD (see page

B-39). Follow the steps explained below to

complete the operation.

aPress .

Note

• Make sure that the thread passes through

the pre-tension disk correctly (page B-42).

CAUTION

• Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly

wound. Otherwise, the needle may break or

the thread tension will be incorrect.

• The included bobbin was designed specifically

for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other

models are used, the machine will not operate

correctly. Use only the included bobbin or

bobbins of the same type (part code: SA156,

(SFB: XA5539-151)).

* Actual size

aThis model

bOther models

c11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)

• Before inserting or changing the bobbin, be

sure to press in the LCD, otherwise

injuries may occur if the “Start/Stop” button

or any other button is pressed and the machine

starts sewing.

LOWER THREADING

B-46

bSlide the bobbin cover latch to the right.

aBobbin cover

bLatch

→The bobbin cover opens.

cRemove the bobbin cover.

dInsert the bobbin with your right hand so

that the end of the thread is on the left, and

then, after pulling the thread firmly around

the tab with your left hand as shown, lightly

pull the thread to guide it through the slit.

aTab

* Be sure to insert the bobbin correctly.

eWhile lightly holding down bobbin with

your right hand as shown, guide the thread

through the slit (a and b).

* At this time, check that the bobbin easily rotates

counterclockwise.

Then, pull the thread toward you to cut it

with the cutter (c).

aSlit

bCutter (Cut the thread with the cutter.)

→The cutter cuts the thread.

Make sure that the thread is correctly

passed through the flat spring of the bobbin

case. If it is not inserted correctly, reinstall

the thread.

aFlat spring

CAUTION

• Be sure to install the bobbin so that the thread

unwinds in the correct direction, otherwise

the thread may break or the thread tension will

be incorrect.

Memo

• The order that the bobbin thread should be

passed through the bobbin case is

indicated by marks around the bobbin case.

Be sure to thread the machine as indicated.

CAUTION

• Be sure to hold down the bobbin with your

finger and unwind the bobbin thread

correctly. Otherwise, the thread may break or

the thread tension will be incorrect.

LOWER THREADING

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-47

fInsert the tab in the lower-left corner of the

bobbin cover (1), and then lightly press

down on the right side to close the cover

(2).

Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread

There may be some sewing applications where

you want to pull up the bobbin thread; for

example, when making gathers, darts, or doing

free motion quilting or embroidery.

aGuide the bobbin thread through the

groove, following the arrow in the

illustration.

* Do not cut the thread with the cutter.

* Do not replace the bobbin cover.

bWhile holding the upper thread, press the

“Needle Position” button to lower the

needle.

a“Needle Position” button

cPress the “Needle Position” button to raise

the needle.

dGently pull the upper thread. A loop of the

bobbin thread will come out of the hole in

the needle plate.

ePull up the bobbin thread, pass it under the

presser foot and pull it about

100 mm (approx. 4 inches) toward the back

of the machine, making it even with the

upper thread.

aUpper thread

bBobbin thread

fReplace the bobbin cover.

Memo

• You can pull up the bobbin thread after

threading the upper thread (“UPPER

THREADING” on page B-48).

UPPER THREADING

B-48

Upper Threading

Press → → →

→ in this order to display a video

example of the operation on the LCD (see page

B-39). Follow the steps explained below to

complete the operation.

aTurn the main power to ON.

bPress the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to

raise the presser foot.

→The upper thread shutter opens so the machine can

be threaded.

aUpper thread shutter

cPress the “Needle Position” button to raise

the needle.

UPPER THREADING

CAUTION

• Be sure to thread the machine properly.

Improper threading can cause the thread to

tangle and break the needle, leading to injury.

• When using the walking foot, the side cutter or

accessories not included with this machine,

attach the accessory to the machine after

threading the machine.

Memo

• The automatic threading function can be

used with sewing machine needle sizes

75/11 through 100/16.

• Thread such as transparent nylon

monofilament thread and thread with a

thickness of 130/20 or thicker cannot be

used with the automatic threading function.

• The automatic threading function cannot be

used with the wing needle or the twin

needle.

Memo

• This machine is equipped with an upper

thread shutter, allowing you to check that

the upper threading is performed correctly.

Note

• If you try to thread the needle automatically

without raising the needle, the thread may

not thread correctly.

UPPER THREADING

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-49

dPivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.

Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that

the thread unwinds from the front of the

spool.

aSpool pin

bSpool cap

cThread spool

dSpool felt

ePush the spool cap onto the spool pin as far

as possible, then return the spool pin to its

original position.

fWhile holding the thread with both hands,

pull the thread up from under the thread

guide plate.

aThread guide plate

gWhile holding the thread in your right

hand, pass the thread through the thread

guide in the direction indicated.

CAUTION

• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set

incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool

pin and cause the needle to break.

• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)

that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a

spool cap smaller than the thread spool is

used, the thread may become caught in the slit

on the end of the spool and cause the needle

to break.

Memo

• When sewing with fine, cross-wound

thread, use the small spool cap, and leave a

small space between the cap and the

thread spool.

aSpool cap (small)

bThread spool (cross-wound thread)

cSpace

• If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm

(1/2 inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches)

high inserted onto the spool pin, use the

special spool cap.

aSpool cap (special)

b12 mm (1/2 inch)

c75 mm (3 inches)

UPPER THREADING

B-50

hGuide the thread down, up, then down

through the groove, as shown in the

illustration.

iPass the thread through the needle bar

thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the

thread with both hands and guiding it as

shown in the illustration.

aNeedle bar thread guide

jPress the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to

lower presser foot.

kPass the thread through the thread guide

disks (marked “7”). Make sure that the

thread passes through the groove in the

thread guide.

aGroove in thread guide

lPull the thread up through the thread cutter

to cut the thread, as shown in the

illustration.

aThread cutter

Memo

• Look in the upper groove area to check if

the thread catches on the take-up lever

visible inside the upper groove area.

aLook in the upper groove area

Note

• When using thread that quickly winds off

the spool, such as metallic thread, it may be

difficult to thread the needle if the thread is

cut.

Therefore, instead of using the thread

cutter, pull out about 80 mm (approx. 3

inches) of thread after passing it through the

thread guide disks (marked “7”).

a80 mm (approx. 3 inches) or more

UPPER THREADING

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-51

mPress the “Automatic Threading” button to

have the machine automatically thread the

needle.

→The thread passes through the eye of the needle.

nCarefully pull the end of the thread that was

passed through the eye of the needle.

* If a loop was formed in the thread passed through

the eye of the needle, carefully pull on the loop of

thread through to the back of the needle.

oPull out about 5 cm (approx. 2 inches) of

the thread, and then pass it under the

presser foot toward the rear of the machine.

→Raise the presser foot lever if the presser foot is

lowered.

aAbout 5 cm (approx. 2 inches)

Using the Twin Needle Mode

The twin needle can only be used for patterns that

show after being selected. Before you select a

stitch pattern, make sure the stitch can be sewn in

the twin needle mode (refer to the “STITCH

SETTING CHART” on page S-62).

Memo

• When the “Automatic Threading” button is

pressed, the presser foot will be

automatically lowered. After threading is

finished, the presser foot moves back to the

position before the “Automatic Threading”

button was pressed.

Note

• Pulling the loop of thread gently will avoid

needle breakage.

Memo

• If the needle could not be threaded or the

thread was not passed through the needle

bar thread guides, perform the procedure

again starting from step c.

Then, pass the thread through the eye of

the needle after step i.

Note

• Some needles cannot be threaded with the

needle threader. In this case, instead of

using the needle threader after passing the

thread through the needle bar thread guide

(marked “6”), manually pass the thread

through the eye of the needle from the front

to the back.

CAUTION

• Twin needle (part code X59296-151) is

recommended for this machine. Contact your

authorized dealer for replacement needles

(size 2.0/11 is recommended).

• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when

using the twin needle. Using the twin needle

while the machine is in single needle mode

could cause the needle to break, resulting in

damage.

• Do not sew with bent needles. The needle

could break and cause injury.

• When using the twin needle, it is

recommended to use presser foot “J”.

• When the twin needle is used, bunched

stitches may occur depending on the types of

fabric and thread that are used.

Use monogramming foot “N” for decorative

stitches.

• Before changing the needle or threading the

machine, be sure to press on the LCD

Screen, otherwise injuries may occur if the

“Start/Stop” button or any other button is

pressed and the machine starts sewing.

UPPER THREADING

B-52

aPress and install the twin needle

(“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page B-57).

bThread the machine for the first needle

according to the procedure for threading a

single needle (“Upper Threading” on

page B-48).

cPass the thread through the needle bar

thread guides on the needle bar, then

thread the needle on the left side manually.

aNeedle bar thread guide

dPull up the supplemental spool pin and set it

in the up position.

aSupplemental spool pin

ePlace the additional spool of thread on the

supplemental spool pin, so that the thread

unwinds from the front. Push the spool cap

onto the spool pin as far as possible to

secure the thread spool.

aSpool pin

bSpool cap

cThread spool

fHold the thread from the spool with both

hands, and place the thread in the thread

guide.

* Do not place the thread in the pre-tension disks.

aThread guide

gWhile holding the thread from the spool,

pull the thread through the lower notch in

the thread guide plate, then through the

upper notch. Hold the end of the thread

with your left hand, and then guide the

thread through the groove, following the

arrows in the illustration.

Note

• The “Automatic Threading” button cannot

be used. Manually thread the twin needle

from front to back. Using the “Automatic

Threading” button may result in damage to

the machine.

UPPER THREADING

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-53

hContinue threading however do not pass

the thread in the needle bar thread guide

“6” on the needle bar. Thread the needle on

the right side.

aNeedle bar thread guide

iPress .

jSelect a stitch pattern. (Example: )

* Refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” on

page S-62 for the proper stitch to use with presser

foot “J”.

→The selected stitch is displayed.

kPress to select the twin needle mode.

aSingle needle/twin needle setting

→ appears.

lStart sewing.

Sample of Twin Needle Sewing

Using Threads that Unwind

Quickly

■Using the Spool Net

If using transparent nylon monofilament thread,

metallic thread, or other strong thread, place the

included spool net over the spool before using it.

When using specialty threads, threading must be

done manually.

If the spool net is too long, fold it once to match it to

the spool size before placing it over the spool.

Note

• If the key is light gray after selecting

the stitch, the selected stitch cannot be

sewn in the twin needle mode.

CAUTION

• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when

using the twin needle. Using the twin needle

while the machine is in single needle mode

could cause the needle to break, resulting in

damage.

Memo

• To change direction when sewing with the

twin needle, raise the needle from the

fabric, raise the presser foot lever, and then

turn the fabric.

aSpool net

bThread spool

cSpool pin

dSpool cap

Memo

• When threading the spool with the spool net

on, make sure that 5 cm - 6 cm (approx.

2 inches - 2-1/2 inches) of thread are pulled

out.

• It may be necessary to adjust the thread

tension when using the spool net.

UPPER THREADING

B-54

■Using the Vertical Spool Pin

Use the vertical spool pin when using an irregularly

shaped thread spool, and when sewing or

embroidering with metallic thread.

aInsert the vertical spool pin onto the bobbin

winder shaft.

bInstall the spool felt and the thread spool in

that order, and then thread the upper

thread.

aBobbin winder shaft

bVertical spool pin

cSpool felt

dThread spool

Memo

• When setting the thread spool, set it so that

the thread winds off from the front of the

spool.

• If using metallic thread, we recommend that

you use a 90/14 home sewing machine

needle.

• This method keeps the thread from twisting

as it comes off the spool pin.

CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-55

Removing the Presser Foot

aPress the “Needle Position” button to raise

the needle.

bPress .

* If the message “OK to automatically lower the

presser foot? ” appears on the LCD screen, press OK

to continue.

→The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and

operation buttons are locked.

cRaise the presser foot lever.

dPress the black button on the presser foot

holder and remove the presser foot.

aBlack button

bPresser foot holder

Attaching the Presser Foot

aPlace the new presser foot under the

holder, aligning the foot pin with the notch

in the holder. Lower the presser foot lever

so that the presser foot pin snaps into the

notch in the holder.

bPress to unlock all keys and

buttons.

cRaise the presser foot lever.

Attaching the Optional Presser

Foot with the Included Adapter

You can attach the optional presser feet using the

included adapter and small screw. For example,

the walking foot, the free motion echo quilting foot

“E”, the free motion quilting foot and so on.

Following procedure shows how to attach the

walking foot as an example.

CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT

CAUTION

• Always press on the screen before changing the presser foot. If is not pressed and the

“Start/Stop” button or another button is pressed, the machine will start and may cause injury.

• Always use the correct presser foot for the selected stitch pattern. If the wrong presser foot is used, the

needle may strike the presser foot and bend or break, and may cause injury.

• Only use presser feet made for this machine. Using other presser feet may lead to accident or injury.

CAUTION

• Make sure that the presser foot is installed in

the correct direction, otherwise the needle

may strike the presser foot, breaking the

needle and causing injuries.

aNotch

bPinl

CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT

B-56

■Attaching the Walking foot

The walking foot holds the fabric between the

presser foot and the feed dogs to feed the fabric. This

enables you to have better fabric control when

sewing difficult fabrics (such as quilted fabrics or

velvet) or fabrics that slip easily (such as vinyl,

leather, or synthetic leather).

aFollow the steps in “Removing the Presser

Foot” in the previous page.

bLoosen the screw of the presser foot holder

to remove the presser foot holder.

aDisc-shaped screwdriver

bPresser foot holder

cPresser foot holder screw

cRemove the screw of the presser foot

completely from the presser foot shaft.

dSet the adapter on the presser foot bar,

aligning the flat side of the adapter opening

with the flat side of the presser bar. Push it

up as far as possible, and then tighten the

screw securely with the screwdriver.

eTurn a supplied small screw 2 or 3 times

with your hand.

fSet the operation lever of the walking foot

so that the needle clamp screw is set

between the forks. Position the shank of the

walking foot on the adapter attached to the

presser foot bar.

aOperation lever

bNeedle clamp screw

cFork

dWalking foot shank

eAdapter

gLower the presser foot lever. Tighten the

small screw securely with a large

screwdriver.

CHANGING THE NEEDLE

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-57

aPress the “Needle Position” button to raise

the needle.

bPress .

* If the message “OK to automatically lower the

presser foot? ” appears on the LCD screen, press OK

to continue.

→The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and

operation buttons are locked.

cUse the screwdriver to turn the screw

toward the front of the machine and loosen

the screw. Remove the needle.

dWith the flat side of the needle facing the

back, insert the new needle all the way to

the top of the needle stopper (viewing

window) in the needle clamp. Use a

screwdriver to securely tighten the needle

clamp screw.

aNeedle stopper

bHole for setting the needle

cFlat side of needle

ePress to unlock all keys and

buttons.

CHANGING THE NEEDLE

CAUTION

• Always press on the screen before

changing the needle. If is not pressed

and the Start/Stop button or another operation

button is pressed accidentally, the machine

will start and injury may result.

• Use only sewing machine needles made for

home use. Other needles may bend or break

and may cause injury.

• Never sew with a bent needle. A bent needle

will easily break and may cause injury.

Memo

• To check the needle correctly, place the flat

side of the needle on a flat surface. Check

the needle from the top and the sides.

Throw away any bent needles.

aParallel space

bLevel surface (bobbin cover, glass, etc.)

Note

• Before replacing the needle, cover the hole

in the needle plate with fabric or paper to

prevent the needle from falling into the

machine.

Note

• Do not apply pressure to the needle clamp

screw. Doing so may damage the needle or

machine.

CAUTION

• Be sure to push in the needle until it touches

the stopper, and securely tighten the needle

clamp screw with a screwdriver. If the needle

is not completely inserted or the needle clamp

screw is loose, the needle may break or the

machine may be damaged.

ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC

B-58

About the Needle

The sewing machine needle is probably the most important part of the sewing machine. Choosing the

proper needle for your sewing project will result in a beautiful finish and fewer problems. Below are some

things to keep in mind about needles.

• The smaller the needle number, the finer the needle. As the numbers increase, the needles get thicker.

• Use fine needles with lightweight fabrics, and thicker needles with heavyweight fabrics.

• To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 with stretch fabrics.

• To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 when sewing character or decorative

stitches.

• Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. Use ball point needle 75/11 for embroidering patterns with short jump

stitches such as alphabet characters when the thread trimming function is turned on.

• Ball point needles (golden colored) 90/14 are only recommended for embroidery conditions stated above, as

they otherwise may bend or break.

• It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavyweight fabrics or

stabilizing products (for example, denim, puffy foam, etc.). A 75/11 needle may bend or break, which could

result in injury.

ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC

Note

• Never use a thread of weight 20 or lower. It may cause malfunctions.

ABOUT THE NEEDLE AND FABRIC

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-59

Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations

The following table provides information concerning the appropriate thread and needle for various

fabrics. Please refer to this table when selecting a thread and needle for the fabric you wish to use.

Fabric type/Application Thread Size of needle

Type Size

Medium weight fabrics Broadcloth Cotton thread 60 - 90 75/11 - 90/14

Taffeta Synthetic thread

Flannel, Gabardine Silk thread 50

Thin fabrics Lawn Cotton thread 60 - 90 65/9 - 75/11

Georgette Synthetic thread

Challis, Satin Silk thread 50

Thick fabrics Denim Cotton thread 30 90/14 - 100/16

Corduroy Synthetic thread 50 - 60

Tweed Silk thread

Stretch fabrics Jersey Thread for knits 50 - 60 Ball point needle

(gold colored)

75/11 - 90/14

Tricot

Easily frayed fabrics Cotton thread 50 - 90 65/9 - 90/14

Synthetic thread

Silk thread 50

For top-stitching Synthetic thread

Silk thread

30 100/16

50 - 60 90/14 - 100/16

Memo

• For transparent monofilament nylon thread, always use needle sizes 90/14 or 100/16.

The same thread is usually used for the bobbin thread and upper thread.

CAUTION

• Be sure to follow the needle, thread, and fabric combinations listed in the table. Using an improper

combination, especially a heavyweight fabric (i.e., denim) with a small needle (i.e., 65/9 - 75/11), may

cause the needle to bend or break, and lead to injury. Also, the seam may be uneven, the fabric may

pucker, or the machine may skip stitches.

BEFORE EMBROIDERING

B-60

Embroidery Step by Step

Follow the steps below to prepare the machine for embroidery.

BEFORE EMBROIDERING

Step 3

Step 1, 2

Step 7 Step 5

Step 4

Step 6, 8

Step 9

Step # Aim Action Page

1 Presser foot attachment Attach embroidery foot “W+”. B-61

2 Checking the needle Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. * B-58

3 Embroidery unit attachment Attach the embroidery unit. B-64

4 Bobbin thread setup For the bobbin thread, wind embroidery bobbin thread and set it in place. B-40

5 Fabric preparation Attach a stabilizer material to the fabric, and hoop it in the embroidery frame. E-11 to

E-17

6 Pattern selection Turn the main power to ON, and select an embroidery pattern. E-3

7 Embroidery frame attachment Attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit. B-63

8 Checking the layout Check and adjust the size and position of the embroidery. E-19

9 Embroidery thread setup Set up embroidery thread according to the pattern. E-21

* It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavy weight fabrics or stabilizing products (for example;

denim, puffy foam, etc.). Ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 is not recommended for embroidery.

BEFORE EMBROIDERING

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-61

Using the Embroidery Foot “W+”

with LED Pointer

By plugging in the connector on the back of your

machine, the embroidering needle drop point will

be indicated on the fabric, allowing you to

accurately position the pattern.

■Attaching the Embroidery Foot

“W+” with LED Pointer

aPress the “Needle Position” button to raise

the needle.

bPress .

→The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and

operation buttons are locked.

cRaise the presser foot lever.

dPush the black button on the presser foot

holder and remove the presser foot.

aBlack button

bPresser foot holder

→Remove the presser foot from the presser foot

holder.

eUse the included screwdriver to loosen the

screw of the presser foot holder, then

remove the presser foot holder.

aScrewdriver

bPresser foot holder

cPresser foot holder screw

→Remove the presser foot holder.

fPosition the embroidery foot “W+” with

LED pointer on the presser foot bar by

aligning the notch of the presser foot to the

large screw.

Side view

CAUTION

• When attaching a presser foot, always press

on the screen. You may accidentally

press the “Start/Stop” button and possibly

cause injury.

• Be sure to use embroidery foot when doing

embroidery. Using another presser foot may

cause the needle to strike the presser foot,

causing the needle to bend or break and

possibly cause injury.

CAUTION

• When attaching a presser foot, always press

on the screen. You may accidentally

press the “Start/Stop” button and possibly

cause injury.

BEFORE EMBROIDERING

B-62

gHold the embroidery foot in place with

your right hand, and then use the included

screwdriver to securely tighten the presser

foot holder screw.

hPlug the connector of the embroidery foot

“W+” with LED pointer into the jack on the

back of your machine.

iPress to unlock all keys and

buttons.

→All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and

the previous screen is displayed.

■Checking the Needle Drop Point

With the Embroidery Foot “W+”

with LED Pointer

Before beginning to embroider when using the

embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer, carefully

read the procedures described in the “Embroidery”

and “Embroidery Edit” chapters.

aPress in the embroidery screen.

→The LED pointer indicates the needle drop point.

* The LED pointer turns off automatically by lowering

the presser foot or returning to the previous page.

CAUTION

• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten

the screw of the embroidery foot. If the screw

is loose, the needle may strike the presser foot

and possibly cause injury.

Memo

• When the LED pointer is turned on, the

presser foot height is automatically adjusted

according to the fabric thickness.

• If is pressed again, the fabric thickness

is remeasured and the presser foot is set to

the optimum height.

Note

• With thick elastic fabric, the position will be

misaligned only at raised parts in the fabric.

In this case, manually adjust the position

according to the thickness of the fabric.

• With fabric that has a very uneven surface

such as quilting, the position is not correctly

aligned. In this case, the pointer indication

should be used only as a reference.

BEFORE EMBROIDERING

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-63

■Adjusting the LED Pointer

Adjust the LED pointer if it indicates a point different

than the actual needle drop point.

Before adjusting the LED pointer, mark the actual

needle drop point on the fabric to be embroidered,

and then hoop the fabric and attach the embroidery

frame.

aPress .

→The settings screen appears.

bPress .

→The Embroidery settings screen appears.

cDisplay page 10 of the Embroidery settings

screen.

dPress .

→The Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer

Adjustment screen appears.

aLED pointer adjustment

eUse or to adjust the LED pointer so

that it indicates the actual needle drop

point.

fPress twice to return to the original

screen.

■Adjusting the Brightness of the LED

Pointer

aFollow the steps from a to d to display

the embroidery foot with LED pointer

adjust screen.

bUse or to adjust the brightness of

the LED pointer.

cPress twice to return to the original

screen.

Note

• As a default, some keys mentioned in the

following procedures appear in light gray

and are not available. To enable the keys for

specifying the settings, attach embroidery

foot “W+” with LED pointer to the machine.

The keys are enabled after the embroidery

foot is detected.

Memo

• When using the “Embroidery” or

“Embroidery Edit”, touch to

directly access the Embroidery settings

screen.

Note

• The specified setting is saved in the

machine’s memory. This is useful for

positioning during continuous

embroidering.

• For normal use, return the setting to “00”.

BEFORE EMBROIDERING

B-64

Attaching the Embroidery Unit

■About the Embroidery Unit

aTurn the main power to OFF, and remove

the flat bed attachment.

bInsert the embroidery unit connection into

the machine connection port. The spring

hinge on the connection port cover will

allow easy access to the port. Push lightly

on the connection port cover until the unit

clicks into place.

aEmbroidery unit connection

bMachine connection port

cTurn the main power to ON.

→The following message will appear.

dPress .

→The carriage will move to the initialization position.

CAUTION

• Do not move the machine with the embroidery

unit attached. The embroidery unit could fall

off and cause injury.

• Keep your hands and foreign objects away

from the embroidery carriage and frame when

the machine is embroidering. Otherwise,

injury may result.

• To avoid distorting your embroidery design, do

not touch the embroidery carriage and frame

when the machine is embroidering.

Note

• You can also sew utility/decorative stitches

with the embroidery unit attached. Touch

and . The feed dog will

automatically raise for utility and decorative

stitching.

• Be sure to turn off the power before

installing the embroidery unit. Otherwise,

the machine may be damaged.

• Do not touch the inner connector of the

embroidery unit. The pins on the

embroidery unit connection may be

damaged.

• Do not apply strong force to the embroidery

unit carriage or pick up the unit by the

carriage. Otherwise, the embroidery unit

may be damaged.

• Store the embroidery unit in the proper

storage case.

Note

• Be sure there is no gap between the

embroidery unit and the sewing machine. If

there is a gap, the embroidery patterns will

not embroider with the correct registration.

• Do not push on the carriage when installing

the embroidery unit onto the machine.

Moving the carriage may damage the

embroidery unit.

Note

• Either “Embroidery” screen or “Embroidery

Edit” screen appears, depending on the

setting selected in the settings screen.

BEFORE EMBROIDERING

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-65

■Removing the Embroidery Unit

aPress either or , then press

→The carriage will move to the removal position.

bTurn the main power to OFF.

cHold down the release button, and pull the

embroidery unit away from the machine.

aRelease button

CAUTION

• Always remove the embroidery frame before

pressing . Otherwise, the frame may

strike the embroidery foot, and possibly cause

injury.

• The embroidery unit will not fit in the storage

case if this step is not done.

Note

• Be sure to turn off the machine before

removing the embroidery unit, otherwise

damage to the machine may result.

CAUTION

• Do not carry the embroidery unit by holding

the release button compartment.

USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE

B-66

Using USB Media or Embroidery

Card Reader/USB Card Writer

Module*

* If you have purchased the PE-DESIGN Ver5 or later,

PE-DESIGN NEXT, PE-DESIGN Lite, PED-BASIC or

PE-DESIGN PLUS, you can plug the included USB

card writer module into the machine as an

embroidery card reader, and recall patterns.

aUSB port for mouse / media

bUSB media

aUSB port for mouse / media

bEmbroidery card Reader/USB card writer module*

Connecting the Machine to the

Computer

Using the included USB cable, the sewing machine

can be connected to your computer.

aUSB port for computer

bUSB cable connector

USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE

ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE

Note

• Use only an embroidery card reader

designed for this machine. Using an

unauthorized embroidery card reader may

cause your machine to operate incorrectly.

• Embroidery patterns cannot be saved from

the machine to an embroidery card inserted

into a connected USB card writer module.

Memo

• USB media is widely used, however some

USB media may not be usable with this

machine. Please visit our website for more

details.

• Depending on the type of USB media being

used, either directly plug the USB device

into the machine’s USB port or plug the

USB media Reader/Writer into the

machine’s USB port.

Note

• The connectors on the USB cable can only

be inserted into a port in one direction. If it

is difficult to insert the connector, do not

insert it with force. Check the orientation of

the connector.

• For details on the position of the USB port

on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the

instruction manual for the corresponding

equipment.

USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-67

Using a USB Mouse

The USB mouse, connected to the sewing

machine, can be used to perform a variety of

operations in the screens.

aUSB port for mouse / media

bUSB mouse

■Clicking a Key

When the mouse is connected, the pointer appears

on the screen. Move the mouse to position the

pointer over the desired key, and then click the left

mouse button.

aPointer

■Changing Pages

If page numbers and a vertical scroll bar for

additional pages are displayed, click the left mouse

button with the pointer on / or / to

display the previous or next page.

Using the Dual Feed Foot

Dual feed foot enables you to have best fabric

control when sewing difficult fabrics that slip

easily, such as quilted fabrics or fabrics that tend

to stick to the bottom of a presser foot, such as

vinyl, leather or synthetic leather.

Note

• Do not perform operations with the mouse

at the same time that you are touching the

screen with your finger or the included

touch pen.

• A USB mouse can be connected or

disconnected at any time.

• Only the left mouse button and its wheel

can be used to perform operations. No

other buttons can be used.

• The mouse pointer does not appear in the

home page screen.

Memo

• Double-clicking has no effect.

Note

• When sewing with the dual feed foot, sew at

medium to low speeds.

Memo

• The dual feed foot can only be used with

straight or zigzag stitch patterns.

• When selecting stitches to be used with the

dual feed foot, only the stitches that can be

used will be activated on the display.

• When sewing fabric that easily sticks

together, a more attractive finish can be

achieved by basting the beginning of

sewing.

USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE

B-68

■Attaching the Dual Feed Foot

aFollow the steps from a to e of “Using

the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED

Pointer” on page B-61.

bPosition the dual feed foot to the presser

foot bar by aligning the notch of the dual

feed foot to the large screw.

Side view

cHold the dual feed foot in place with your

right hand, then using the included

screwdriver securely tighten the large

screw.

dPlug the connector of the dual feed foot

into the jack on the back of your machine.

ePress to unlock all keys and

buttons.

→All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and

the previous screen is displayed.

■When the Snap-On Foot of the Dual

Feed Foot is Detached

If you push down on the front part of the dual feed

foot, the sole part of the dual feed foot will snap off.

Attach the sole by aligning the pins with the notches

and snap it into place.

aPins

bNotches

■Using the Dual Feed Position Lever

When the feed position lever is up, the black roller

belt on the dual feed is not engaged.

CAUTION

• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten

the screw. If the screw is loose, the needle may

strike the presser foot and possibly cause

injury.

USING FUNCTIONS BY CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE

Getting Ready

Basic operations B-69

When the feed position lever is down, the black

roller belt on the dual feed is engaged.

■Adjusting the Amount of Fabric

Feeding of the Dual Feed Foot

The dual feed mechanism pulls the top fabric

according to the set stitch length. With troublesome

fabrics, fine tune the set length, by changing the

dual feed feed adjustment in the settings screen.

aPress .

→The settings screen appears.

bPress .

→The Sewing settings screen appears.

cDisplay page 1 of the Sewing settings

screen.

dUse or to increase or decrease the

feeding of the top fabric.

* Select “00” for sewing in most cases.

* If the feed amount for the top fabric is too little,

causing the fabric to be longer than the bottom

fabric, press to increase the feed amount for the

top fabric.

* If the feed amount for the top fabric is too much,

causing the fabric to be shorter than the bottom

fabric, press to decrease the feed amount for the

top fabric.

ePress to return to the original screen.

Note

• Do not operate the lever while sewing.

Note

• As a default, some keys mentioned in the

following procedures appear in light gray

and are not available. To enable the keys for

specifying the settings, attach the dual feed

foot to the machine. The keys are enabled

after the dual feed foot is detected.

Chapter 2

BBasic operations

Sensor Functions

CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE

SENSOR PEN............................................................71

CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN ...........................71

Using the Sensor Pen Holder ....................................................72

USING THE SENSOR PEN........................................73

Using the Sensor Pen ................................................................73

Important Information about Sensor Pen..................................73

Calibrating the Sensor Pen........................................................74

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS

WITH SEWING STITCH...........................................76

Sensor Function Area................................................................76

Specifying the Guideline Marker Position With the Sensor Pen

.......76

Specifying the Needle Drop Position With the Sensor Pen .......78

Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Stitching Width and Stitch

Position.....................................................................................79

Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Sewing End Point.............. 81

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN

“EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE ......83

Specifying the Embroidering Position With the Sensor Pen.......83

■Selecting the Embroidering Position by the Pattern Edge ......... 84

■Selecting the Embroidering Position by the Pattern Center...... 85

CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE SENSOR PEN

Sensor Functions

Basic operations B-71

By using the sensor pen, you have the option of

four separate functions

• Setting the guideline as a reference for your

sewing position.

• Set the needle position of straight stitch.

• Adjust the width and “L/R SHIFT” position of a

zigzag stitch.

• Set the ending point of a stitch pattern sequence.

aWhen specifying the end point of your sewing, this

function adjusts your pattern or stitch so that you

end up with a complete design.

bIt is easy to set the pattern width and position.

When connecting the sensor pen to the machine, make sure that the arrow on the sensor pen connector

faces up and that the connector is firmly inserted into the jack.

aSensor pen jack

bSensor pen connector

CONVENIENT SEWING FEATURES BY USING THE

SENSOR PEN

CAUTION

• The guideline marker is a laser; therefore, do

not stare at the laser light directly. Otherwise

it may cause blindness.

Note

• When the guideline or LED pointer does not

appear clearly, set the brightness of the

machine light dimmer to see them clearly.

Refer to “Using the Machine Setting Mode

Key” on page B-28.

CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN

CAUTION

• When connecting the sensor pen, make sure

that the arrow on the sensor pen connector

faces up, otherwise the connector pins will not

align correctly and the connector will be

damaged.

• When connecting or disconnecting the sensor

pen, grab the connector, and then slowly push

it straight in or pull it straight out.

• When disconnecting the sensor pen from the

machine, do not pull on the cord, otherwise

the sensor pen may be damaged.

CONNECTING THE SENSOR PEN

B-72

Using the Sensor Pen Holder

When connecting the sensor pen to the machine,

attach the sensor pen holder to keep the sensor

pen with the machine.

The right side of the holder can be used to hold the

touch pen.

Sensor pen holder

aUsing the point end of the cleaning brush or

the seam ripper point, remove the

protective cap covering the hole on the

right side of the machine.

→Insert the point of the seam ripper or cleaning brush

into the hole in the protective cap, and then lightly

pull out the protective cap to remove it.

bFirmly insert the sensor pen holder into the

hole where the protective cap was

removed.

cSet the sensor pen in the sensor pen holder

with the pen tip pointing downward, and

then connect the sensor pen to the

machine.

USING THE SENSOR PEN

Sensor Functions

Basic operations B-73

Using the Sensor Pen

Hold the sensor pen, and then touch the point to

be specified. When the tip of the sensor pen is

pushed in, the position information is sent to the

machine.

When using the sensor pen, touch slowly and

gently for the definite operation.

1) Touch: Touch a point with the sensor pen, then

immediately lift up the pen.

2) Long touch: Touching a point with the sensor

pen and holding it down for at least one second

allows you to activate the functions that you just

selected.

Important Information about

Sensor Pen

The sensor pen emits the signal to the machine,

and then the sensor pen receiver receives the

signal to specify the position.

aSensor pen receiver

bSignal is waved out from the sensor pen

USING THE SENSOR PEN

Note

• Once a point is touched with the sensor pen

and the entered information is applied in the

screen, perform the next operation.

Repeatedly touching a point with the sensor

pen may prevent the information from being

correctly read.

• Do not drag the sensor pen tip on the

machine, otherwise the sensor pen tip may

be chipped off.

• If there is any problem with the guideline

marker, the sensor function may not

operate correctly.

Memo

• The sensor pen can be used to touch on the

screen as a touch pen.

CAUTION

• Do not insert any object into the sensor pen

and the receiver, otherwise the machine may

be damaged.

IMPORTANT

• Do not put your hand, the fabric or any object

between the machine and the sensor pen,

otherwise the sensor pen receiver may not

receive the ultrasonic wave.

• Do not use the machine close to any other unit

which produces ultrasonic wave or a vibration

sound, otherwise interference may occur.

USING THE SENSOR PEN

B-74

Calibrating the Sensor Pen

Before using the sensor pen for the first time be

sure to calibrate it to the screen. Doing so allows

the machine to learn the position you usually hold

a pen.

Hold the sensor pen at a comfortable angle and

then calibrate the machine according to the

procedure below.

Be sure to keep the sensor pen at the same angle

while calibrating the first and second points.

aPress .

→The settings screen appears.

bPress .

→The General settings screen appears.

cDisplay page 6 of the General settings

screen.

dPress while connecting the sensor

pen to the machine.

→The Sensor Function Calibration screen appears.

eTouch the first point of green dot marking

using the sensor pen.

* Touch on the needle plate cover.

aNeedle plate cover

USING THE SENSOR PEN

Sensor Functions

Basic operations B-75

fTouch the second point of center of

cross-hair using the sensor pen.

* Touch on the point in the illustrations.

aFlat bed attachment

bEmbroidery unit

gPress to finish the calibration. To

repeat the calibration touch the first point

again using the sensor pen, and continue

with step f.

* Press to return to the original screen without

finishing the calibration.

* Press to reset the calibration.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH

B-76

Before using the sensor functions, carefully read “Utility Stitches” chapter to familiarize yourself with the

machine operations.

The sensor functions are performed using the sensor pen.

Sensor Function Area

When using the sensor pen with utility stitches, the

operations may differ depending on the area to be

touched.

Specifying the Guideline Marker

Position With the Sensor Pen

The sewing position will be indicated by a red

guideline marker.

The position of the guideline marker can be

adjusted to your desired location.

aTurn on the machine.

bPress .

cPress .

→The sensor functions screen appears, and the

guideline marker flashes.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH

aCenter needle

position

Sewing position for stitch patterns sewn

with the center needle position

bSetting area Area 3.5 mm to the left and right of a.

Touch this area with the sensor pen to

specify a position.

Area 7 mm, when positioning the

guideline marker.

cAdjustment area

(right)

Touch: With each touch, the setting

increases by 0.5 mm. This allows fine

adjustments to be made after touching

within b to specify a position.

Long touch: After touching b to specify

a position or adjusting the position by

touching within c or d, long touch to

apply the setting.

dAdjustment area

(left)

Touch: With each touch, the setting

decreases by 0.5 mm. This allows fine

adjustments to be made after touching

within b to specify a position.

Long touch: Apply the setting in the

same way as a long touch within c.

eThe sensor pen touch range extends approximately 200 mm

(7-7/8 inches) toward you from the needle drop point and 130

mm (approx. 5 inches) to either side of the middle (center)

needle position.

Memo

• There are borderline areas between setting

area and adjustment areas, which allow you

to set quickly to the most

decreased/increased value.

• The borderline areas are respectively 6.5

mm (approx. 1/4 inch) wide when

positioning the guideline marker, and 10

mm (approx. 3/8 inch) wide in other cases.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH

Sensor Functions

Basic operations B-77

dPress .

→The guideline marker position setting screen appears

and the guideline marker flashes.

eWith the sensor pen, touch the location to

be specified as the guideline marker

position.

→The machine’s guideline marker moves to the

touched position and flashes.

→The distance from the left reference line to the

touched position appears in the guideline marker

position setting screen.

→The stitch preview on the upper left side of the

screen is updated according to the specified setting.

aPress to stop specifying a setting with the sensor

pen.

fPress to apply the guideline marker

position setting.

* The setting can also be applied by a long touch of

the sensor pen within the adjustment area.

→The stitch selection screen appears again, and the

setting in the guideline marker scale changes to the

setting specified with the sensor pen.

→The guideline marker stops flashing.

Note

• The following error message appears if the

area outside of the sensor pen touch range

is touched. Press , and then touch

within the sensor pen touch range.

Memo

• The position can be precisely adjusted by

touching the adjustment areas with the

sensor pen.

• When using the sensor pen to specify the

guideline marker position, it may not be

possible to exactly specify the desired

location. In this case, use either of the

following operations to make fine

adjustments.

- Touch an adjustment area with the sensor

pen to adjust the position in 0.5 mm

increments.

- Adjust the position with the guideline

marker scale shown in step f.

Note

• If you set the needle drop position, the

stitch width or stitch position after

specifying the guideline marker position, the

guideline marker may move while setting.

The guideline marker moves back to the

specified position after the needle drop

position, stitch width or stitch position is set

and the original screen appears.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH

B-78

Specifying the Needle Drop

Position With the Sensor Pen

aTurn on the machine.

bPress .

cSelect a stitch pattern.

dPress .

→The sensor functions screen appears.

ePress .

→The reference position setting screen appears, and

the red guideline marker flashes at the machine’s

sewing position.

fWith the sensor pen, touch the location to

be specified as the needle drop position.

→The guideline marker moves to the touched position

and flashes.

→The distance from the left reference line to the

touched position appears in the reference position

setting screen.

→The stitch preview on the upper left side of the

screen is updated according to the specified setting.

aPress to return the needle drop position to its

default setting.

bPress to stop specifying a setting with the sensor

pen.

Note

• If is not available, the sewing

reference position cannot be specified with

the selected stitch pattern. Select a different

stitch pattern.

Note

• The following error message appears if the

area outside of the sensor pen touch range

is touched. Press , and then touch

within the sensor pen touch range.

Memo

• The position can be precisely adjusted by

touching the adjustment areas with the

sensor pen.

• To change the setting, use the sensor pen

to touch the desired location for the

reference position.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH

Sensor Functions

Basic operations B-79

gPress to apply the reference position

setting.

* The setting can also be applied by long touching an

adjustment area with the sensor pen.

→The needle moves to the specified position to start

sewing.

→The stitch selection screen appears again, and the

stitch width changes to the setting specified with the

sensor pen.

→The guideline marker stops flashing.

Using the Sensor Pen to Specify

the Stitching Width and Stitch

Position

The zigzag width and “L/R SHIFT” value can be

specified.

aOriginal stitching width/position

bAdjusted stitching width/position

aTurn on the machine.

bPress .

cSelect a stitch pattern.

dPress .

→The sensor functions screen appears.

ePress .

→The stitching width setting screen appears, and the

guideline marker flashes at the present left side of

the stitch width.

fWith the sensor pen, touch the first point

for the stitching width.

→The distance from the left reference line to the

touched position appears in the stitching width

setting screen.

→The guideline marker moves to the touched position

and flashes.

Note

•If is not available, the stitching width

cannot be specified with the selected stitch

pattern. Select a different stitch pattern.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH

B-80

gPress to apply the first point of the

stitching width.

* The setting can also be applied by long touching an

adjustment area with the sensor pen.

hWith the sensor pen, touch the second

point for the stitching width.

→The distance from the left reference line to the

touched position appears in the stitching width

setting screen.

→The stitch preview on the upper left side of the

screen is updated according to the specified setting.

→The guideline marker moves to the touched position

and flashes.

iPress to apply the second point of the

stitching width.

* The setting can also be applied by long touching an

adjustment area with the sensor pen.

→The needle moves to the specified position to start

sewing.

→The stitch selection screen appears again, and the

stitch width and “L/R SHIFT” change according to

the settings specified with the sensor pen.

Note

• The following error message appears if the

area outside of the sensor pen touch range

is touched. Press , and then touch

within the sensor pen touch range.

Memo

• The position can be precisely adjusted by

touching the adjustment areas with the

sensor pen.

Note

• If the distance between the specified first

and second points is wider than the

maximum stitch width for the selected stitch

pattern, the second point cannot be

specified. Specify a location closer to the

first point.

• If the distance between the specified first

and second points is narrower than the

minimum stitch width for the selected stitch

pattern, the second point cannot be

specified. Specify a location further away

from the first point.

Note

• With multiple patterns that have been

combined, the specified stitching width is

applied to the pattern with the largest stitch

width. With patterns other than combined

patterns, the stitch width is adjusted to the

stitching width specified for the pattern with

the largest stitch width.

• With multiple patterns that have been

combined, the settings specified for the

stitch width and “L/R SHIFT” in the stitch

selection screen are for the first pattern to

be sewn. The value may differ from the

stitch width setting.

• With twin needle sewing, the stitching width

is specified with the left needle as the

reference.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH

Sensor Functions

Basic operations B-81

Using the Sensor Pen to Specify

the Sewing End Point

Before start sewing, test the pattern first from steps

a to f to see if the stitch can be used with this

function.

aTurn on the machine.

bPress .

cSelect a stitch pattern.

dStart sewing, and then stop the machine

when the desired sewing end point enters

the sensor pen touch range.

ePress .

→The sensor functions screen appears.

fPress .

→The sewing end point setting screen appears.

gWith the sensor pen, touch the location to

be specified as the sewing end point.

→The distance from the current needle position to the

touched location appears.

aPress to erase the specified sewing end point.

bPress to stop specifying a setting with the sensor

pen.

cPress to select whether or not sewing is ended

with a complete pattern when a decorative stitch

is selected.

→See “Decorative Stitch End Setting Key” on

page B-82.

Note

• If is not available, the sewing end

point cannot be specified with the selected

stitch pattern. Select a different stitch

pattern.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH

B-82

Decorative Stitch End Setting Key

hPress to apply the sewing end point

setting.

* The setting can also be applied by long touching an

adjustment area with the sensor pen.

→When a sewing end point setting is specified,

appears in the upper-left corner of the screen.

iStart sewing again.

* The machine stops at the specified end point

automatically.

Note

• The displayed distance is not the length of a

straight line connecting the current needle

position and the location touched with the

sensor pen. It is the length of a

perpendicular intersection for the location

touched with the sensor pen and the sewing

line.

aDisplayed distance

• The following error message appears if the

area outside of the sensor pen touch range

is touched. Press , and then touch

within the sensor pen touch range.

• When sewing with this setting, be sure to

feed the fabric straight, otherwise the actual

end point may be different from the point

you set.

• When using the sensor pen to specify the

sewing end point, the sewing end point may

be slightly different than the specified

location, depending on where the sewing

machine is stopped in order to specify the

setting.

The end of stitching is not adjusted.

When the end point is reached, sewing

stops immediately, even if the stitch

pattern is not complete.

The length of the stitch pattern is

adjusted so that sewing will stop at the

specified end point with a complete

pattern.

Note

• The decorative stitch end setting key is not

available with the following situations.

- When selecting the Utility Stitch patterns.

- When the decorative stitch end setting

key is grayed out.

- When specifying the sewing end point at

the point that needs adjustment more

than 10% of the length of a pattern, to

finish a pattern completely.

Note

• If a different pattern is selected after the

sewing end point has been specified, the

end point setting is erased.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE

Sensor Functions

Basic operations B-83

Before using the sensor functions, carefully read the procedure in “Embroidery” and “Embroidery Edit” to

familiarize yourself with the machine operations.

Specifying the Embroidering

Position With the Sensor Pen

By using the sensor pen, the embroidering position

can be adjusted to the desired location. This

function can be performed in either “Embroidery”

or “Embroidery Edit” mode, but the procedure

described below is performed in “Embroidery”

mode.

If the message “The carriage of the embroidery

unit will move. Keep your hands etc. away from

the carriage.” appears during the operation, ensure

safety, and then press .

aTurn on the machine.

bPress .

cSelect the category for the pattern to be

embroidered.

dIn the pattern selection screen, press the

key for the pattern to be embroidered.

ePress .

fHoop the fabric and attach the embroidery

frame to the machine.

→Refer to “Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery

Frame” on page E-13 and “ATTACHING THE

EMBROIDERY FRAME” on page E-17.

gPress .

→Select the desired area and press when the

following message appears (only for use of the extra

large embroidery frame).

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN

“EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE

B-84

hPress .

→The embroidering position selection screen appears.

iSelect the method for positioning the

embroidery pattern.

* To align the edge of the embroidery with a pattern

or mark on the fabric, select the edge. If the center of

the pattern to be embroidered is determined, select

the center position.

■Selecting the Embroidering Position

by the Pattern Edge

aFrom on the screen, press the edge

to be the reference for positioning.

bPress .

cWith the sensor pen, touch the point on the

fabric corresponding to corner a in the

screen.

aSquare of pattern edge

bPattern position

dWith the sensor pen, touch the point on the

fabric corresponding to corner b in the

screen.

aSquare of pattern edge

bPattern position

ePress to adjust the positions.

→If you don’t need to adjust the positions, continue to

step i.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE

Sensor Functions

Basic operations B-85

fPress to move the LED pointer

on the fabric for adjusting the first position.

gPress to apply the setting.

hPress to move the LED pointer

on the fabric for adjusting the second

position.

iPress to apply the setting.

jThe preview in the sewing screen is updated

according to the specified embroidering

position.

kPress the “Start/Stop” button to start

embroidering.

■Selecting the Embroidering Position

by the Pattern Center

aPress in the following screen.

bWith the sensor pen, touch 2 points on the

fabric corresponding to the numbers in the

center of the embroidery pattern.

aCenter line of the pattern

bPattern position

→Specified point number turns into red.

cPress to adjust the positions.

→If you don’t need to adjust the positions, continue to

step g.

USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS IN “EMBROIDERY”/“EMBROIDERY EDIT” MODE

B-86

dPress to move the LED pointer

on the fabric for adjusting the first position.

ePress to apply the setting.

fPress to move the LED pointer

on the fabric for adjusting the second

position.

gPress to apply the setting.

hThe preview in the sewing screen is updated

according to the specified embroidering

position.

iPress the “Start/Stop” button to start

embroidering.

Note

• When using the sensor pen to specify the

embroidering position, it may not be

possible to exactly specify the desired

location. In this case, move the embroidery

frame to align the center of the pattern with

the location indicated by the LED pointer.

Sewing

This section describes procedures for using the various utility stitches as well as other functions. It

provides details on basic sewing in addition to the more expressive features of the machine, from sewing

tubular pieces and buttonholes to sewing the character and decorative stitch patterns.

Page number starts with “S” in this section.

The screen display and machine illustration may vary slightly, depending on the countries or regions.

Chapter1 Sewing Basics.......................................................... S-2

Chapter2 Utility Stitches ...................................................... S-20

Chapter3 Character/Decorative Stitches .............................. S-70

Chapter4 MY CUSTOM STITCH........................................... S-96

Chapter 1

SSewing

Sewing Basics

SEWING.....................................................................3

Sewing a Stitch ...........................................................................3

■Using the Foot Controller .......................................................... 4

Sewing Reinforcement Stitches ..................................................5

Automatic Reinforcement Stitching ...........................................5

Sewing Curves ............................................................................7

Changing Sewing Direction .......................................................7

■Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm or Less.............................. 7

Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics ......................................................7

■If the Fabric does not Fit under the Presser Foot........................ 8

■If the Fabric does not Feed......................................................... 8

Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener ................................................8

Sewing Lightweight Fabrics ........................................................9

Sewing Stretch Fabrics................................................................9

STITCH SETTINGS ...................................................10

Setting the Stitch Width............................................................ 10

Setting the Stitch Length ..........................................................10

Setting the “L/R SHIFT” ............................................................11

Setting the Thread Tension ......................................................12

■ Proper Thread Tension ........................................................... 12

■Upper Thread is Too Tight ....................................................... 12

■Upper Thread is Too Loose ...................................................... 12

USEFUL FUNCTIONS ..............................................13

Automatic Thread Cutting ........................................................13

Adjusting the Needle Drop Position

with the Guideline Marker (For models

equipped with the guideline marker) ........................................14

■Adjusting the Guideline Marker Position.................................. 14

■Adjusting the Brightness of the Guideline Marker.................... 14

Using the Knee Lifter ................................................................15

Pivoting.....................................................................................15

Automatic Fabric Sensor System

(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) ............................................17

Needle Position – Stitch Placement ..........................................18

Locking the Screen ...................................................................18

SEWING

Sewing Basics

Sewing S-3

Sewing a Stitch

aTurn the main power to ON and display the

utility stitches, and push the “Needle

Position” button to raise the needle.

bPress the key of the stitch you want to sew.

→The symbol of the correct presser foot will be

displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD screen.

cInstall the presser foot (“CHANGING THE

PRESSER FOOT” of “Basic operations”).

dSet the fabric under the presser foot. Hold

the fabric and thread in your left hand, and

rotate the handwheel to set the needle in

the sewing start position.

eLower the presser foot.

* You do not have to pull up the bobbin thread.

fAdjust the sewing speed with the speed

control slide.

* You can use this slide to adjust sewing speed during

sewing.

aSlow

bFast

SEWING

CAUTION

• To avoid injury, pay special attention to the needle while the machine is in operation. Keep your hands

away from moving parts while the machine is in operation.

• Do not stretch or pull the fabric during sewing. Doing so may lead to injury.

• Do not use bent or broken needles. Doing so may lead to injury.

• Do not attempt to sew over basting pins or other objects during sewing. Otherwise, the needle may break

and cause injury.

• If stitches become bunched, lengthen the stitch length setting before continuing sewing. Otherwise, the

needle may break and cause injury.

CAUTION

• Always use the correct presser foot. If the

wrong presser foot is used, the needle may

strike the presser foot and bend or break,

possibly resulting in injury.

Refer to page S-62 for presser foot

recommendations.

Memo

• The black button on the left side of presser

foot “J” should be pressed only if the fabric

does not feed or when sewing thick seams

(see page S-8). Normally, you can sew

without pressing the black button.

SEWING

S-4

gPress the “Start/Stop” button to start

sewing.

* Guide the fabric lightly by hand.

hPress the “Start/Stop” button again to stop

sewing.

iPress the “Thread Cutter” button to trim

the upper and lower threads.

→The needle will return to the up position

automatically.

jWhen the needle has stopped moving, raise

the presser foot and remove the fabric.

■Using the Foot Controller

You can also use the foot controller to start and stop

sewing.

Memo

• When the foot controller is being used, you

cannot start sewing by pressing the

“Start/Stop” button.

CAUTION

• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button after

the threads have been cut. Doing so could

tangle the thread or break the needle and

damage the machine.

• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button when

there is no fabric set in the machine or during

machine operation. The thread may tangle,

possibly resulting in damage.

Note

• When cutting thread thicker than #30, nylon

monofilament thread, or other decorative

threads, use the thread cutter on the side of

the machine.

Memo

• This machine is equipped with a bobbin

thread sensor that warns you when the

bobbin thread is almost empty. When the

bobbin thread is nearly empty, the machine

automatically stops. However, if the

“Start/Stop” button is pressed, a few

stitches can be sewn. When the warning

displays, re-thread the machine

immediately.

CAUTION

• Do not allow fabric pieces and dust to collect

in the foot controller. Doing so could cause a

fire or an electric shock.

Memo

• When the foot controller is being used, you

cannot start sewing by pressing the

“Start/Stop” button.

(For embroidery and sewing machine only)

• The foot controller cannot be used when

embroidering.

• The foot controller can be used for sewing

utility and decorative stitches when the

embroidery unit is attached.

SEWING

Sewing Basics

Sewing S-5

aInsert the foot controller plug into its jack

on the machine.

aFoot controller

bFoot controller jack

bSlowly depress the foot controller to start

sewing.

cRelease the foot controller to stop the

machine.

Sewing Reinforcement Stitches

Reverse/reinforcement stitches are generally

necessary at the beginning and end of sewing. You

can use the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew

reverse/reinforcement stitches.

When you keep pressing the “Reinforcement

Stitch” button, the machine will sew reinforcement

stitch at that point 3 to 5 stitches, and then stop.

a“Reverse Stitch” button

b“Reinforcement Stitch” button

If the automatic reinforcement stitch is selected on

the screen, reverse stitches (or reinforcement

stitches) will be sewn automatically at the

beginning of sewing when the “Start/Stop” button

is pressed. Press the “Reverse Stitch” button or

“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew reverse

stitches or reinforcement stitches automatically at

the end of sewing.

aReverse stitch

bReinforcement stitch

The operation performed when the button is

pressed differs depending on the selected pattern.

(Refer to the table in “Automatic Reinforcement

Stitching” on page S-5.)

Automatic Reinforcement

Stitching

After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the

automatic reinforcement stitching function before

sewing, and the machine will automatically sew

reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,

depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning

and end of sewing.

aSelect a stitch pattern.

Memo

• The speed that is set using the sewing

speed controller is the foot controller’s

maximum sewing speed.

Memo

• When you press the “Reinforcement Stitch”

button while sewing character/decorative

stitch pattern, you can end sewing with a

full stitch instead of at a mid-point.

• The green light on the right of the

“Reinforcement Stitch” button lights up

while the machine is sewing a full motif, and

it automatically turns off when the sewing is

stopped.

SEWING

S-6

bPress to set the automatic

reinforcement stitching function.

→The key will display as .

cSet the fabric in the start position and start

sewing.

aReverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)

→The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches

(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue

sewing.

dPress the “Reverse Stitch” button or

“Reinforcement Stitch” button.

aReverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)

→The machine will sew reverse stitches (or

reinforcement stitches) and stop.

The operation performed when the button is

pressed differs depending on the selected pattern.

Refer to the following table for details on the

operation that is performed when the button is

pressed.

Memo

• Some stitches, such as buttonholes and bar

tacks, require reinforcement stitches at the

beginning of sewing. If you select one of

these stitches, the machine will

automatically turn on this function (the key

appears as when the stitch is

selected).

Memo

• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to

pause sewing, press it again to continue.

The machine will not sew

reverse/reinforcement stitches again.

Memo

• To turn off the automatic reinforcement

stitching function, press again, so it

appears as .

Stitch

(Example) Stitch name

Applications

Straight stitch

Zigzag stitch

(with “ " ” at the top of the key display)

“Reinforcement Stitch” button ON: Reinforcement stitch

“Reverse Stitch” button ON: Reverse stitch

* With the automatic reinforcement stitching function, the

machine automatically sews reverse stitches at the beginning

of sewing.

Straight stitch

Zigzag stitch

(with “ . ” at the top of the key display)

2/3 steps elastic zigzag

“Reinforcement Stitch” button ON: Reinforcement stitch

“Reverse Stitch” button ON: Reverse stitch

* With the automatic reinforcement stitching function, the

machine automatically sews reinforcement stitches at the

beginning of sewing.

Overcasting stitch

“Reinforcement Stitch” button ON: Reinforcement stitch

“Reverse Stitch” button ON: Reinforcement stitch

* With the automatic reinforcement stitching function, the

machine automatically sews reinforcement stitches at the

beginning of sewing.

SEWING

Sewing Basics

Sewing S-7

Sewing Curves

Sew slowly while keeping the seam parallel with

the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the

curve.

Changing Sewing Direction

Stop the machine. Leave the needle in the fabric,

and press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to raise

the presser foot. Using the needle as a pivot, turn

the fabric so that you can sew in the new

direction. Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to

lower the presser foot and start sewing.

The pivot setting is useful when changing the

sewing direction. When the machine is stopped at

the corner of the fabric, the machine stops with the

needle in the fabric and the presser foot is

automatically raised so the fabric can easily be

rotated (“Pivoting” on page S-15).

■Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm

or Less

Baste the corner before sewing, and then, after

changing the sewing direction at the corner, pull the

basting thread toward the back while sewing.

a5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)

Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics

The sewing machine can sew fabrics up to 6 mm

(approx. 1/4 inch) thick. If the thickness of a seam

causes sewing to occur at an angle, help guide the

fabric by hand and sew on the downward slope.

Character/Decorative stitch

“Reinforcement Stitch” button ON: Reinforcement stitch after

finishing the motif currently being sewn.

“Reverse Stitch” button ON: Sewing operation stops

immediately.

* With the automatic reinforcement stitching function, the

machine automatically sews reinforcement stitches at the

beginning of sewing.

The light beside the “Reinforcement Stitch” button lights up

while the machine is sewing the last motif. It automatically

turns off when sewing is stopped.

Stitch

(Example) Stitch name

Applications

CAUTION

• Do not forcefully push fabrics more than

6 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) thick through the

sewing machine. This may cause the needle to

break and cause injury.

• Thicker fabrics require a larger needle

(“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” of “Basic

operations”).

SEWING

S-8

■If the Fabric does not Fit under the

Presser Foot

If the presser foot is in the up position, and you are

sewing heavyweight or multiple layers of fabric

which do not fit easily under the presser foot, use

the presser foot lever to raise the presser foot to its

highest position. The fabric will now fit under the

presser foot.

■If the Fabric does not Feed

If the fabric does not feed when starting to sew or

when sewing thick seams, press the black button on

the left side of presser foot “J”.

aRaise the presser foot.

bWhile keeping the black button on the left

side of presser foot “J” pressed in, press the

“Presser Foot Lifter” button to lower the

presser foot.

cRelease the black button.

→The presser foot remains level, enabling the fabric to

be fed.

Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener

Make sure that the needle passes through the

hook-and-loop fastener by rotating the handwheel

and lower the needle into the hook-and-loop

fastener before sewing. Sew the edge of the

hook-and-loop fastener at a slow speed.

If the needle does not pass through the

hook-and-loop fastener, replace the needle with

the needle for thick fabrics (“Fabric/Thread/Needle

Combinations” of “Basic operations”).

aEdge of the hook-and-loop fastener

Memo

• You cannot use the presser foot lever after

the presser foot has been raised using the

“Presser Foot Lifter” button.

Memo

• Once the trouble spot has been passed, the

foot will return to its normal position.

• When “Automatic Fabric Sensor System”

(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) in the

machine settings screen is set to “ON”, the

thickness of the fabric is automatically

detected by the internal sensor so the fabric

can be fed smoothly for best sewing results.

(see page S-17 for details.)

CAUTION

• Do not use adhesive backed hook-and-loop

fastener designed for sewing. If the adhesive

sticks to the needle or the bobbin hook race, it

may cause malfunction.

• If the hook-and-loop fastener is sewn with a

fine needle (65/9-75/11), the needle may bend

or break.

Note

• Before starting to sew, baste the fabric and

hook-and-loop fastener together.

SEWING

Sewing Basics

Sewing S-9

Sewing Lightweight Fabrics

Place thin paper or tear away embroidery

stabilizer under thin fabrics to make sewing easier.

Gently tear off the paper or the stabilizer after

sewing.

aThin paper

Sewing Stretch Fabrics

First, baste together the pieces of fabric, and then

sew without stretching the fabric.

In addition, a better result can be achieved by

using thread for knits or a stretch stitch.

aBasting stitching

Memo

• For best results when sewing stretch

fabrics, decrease the pressure of the

presser foot (“Using the Machine Setting

Mode Key” of “Basic operations”).

STITCH SETTINGS

S-10

When you select a stitch, your machine automatically selects the appropriate stitch width, stitch length,

“L/R SHIFT”, and upper thread tension. However, if needed, you can change any of the individual

settings.

Setting the Stitch Width

Follow the steps below when you want to change

the zigzag stitch pattern width.

Example:

Press to narrow the zigzag stitch pattern

width.

→The value in the display gets smaller.

Press to widen the zigzag stitch pattern width.

→The value in the display gets bigger.

Setting the Stitch Length

Follow the steps below when you want to change

the stitch pattern length.

STITCH SETTINGS

Note

• Settings for some stitches cannot be changed (refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62).

• If you turn off the machine or select another stitch without saving stitch setting changes (“Saving Your

Stitch Settings” on page S-22), the stitch settings will return to their default settings.

Memo

• For an alternate method of changing the

stitch width using the speed controller, see

page S-38.

Memo

• Press after pressing to return to the

original setting.

Note

• After adjusting the stitch width, slowly

rotate the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) and check that the

needle does not touch the presser foot. If

the needle hits the presser foot, the needle

may bend or break.

STITCH SETTINGS

Sewing Basics

Sewing S-11

Example:

Press to shorten the stitch length.

→The value in the display gets smaller.

Press to lengthen the stitch length.

→The value in the display gets bigger.

Setting the “L/R SHIFT”

Follow the steps below when you want to change

the placement of the zigzag stitch pattern by

moving it left and right.

Example:

Press to shift the pattern to the left.

→The value in the display appears with a minus sign.

Press to shift the pattern to the right side of the

left needle position.

→The value in the display appears with a plus sign.

Memo

• Press to check changes made to the

stitch.

• Press after pressing to return to the

original setting.

CAUTION

• If the stitches get bunched together, lengthen

the stitch length and continue sewing. Do not

continue sewing without lengthening the stitch

length. Otherwise, the needle may break and

cause injury.

Memo

• Press after pressing to return to the

original setting.

Note

• After adjusting the “L/R SHIFT”, slowly

rotate the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) and check that the

needle does not touch the presser foot. If

the needle hits the presser foot, the needle

may bend or break.

STITCH SETTINGS

S-12

Setting the Thread Tension

You may need to change the thread tension,

depending on the fabric and thread being used.

Follow the steps below to make any necessary

changes.

■ Proper Thread Tension

The upper thread and the bobbin thread should

cross near the center of the fabric. Only the upper

thread should be visible from the right side of the

fabric, and only the bobbin thread should be visible

from the wrong side of the fabric.

aWrong side

bSurface

cUpper thread

dBobbin thread

■Upper Thread is Too Tight

If the bobbin thread is visible on the right side of the

fabric, the upper thread is too tight.

aBobbin thread

bUpper thread

cSurface

dLocks appear on surface of fabric

Press , to loosen the upper thread.

■Upper Thread is Too Loose

If the upper thread is visible from the wrong side of

the fabric, the upper thread is too loose.

aUpper thread

bBobbin thread

cWrong side

dLocks appear on wrong side of fabric

Press , to tighten the upper thread.

Note

• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly

threaded, the upper thread may appear to

be too tight. In this case, refer to “Setting

the Bobbin” of “Basic operations” and

rethread the bobbin thread.

Memo

• When you finish sewing, remove the bobbin

cover and then make sure that the thread is

shown as below. If the thread is not shown

as below, the thread is not inserted through

the tension-adjusting spring of the bobbin

case correctly. Reinsert the thread

correctly. For details, refer to “Setting the

Bobbin” of “Basic operations”.

Note

• If the upper thread was incorrectly

threaded, the upper thread may appear to

be too loose. In this case, refer to “Upper

Threading” of “Basic operations” and

rethread the upper thread.

Memo

• Press after pressing to return to the

original setting.

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Sewing Basics

Sewing S-13

Automatic Thread Cutting

After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the

automatic thread cutting function before sewing,

and the machine will automatically sew

reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,

depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning

and end of sewing, and trim the threads at the end

of sewing. This function is useful when sewing

buttonholes and bar tacks.

aSelect a stitch pattern.

bPress to set the automatic thread

cutting function.

→The key will display as .

cSet the fabric in the start position and start

sewing.

aReverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)

→The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches

(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue

sewing.

dPress the “Reverse Stitch” button or

“Reinforcement Stitch” button.

aReverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)

→The machine will sew reverse stitches (or

reinforcement stitches), then trim the thread.

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Memo

• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to

pause sewing, press the same button again

to continue. The beginning

reverse/reinforcement stitches will not be

sewn again.

Memo

• To turn off the automatic thread cutting

function, press again, so it appears

as .

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

S-14

Adjusting the Needle Drop

Position with the Guideline

Marker (For models equipped

with the guideline marker)

The red guideline marker indicates the sewing

position on the fabric.

You can adjust the sewing position by moving the

guideline marker while checking the guideline

marker on the fabric.

aPress to display the guideline marker.

→The guideline marker scale appears.

* Depending on the setting of “Initial Position” in the

settings screen, the intial needle drop position is

scaled as either 0.0 mm or 3.5 mm.

bUse or to move the needle drop

position.

→Adjust the position from 10.5 mm (3/8 inch) to the

right of the left needle to -3.5 mm (-1/8 inch) to the

left of the left needle.

cPress again to stop using the guideline

marker.

■Adjusting the Guideline Marker

Position

If the guideline marker indicates the position

incorrectly in the center needle position, adjust the

initial position in the settings screen.

aPress to display “Guideline Marker

Adjust” in the settings screen.

bDisplay settings screen.

cPress .

→The “Guideline Marker Adjust” screen appears.

dUse or to adjust the guideline

marker position.

aPress to move the guideline marker to the left

bPress to move the guideline marker to the right

ePress twice to return to the original

screen.

■Adjusting the Brightness of the

Guideline Marker

aFollow steps from a to c to display the

“Guideline Marker Adjust” screen.

CAUTION

• The guideline marker is a laser; therefore, do

not stare at the laser light directly. Otherwise

it may cause blindness.

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Sewing Basics

Sewing S-15

bUse or to adjust the brightness of

the guideline marker.

→Set the brightness of the guideline marker from “1”

for a dim marker, to “5” for the brightest marker, on

the fabric.

cPress twice to return to the original

screen.

Using the Knee Lifter

Using the knee lifter, you can raise and lower the

presser foot with your knee, leaving both hands

free to handle the fabric.

aAlign the tabs on the knee lifter with the

notches in the knee lifter slot on the front of

the machine. Insert the knee lifter bar as far

as possible.

bUse your knee to move the knee lifter bar to

the right in order to raise the presser foot.

Release the knee lifter to lower the presser

foot.

Pivoting

If the pivot setting is selected, the machine stops

with the needle lowered (in the fabric) and the

presser foot is automatically raised to an

appropriate height when the “Start/Stop” button is

pressed. When the “Start/Stop” button is pressed

again, the presser foot is automatically lowered

and sewing continues. This function is useful for

stopping the machine to rotate the fabric.

CAUTION

• Only change position of the knee lifter handle

when knee lifter is not on the machine,

otherwise the presser foot will go up, and then

the knee lifter may damage the mounting slot

on front of the machine.

Note

• If the knee lifter bar is not pushed into the

mounting slot as far as possible, it may

come out during use.

CAUTION

• Be sure to keep your knee away from the knee

lifter during sewing. If the knee lifter is pushed

during machine operation, the needle may

break or the thread tension may loosen.

Memo

• When the presser foot is in the up position,

move the knee lifter to the far right and then

release to return the presser foot to the

down position.

CAUTION

• When the pivot setting is selected, the

machine starts when the “Start/Stop” button is

pressed or the foot controller is pressed down

even if the presser foot has been raised. Be

sure to keep your hands and other items away

from the needle, otherwise injuries may occur.

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

S-16

aSelect a stitch.

bPress to select the pivot setting.

→The key appears as .

cPlace the fabric under the presser foot with

the needle at the starting point of the

stitching, and then press the “Start/Stop”

button. The machine will begin sewing.

Memo

• When the pivot setting is selected, the

height of the presser foot when sewing is

stopped can be changed according to the

type of fabric being sewn. Press to

display “Pivoting Height” in the settings

screen. Press or to select one of

the three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm or 7.5

mm). To raise the presser foot further,

increase the setting. (Normally, 3.2 mm is

set.)

Note

• The “Needle Position - UP/DOWN” in the

settings screen, must be set in the down

position for the pivot function to be

used. When “Needle Position - UP/DOWN”

is set in the raised position, appears

as light gray and cannot be used.

• The pivot function can only be used with

stitches where presser foot J or N is

indicated in the upper-left corner of the

screen. If any other stitch is selected,

appears as light gray and is not available.

• Use the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to

make sure the presser foot is lowered, and

then press the “Start/Stop” button to

continue sewing.

• If the pivot setting is selected, and

beside “Presser Foot Height” in the settings

screen are not available and the setting

cannot be changed.

Memo

• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to

pause sewing, press it again to continue,

reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)

will not be sewn.

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Sewing Basics

Sewing S-17

dPress the “Start/Stop” button to stop the

machine at the point where the sewing

direction changes.

→The machine stops with the needle in the fabric, and

the presser foot is raised.

eRotate the fabric, and then press the

“Start/Stop” button.

→The presser foot is automatically lowered, and

sewing continues.

Automatic Fabric Sensor System

(Automatic Presser Foot

Pressure)

The thickness of the fabric is automatically

detected and the presser foot pressure is

automatically adjusted with an internal sensor

while sewing, to insure that your fabric is fed

smoothly. The fabric sensor system works

continuously while sewing. This function is useful

for sewing over thick seams (see page S-8), or

quilting (see page S-35).

aPress to display “Automatic Fabric

Sensor System” in the settings screen.

bSet “Automatic Fabric Sensor System” to

“ON”.

cPress to return to the original screen.

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

S-18

Needle Position – Stitch

Placement

When the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” is

on, the needle will be partially lowered for precise

stitch placement and then press the “Needle

Position” button again to lower the needle

completely. Each press of the “Needle Position”

button changes the needle to the next position.

When the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” is

turned off, each press of the “Needle Position”

button simply raises and then lowers the needle.

aPointing needle mode is “ON”

bPointing needle mode is “OFF”

* When the needle is nearly lowered by pressing the

“Needle Position” button, the feed dogs are

lowered. At this time, the fabric can be shifted to

finely adjust the needle drop position.

aPress to display “Needle Position –

Stitch Placement” in the settings screen.

bSet “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” to

“ON” or “OFF”.

cPress to return to the original screen.

Locking the Screen

If the screen is locked before starting to sew, the

various settings such as the stitch width and stitch

length are locked and cannot be changed. This

prevents screen settings from accidentally being

changed or the machine from being stopped while

large pieces of fabric or projects are being sewn.

The screen can be locked when sewing utility

stitches and character decorative stitches.

aSelect a stitch pattern.

bIf necessary, adjust any settings such as the

stitch width and stitch length.

cPress to lock the screen settings.

→The key appears as .

dSew your project.

eWhen you are finished sewing, press

again to unlock the screen settings.

CAUTION

• If the screen is locked ( ), unlock the

screen by pressing . While the screen is

locked, no other key can be operated.

• The settings are unlocked when the machine is

turned off and on.

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Sewing Basics

Sewing S-19

Chapter 2

SSewing

Utility Stitches

SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES ...............................21

Selecting a Stitch ......................................................................21

■Using the Mirror Image Key .................................................... 21

■Using the Image Key ................................................................ 22

Saving Your Stitch Settings ......................................................22

■Saving Settings ......................................................................... 22

■Retrieving Saved Settings ......................................................... 23

SEWING THE STITCHES ..........................................24

Straight Stitches ........................................................................24

■Changing the Needle Position (Left or Middle Needle Position

Stitches Only) ......................................................................... 25

■Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on the Needle Plate or Bobbin

Cover (with Mark).................................................................... 26

■Using the Straight Stitch Needle Plate and

the Straight Stitch Foot............................................................. 26

■Basting ..................................................................................... 28

Dart Seam.................................................................................28

Gathering..................................................................................29

Flat Fell Seam............................................................................29

Pintuck......................................................................................30

Zigzag Stitches .........................................................................31

■Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ........................................ 31

■Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ............................................. 31

■Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt) .................................................... 32

■Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag Stitch) .................................... 32

■Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ................... 32

Elastic Zigzag Stitches ..............................................................33

■Tape Attaching ........................................................................ 33

■Overcasting ............................................................................. 33

Overcasting .............................................................................33

■Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G” ....................................... 33

■Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J” ......................................... 34

Quilting ...................................................................................35

■Piecing .................................................................................... 36

■Appliqué ................................................................................. 37

■Quilting with Satin Stitches ..................................................... 38

■Free Motion Quilting ............................................................... 39

Blind Hem Stitches ..................................................................40

■If the Needle Catches Too Much of the Hem Fold ................... 42

■If the Needle does not Catch the Hem Fold ............................. 42

Appliqué ..................................................................................42

■Appliqué Sharp Curves ............................................................ 43

■Appliqué Corners ..................................................................... 43

Shelltuck Stitches .....................................................................43

Scallop Stitches ........................................................................44

Crazy Quilting ..........................................................................45

Smocking Stitches ....................................................................45

Fagoting ...................................................................................46

Tape or Elastic Attaching .........................................................47

Heirloom .................................................................................48

■Hemstitching (1) ...................................................................... 48

■Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1))......................................... 48

■Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2))......................................... 49

One-step Buttonholes ..............................................................49

■Sewing Stretch Fabrics ............................................................ 52

■Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do Not Fit into the Button

Holder Plate ............................................................................ 52

Darning.....................................................................................53

Bar Tacks .................................................................................54

■Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics....................................................... 55

Button Sewing ..........................................................................55

■Attaching 4 Hole Buttons..........................................................56

■Attaching a Shank to the Button ..............................................56

Eyelet ...................................................................................... 57

Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)

..... 57

Zipper Insertion ...................................................................... 58

■Centered Zipper .......................................................................58

■Inserting a Side Zipper .............................................................59

STITCH SETTING CHART........................................ 62

SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-21

Selecting a Stitch

There are 5 categories of Utility Stitches.

aTurn the main power to ON and display the

utility stitches.

→Either “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight

stitch (Middle)” is selected, depending on the setting

selected in the settings screen.

bUse to select the

category you want.

* Press to view the next page.

* Press to view previous page.

aPreview of the selected stitch

bStitch selection screen

cPercentage size of view

cPress the key of the stitch you want to sew.

■Using the Mirror Image Key

Depending on the type of utility stitch you select,

you may be able to sew a horizontal mirror image of

the stitch.

If is lit when you select a stitch, it will be

possible to make a mirror image of the stitch.

Press to create a horizontal mirror image of the

selected stitch.

The key will display as .

SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

Note

• If is light gray after you select a stitch,

you cannot create a horizontal mirror image

of the selected stitch due to the type of

stitch or type of presser foot recommended

(this is true of buttonholes, multi-directional

sewing, and others).

SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES

S-22

■Using the Image Key

You can display an image of the selected stitch. You

can check and change the colors of the image of the

screen.

aPress .

→An image of the selected stitch is displayed.

bPress to change the thread color of

the stitch on the screen.

* Press to display an enlarged image of the

stitch.

aStitch screen

cPress to return to the original screen.

Saving Your Stitch Settings

The settings for the zigzag stitch width, stitch

length, thread tension, automatic thread cutting,

automatic reinforcement stitching, etc., are preset

in the machine for each stitch. However, if you

have specific settings that you wish to reuse later

for a stitch, you can change the settings so that

they can be saved for that stitch. Five sets of

settings can be saved for a single stitch.

■Saving Settings

aSelect a stitch. (Example: )

bSpecify your preferred settings.

cPress .

→The memory function screen appears.

dPress .

→The settings are saved. Press to return to the

original screen.

Memo

• The color changes every time you press

Note

• If stitches are wider or larger than display,

press darkened arrows to move the stitch

pattern for better visibility.

Memo

• If you try to save settings when there are

already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch,

the message “The pockets are full. Delete a

pattern.” will appear. Close the message

and delete a setting referring to page S-23.

SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-23

■Retrieving Saved Settings

aSelect a stitch.

bPress .

→The memory function screen appears.

cPress .

dPress the numbered key of the settings to be

retrieved.

* Press to return to the original screen without

retrieving settings.

aNumbered keys

ePress .

→The selected settings are retrieved. Press to

return to the original screen.

Memo

• When a stitch is selected, the last settings

retrieved are displayed. The last settings

retrieved are retained even if the machine

was turned off or a different stitch was

selected.

Memo

• To save new settings when there are

already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch,

press . Press the numbered key of the

setting to be deleted. Press , press

and then . The new setting will

be saved in place of the recently deleted

setting.

• You can delete all the saved settings by

pressing .

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-24

Straight Stitches

See page S-62 for the detailed information of

stitches.

aLeft needle position

bMiddle needle position

aReverse stitch

bReinforcement stitch

aSelect a stitch.

bAttach presser foot “J”.

* Attach presser foot “N” when you select .

cHold the thread tail and fabric with your

left hand, and rotate the handwheel with

your right hand to insert the needle into the

fabric.

aSewing start position

dLower the presser foot, and hold the

“Reverse Stitch” or “Reinforcement Stitch”

button to sew 3-4 stitches.

→The machine sews reverse stitches (or reinforcement

stitches).

SEWING THE STITCHES

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Straight stitch (Left)

Straight stitch (Middle)

Triple stretch stitch

Stem stitch

Decorative stitch

Basting stitch

Memo

• Refer to “Sewing Reinforcement

Stitches” on page S-5 for the detailed

information of reverse stitches and

reinforcement stitches.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-25

ePress the “Start/Stop” button to sew

forward.

aReverse stitches

→The machine will begin sewing slowly.

fWhen sewing is completed, hold the

“Reverse Stitch” button or “Reinforcement

Stitch” button to sew 3-4 reverse stitches

(or reinforcement stitches) at the end of the

seam.

gAfter sewing, press the “Thread Cutter”

button to trim the threads.

■Changing the Needle Position (Left

or Middle Needle Position Stitches

Only)

When you select left or middle needle position

stitches, you can use and in the stitch

width display to change the position of the needle.

Match the distance from the right edge of the presser

foot to the needle with the stitch width, then align

the edge of the presser foot with the edge of the

fabric during sewing for an attractive finish.

aStitch width

Example: Left/Middle needle position stitches

CAUTION

• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting

pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The

thread could tangle or the needle could break,

causing injury.

Memo

• When the automatic thread cutting and

automatic reinforcement stitch keys on the

screen are selected, reverse stitches (or

reinforcement stitches) will be sewn

automatically at the beginning of sewing

when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed.

Press the “Reverse Stitch” or

“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew

reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)

and trim the thread automatically at the end

of sewing.

12.0 mm

(approx.

1/2 inch)

8.5 mm

(approx.

11/32

inch)

6.5 mm

(approx.

1/4 inch)

5.0 mm

(approx.

3/16 inch)

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-26

■Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on

the Needle Plate or Bobbin Cover

(with Mark)

While sewing, align the edge of the fabric with the

16 mm (approx. 5/8 inch) mark on the needle plate

or bobbin cover (with mark) depending on the

needle position (left or middle (center) needle

position stitches only).

For stitches with a left needle position

(Stitch width: 0.0 mm)

aSeam

bPresser foot

cCentimeters

dInches

eNeedle plate

f16 mm (5/8 inch)

For stitches with a middle (center) needle position

(Stitch width: 3.5 mm)

aSeam

bPresser foot

cInches

dBobbin cover (with mark)

e16 mm (5/8 inch)

■Using the Straight Stitch Needle

Plate and the Straight Stitch Foot

The straight stitch needle plate and the straight stitch

foot can only be used for straight stitches (middle

needle position stitches). Use the straight stitch

needle plate and the straight stitch foot when sewing

thin fabrics or when sewing small pieces which tend

to sink into the hole of the regular needle plate

during sewing. The straight stitch foot is perfect to

reduce puckering on lightweight fabrics. The small

opening on the foot provides support for the fabric

as the needle travels through the fabric.

aPress the “Needle Position” button to raise

the needle and turn the main power to OFF

or press .

bRemove the needle and the presser foot

holder (“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” of

“Basic operations”).

cRemove the flat bed attachment.

dGrasp both sides of the needle plate cover,

and then slide it toward you.

aNeedle plate cover

a2.25 mm (1/8 inch)

b4.25 mm (3/16 inch)

c6.25 mm (1/4 inch)

d8.5 mm (5/16 inch)

CAUTION

• Always use the straight stitch foot in

combination with the straight stitch needle

plate.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-27

eGrasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out.

aBobbin case

fUse the disc-shaped screwdriver included

with the machine to unscrew and remove

the regular needle plate.

gSet the straight stitch needle plate in place

and use the disc-shaped screwdriver to

tighten the plate.

aRound hole

hInsert the bobbin case in its original

position, and then attach the needle plate

cover.

iAfter reinstalling the needle plate cover,

select any of the straight stitches.

jInsert needle and attach the straight stitch

foot.

aNotch

bPin

kStart sewing.

* After sewing, make sure to remove the straight stitch

needle plate and the straight stitch foot, and reinstall

the regular needle plate, the needle plate cover and

the presser foot “J”.

Note

• Align the two screw holes on the needle

plate with the two holes on the machine.

Use the disc-shaped screwdriver included

with the machine to secure the screws in

the needle plate.

Memo

• When using the straight stitch needle plate,

all straight stitches become middle needle

position stitches. You cannot change the

needle position using the width display.

• Always secure the needle plate before

inserting the bobbin case into its original

position.

• “L/R SHIFT” does not work when straight

stitch needle plate is on the machine.

CAUTION

• Selecting other stitches will cause an error

message to be displayed.

• Slowly rotate the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) before sewing and make

sure that the needle is not contacting the

straight stitch foot and straight stitch needle

plate.

Memo

• To prevent puckering on fine fabrics, use a

fine needle, size 75/11, and a short stitch

length. For heavier fabrics, use a heavier

needle, size 90/14, and longer stitches.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-28

■Basting

aSelect and attach presser foot “J”.

bPress the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew

reinforcement stitches, then continue

sewing.

cSew while keeping the fabric straight.

dEnd the basting with reinforcement stitches.

Dart Seam

aSelect and attach presser foot “J”.

bSew a reverse stitch at the beginning of the

dart and then sew from the wide end to the

other end without stretching the fabric.

* If automatic reinforcement stitching is preset, a

reinforcement stitch will automatically be sewn at

the beginning of sewing.

aBasting

cCut the thread at the end leaving 50 mm

(approx. 1-15/16 inches), and then tie both

ends together.

* Do not sew a reverse stitch at the end.

dInsert the ends of the thread into the dart

with a hand sewing needle.

Memo

• When you use the basting stitch for

gathering, do not use a reinforcement stitch

at the beginning; you should lift the presser

foot, rotate the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise), pull up the bobbin

thread and pull a length of top and bobbin

thread out from the rear of the machine.

• You can set the stitch length between 5 mm

(approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm (approx.

1-3/16 inches)

aBetween 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm

(approx. 1-3/16 inches)

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-29

eIron the dart to one side so that it is flat.

Gathering

Use on waists of skirts, sleeves of shirts, etc.

aSelect a straight stitch and attach presser

foot “J”.

bSet the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.

3/16 inch) and the thread tension to

approximately 2.0 (weaker tension).

* If you press after pressing

and then , the stitch length will be set

automatically to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and the

thread tension will be automatically set to 2.0.

cPull the bobbin and upper threads out by

50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches) (“Pulling

Up the Bobbin Thread” of “Basic

operations”).

aUpper thread

bBobbin thread

cAbout 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)

dSew two rows of straight stitches parallel to

the seam line, then trim excess thread

leaving 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).

aSeam line

b10 mm to 15 mm (approx. 3/8 inch to 9/16 inch)

cAbout 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)

ePull the bobbin threads to obtain the

desired amount of gather, then tie the

threads.

fSmooth the gathers by ironing them.

gSew on the seam line and remove the

basting stitch.

Flat Fell Seam

Use for reinforcing seams and finishing edges

neatly.

aSelect and attach presser foot “J”.

bSew the finish line, then cut half of the seam

allowance from the side on which the flat

fell seam will lie.

* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic

reinforcement stitching are preset, reinforcement

stitches will be sewn automatically at the beginning

of sewing. Press the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew a

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-30

reinforcement stitch and trim the thread

automatically at the end of sewing.

aAbout 12 mm (approx. 1/2 inch)

bWrong side

cSpread the fabric out along the finish line.

aFinish line

bWrong side

dLay both seam allowances on the side of the

shorter seam (cut seam) and iron them.

aWrong side

eFold the longer seam allowance around the

shorter one, and sew the edge of the fold.

aWrong side

Finished flat fell seam

aSurface

Pintuck

aMark along the folds on the wrong side of

the fabric.

aWrong side

bTurn the fabric and iron the folded parts

only.

aSurface

cSelect and attach presser foot “I”.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-31

dSew a straight stitch along the fold.

* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic

reinforcement stitching are preset, reinforcement

stitches will be sewn automatically at the beginning

of sewing. Press the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew a

reinforcement stitch and trim the thread

automatically at the end of sewing.

aWidth for pintuck

bWrong side

cSurface

eIron the folds in the same direction.

Zigzag Stitches

Zigzag stitches are useful for overcasting,

appliqué, patchwork, and many other

applications.

Select a stitch, and attach presser foot “J”.

See page S-5 for the detailed information of

reverse stitches and reinforcement stitches.

See page S-62 for the detailed information of

stitches.

aSelect a stitch.

bAttach presser foot “J”.

■Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch)

Sew the overcasting along the edge of the fabric

while positioning the right-hand side needle drop

point just outside the edge of the fabric.

aNeedle drop position

■Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch)

Attach the appliqué material using a temporary

spray adhesive or basting, and then sew it.

* Sew a zigzag stitch while positioning the right-hand

side needle drop point just outside the edge of the

fabric.

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Zigzag stitch

Zigzag stitch (Right)

Zigzag stitch (Left)

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-32

■Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt)

Turn back the desired width of fabric and position it

over the lower fabric, then sew so that the stitch

bridges both pieces of fabric.

■Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag

Stitch)

Shorten the stitch length setting to obtain a fine

stitch. Sew slowly, keeping the seams parallel with

the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the

curve.

■Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a

Zigzag Stitch)

aRemove the bobbin cover from the machine

(“Setting the Bobbin” of “Basic

operations”).

bThread the gimp thread through the hole in

the cord guide bobbin cover from top to

bottom. Position the thread in the notch at

the back of the cord guide bobbin cover.

aNotch

bGimp thread

cSnap the cord guide bobbin cover into

place, making sure that the gimp thread can

be fed freely.

* Make sure there are no restrictions when feeding the

thread.

dSet the zigzag width from 2.0 mm - 2.5 mm

(approx. 1/16 inch - 3/32 inch).

eAttach presser foot “N”.

fPosition the fabric right side up on top of

the cord and place the cord to the rear of

the machine under the presser foot.

aFabric (right side)

bGimp thread

gLower the presser foot and start sewing to

make a decorative finish.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-33

Elastic Zigzag Stitches

Use elastic zigzag stitches for tape attaching,

overcasting, darning, or a wide variety of other

uses.

See page S-62 for the detailed information of

stitches.

aSelect a stitch.

bAttach presser foot “J”.

■Tape Attaching

Stretch the tape flat. While stretching the tape flat,

sew the tape to the fabric.

aTape

■Overcasting

Use this stitch to sew overcasting on the edge of

stretch fabrics. Sew the overcasting along the edge

of the fabric while positioning the right-hand side

needle drop point just outside the edge of the fabric.

Overcasting

Use for the edge of seams in skirts or trousers, and

the edge of all cuttings. Use presser foot “G”,

presser foot “J”, or the optional side cutter

attachment depending on the kind of overcasting

stitch you select.

■Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G”

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

2 steps elastic zigzag

3 steps elastic zigzag

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Overcasting stitch

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-34

aSelect a stitch and attach presser foot “G”.

bLower the presser foot so that the presser

foot guide is set flush against the edge of the

fabric.

cSew along the presser foot guide.

aGuide

■Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J”

See page S-62 for the detailed information of

stitches.

aSelect a stitch and attach presser foot “J”.

CAUTION

• After the stitch width is adjusted, rotate the

handwheel toward you (counterclockwise).

Check that the needle does not touch the

presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,

the needle may break and cause injury.

aThe needle should not touch the center bar

• If the presser foot is raised to its highest level,

the needle may strike the presser foot.

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Overcasting stitch

Single diamond overcast

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-35

bSew with the needle dropping slightly off

the edge of the fabric.

aNeedle drop position

Quilting

You can make beautiful quilts quickly and easily

with this machine. When making a quilt, you will

find it convenient to use the knee lifter and foot

controller to free your hands for other tasks

(“Using the Foot Controller” on page S-4 and /or

“Using the Knee Lifter” on page S-15).

The 30 quilting stitches Q-01 through Q-30 and

the utility stitches with “P” or “Q” indicated on

their key are useful for quilting.

The “P” or “Q” at the bottom of the key display

indicates that these stitches are intended for (“Q”)

quilting and (“P”) piecing.

See page S-62 for the detailed information of

stitches.

Note

• Use the “L/R SHIFT” setting for fine tuning

the placement of the stitch. Be sure to sew

trial stitches using the same conditions as

the real sewing.

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

Piecing stitch (Middle)

Piecing stitch (Right)

Piecing stitch (Left)

Hand-look quilting (Middle)

Basting stitch

(Middle)

Stem stitch

Quilting appliqué zigzag stitch

Zigzag stitch (Right)

Zigzag stitch (Left)

2 steps elastic zigzag

3 steps elastic zigzag

Quilting appliqué stitch

Shell tuck edge

Blanket stitch

Quilting stippling

Overcasting stitch

Tape a tt ac hing

Serpentine stitch

Feather stitch

Fagoting cross stitch

Couching stitch

Patchwork double overlock

stitch

Smocking stitch

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-36

■Piecing

Sewing two pieces of fabric together is called

piecing. When cutting pieces for quilt blocks, make

sure the seam allowance is 6.5 mm (approx.

1/4 inch).

aSelect or and attach presser foot

“J”.

bAlign the edge of the fabric with the edge of

the presser foot, and start sewing.

* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance

along the right edge of the presser foot with

selected, the width should be set to 5.50 mm

(approx. 7/32 inch).

a6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)

* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance

along the left edge of the presser foot with

selected, the width should be set to 1.50 mm

(approx. 1/32 inch).

a6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)

* To change the needle position, use or in

the width display.

Rick-rack stitch

Decorative stitch

Hemstitching

Single diamond

overcast

Overcasting stitch

Piecing stitch (Right)

Piecing stitch (Middle)

Piecing stitch (Left)

Hand-look quilting

Quilting appliqué zigzag stitch

Quilting appliqué stitch

Quilting stippling

Memo

• When a stitch pattern in the Quilting

Stitches category (Q-02 through Q-30) is

selected, a finer stitch width can be set than

is available with stitch patterns in other

categories.

For example: Stitch Q-03 has 57 needle

positions and stitch Q-19 has 29 width

selections.

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

Note

• The width range of stitch setting is only

available in the Quilting stitch “Q” quilting

category.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-37

■Appliqué

aTrace the pattern onto the appliqué fabric

and then cut around it, leaving a 3 mm to

5 mm (approx. 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch) seam

allowance.

aSeam allowance: 3 mm to 5 mm

(approx. 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch)

bPlace a piece of stabilizer cut to the finished

size of the appliqué design onto the fabric,

and then fold over the seam margin using

an iron. Clip curves when necessary.

cTurn the appliqué over, and attach the

stabilizer with basting pins or a basting

stitch.

dSelect and attach presser foot “J”.

eUse the quilting appliqué stitch to attach

the appliqué. Sew around the edge while

dropping the needle as close to the edge as

possible.

aAppliqué

bNeedle drop position

Memo

• Using a straight stitch (middle needle

position) makes it easier to sew smoothly

(see page S-24).

• For models equipped with the guideline

marker:

In the case Q-01(center, at width 3.5 mm) is

selected, if the guideline marker is set at

10.0 mm (3.5 mm plus 6.5 mm, close to 1/4

inch), you can sew piecing with referring the

guideline marker.

CAUTION

• Be careful that the needle does not strike a

basting pin during sewing. Striking a pin can

cause the needle to break, resulting in injury.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-38

You can use the appliqué technique to attach

appliqué designs like the three pictured below.

■Quilting with Satin Stitches

For better fabric control, use the foot controller to

sew with satin stitches. Set the speed control slide to

control the stitch width to make subtle changes in

the stitch width during sewing.

aAttach the foot controller (see page S-4).

bSelect and attach presser foot “J”.

cPress in the length display to shorten

the stitch length.

dPress to use the speed control slide

to control the stitch width.

eSet the “Width Control” to “ON”.

fPress .

→The display will return to the original screen.

gStart sewing.

* You can adjust the stitch width during sewing by

moving the sewing speed controller. Slide the lever

to the left, and the stitch width becomes narrower.

Slide it to the right, the stitch width becomes wider.

The size of the width changes equally on both sides

of the middle needle position.

anarrower

bwider

Example: Changing the width

hWhen you are finished sewing, set the

“Width Control” back to “OFF”.

aDresden plate

bStained glass

cSunbonnet sue

Memo

• The setting will vary according to the kind of

fabric and the thickness of the thread, but a

length of 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm (approx.

1/64 inch to 1/32 inch) is best for satin

stitches.

Memo

• You can use the speed control slide to

adjust the stitch width. Use the foot

controller to adjust the sewing speed.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-39

■Free Motion Quilting

With free motion quilting, the feed dogs can be

lowered by pressing , so that the fabric can be

moved freely in any direction.

In this mode, the presser foot is raised to the

necessary height for free motion sewing.

We recommend attaching the foot controller and

sewing at a consistent speed. You can adjust the

sewing speed with the speed control slide on the

machine.

Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”

aPress to set the machine to free motion

sewing mode.

→The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised

to the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are

lowered for free motion sewing.

bSelect a stitch.

cRemove the presser foot holder.

dAttach free motion open toe quilting foot

“O” by positioning the pin of the quilting

foot above the needle clamp screw and

aligning the lower-left of the quilting foot

and the presser bar.

apin

bNeedle clamp screw

cPresser bar

eHold the quilting foot in place with your

right hand, and tighten the presser foot

holder screw using the disc-shaped

screwdriver with your left hand.

aPresser foot holder screw

fUse both hands to stretch the fabric taut,

and then move the fabric at a consistent

pace in order to sew uniform stitches

roughly 2.0 mm - 2.5 mm (approx.

1/16 inch - 3/32 inch) in length.

aStitch

Memo

• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it

may be necessary to adjust the upper

thread tension (see page S-12). Test with a

sample piece of quilting fabric.

Note

• Make sure that the quilting foot is not

slanted.

CAUTION

• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the

included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle

may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend

or break.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-40

gPress to cancel the free motion sewing

mode.

→Rotate the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.

Blind Hem Stitches

Secure the bottoms of skirts and pants with a blind

hem. Two stitches are available for blind hem

stitching.

aTurn the skirt or pants wrong side out.

aWrong side of fabric

bRight side of fabric

cEdge of fabric

dBottom side

bFold the fabric along the desired edge of the

hem, and press.

cUse a chalk to mark on the fabric about 5

mm (3/16 inch) from the edge of the fabric,

and then baste it.

dFold back the fabric inside along the

basting.

eUnfold the edge of fabric, and position the

fabric with the wrong side facing up.

fAttach blind hem foot “R”.

Memo

• Do not be discouraged with your initial

results. The technique requires practice.

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Blind hem stitch

Blind hem stitch stretch

Memo

• When the size of cylindrical pieces is too

small to slide onto the arm or the length is

too short, the fabric will not feed and

desired results may not be achieved.

aWrong side of fabric

bRight side of Fabric

cEdge of fabric

dDesired edge of hem

aWrong side of fabric

bRight side of fabric

cEdge of fabric

dDesired edge of hem

e5 mm (3/16 inch)

fBasting

aWrong side of fabric

bRight side of fabric

cEdge of fabric

dDesired edge of hem

e5 mm (3/16 inch)

fBasting

gBasting point

aWrong side of fabric

bRight side of fabric

cEdge of fabric

dDesired edge of hem

eBasting point

fBasting

356

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-41

gSelect or .

hRemove the flat bed attachment to use the

free-arm.

iSlide the item that you wish to sew onto the

free arm, make sure that the fabric feeds

correctly, and then start sewing.

aFree arm

jPosition the fabric with the edge of the

folded hem against the guide of the presser

foot, and then lower the presser foot lever.

aWrong side of fabric

bFold of hem

cGuide

kAdjust the stitch width until the needle

slightly catches the fold of the hem.

aNeedle drop point

When you change the needle drop point, raise the

needle, and then change the stitch width.

aThick fabric

bNormal fabric

Memo

• Blind hem stitches cannot be sewn if the left

needle drop point does not catch the fold. If

the needle catches too much of the fold, the

fabric cannot be unfolded and the seam

appearing on the right side of the fabric will

be very large, leaving an unattractive finish.

If you experience either of these cases,

follow the instructions below to solve the

problem.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-42

■If the Needle Catches Too Much of

the Hem Fold

The needle is too far to the left.

Press to decrease the stitch width so that the

needle slightly catches the fold of the hem.

aWrong side of fabric

bRight side of fabric

■If the Needle does not Catch the

Hem Fold

The needle is too far to the right.

Press to increase the stitch width so that the

needle slightly catches the fold of the hem.

aWrong side of fabric

bRight side of fabric

lSew with the fold of the hem against the

presser foot guide.

mRemove the basting stitching and reverse

the fabric.

aWrong side of fabric

bRight side of fabric

Appliqué

aUse a temporary spray adhesive, fabric glue

or a basting stitch to attach the appliqué to

the fabric.

* This will keep the fabric from moving during

sewing.

aAppliqué

bFabric glue

bSelect or .

* Adjust the stitch length and width to correspond to

the appliqué shape, size, and quality of material (see

page S-10).

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-43

cAttach presser foot “J”. Check that the

needle drops slightly off the edge of the

appliqué, then start sewing.

aAppliqué material

aNeedle drop position

■Appliqué Sharp Curves

Stop the machine with the needle in the fabric

outside the appliqué. Raise the presser foot and turn

the fabric a little bit at a time while sewing for an

attractive finish to the seam.

■Appliqué Corners

Stop the machine with the needle in the right

position of the outside (or inside) corner of the

appliqué. Raise the presser foot and pivot the fabric

to align the fabric edge. Lower the presser foot and

continue stitching.

aOutside corner

bInside corner

Shelltuck Stitches

Shelltuck stitches give an attractive appearance of

shells along the curve of a collar. This stitch

pattern can be used for edging the neckline or

sleeves of dresses and blouses.

aSelect .

bIncrease the upper thread tension for an

attractive scallop finish to the shelltuck

stitches (see page S-12).

Memo

• Placing a lightweight tear away stabilizer

beneath the stitching area will improve the

stitch placement along the edge of the

appliqué fabric.

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

Memo

• If the upper thread tension is too weak, the

shelltuck stitches will not scallop.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-44

cTo make rows of shell tuck stitches, fold the

fabric in half along the bias.

dAttach presser foot “J”. Set the needle drop

point slightly off the edge of the fabric, and

start sewing.

aNeedle drop position

eUnfold the fabric, and iron the tucks to one

side.

Scallop Stitches

This wave-shaped satin stitch is called the scallop

stitch. Use this stitch to decorate the edges of

blouse collars and handkerchiefs or use it as a hem

accent.

aSelect .

bAttach presser foot “N”. Sew scallop

stitches along the edge of the fabric.

* Do not sew directly on the edge of the fabric.

Memo

•Use a thin fabric.

Memo

• To make shell tucks at the edge of a collar

or neckline, follow the pattern’s instructions

and then use this stitch to make a

decorative finish on the collar or neckline.

Memo

• A temporary spray adhesive may be

necessary for lightweight fabrics. Test sew

the fabric before sewing a project.

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-45

cTrim along the seam, making sure not to cut

the stitches.

Crazy Quilting

For a decorative look called “Crazy Quilting”, the

following stitches can be sewn on top of a pressed

seam allowance.

aSelect a straight stitch and attach presser

foot “J”.

bWith the right sides facing each other, sew

two pieces of fabric together, and then

press open the seam allowance.

aStraight stitch

bSeam margins

c6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)

dWrong side

cSelect a stitch for top stitching.

dPlace the fabric right side up in the

machine, and center the presser foot over

the seam when sewing.

aRight side of fabric

Smocking Stitches

Use smocking stitches for decorative sewing on

clothes, etc.

aSelect a straight stitch and attach presser

foot “J”.

bSet the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.

3/16 inch) and loosen the upper thread

tension to approximately 2.0 (see “Setting

the Stitch Length” on page S-10 and

“Setting the Thread Tension” on page S-12).

cPull the bobbin and upper threads out by

50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).

dSew the seams, leaving approximately

10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch) between the

seams, then trim excess thread, leaving

50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).

aApproximately 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)

Memo

• Use a seam sealant to secure the edges of

the scallop stitches.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-46

ePull the bobbin threads to obtain the

desired amount of gather, and then smooth

the gathers by ironing them.

fSelect or .

gSew the spaces between the straight seams.

hPull out the straight stitch threads.

Fagoting

When there is a space between two fabrics with

thread sewn over the space to join the fabrics

together, it is called fagoting. Use this stitch when

sewing blouses or children’s clothes.

aBaste two pieces of fabric onto thin paper,

leaving a space of 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)

between the fabrics.

* If you draw a line down the middle of the thin paper

or water-soluble stabilizer, sewing is easier.

a4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)

bPaper

cBasting stitches

bSelect or .

cAttach presser foot “J”. Align the center of

the presser foot with the middle of the

space between the fabrics and begin

sewing.

aBasting stitches

dWhen sewing is finished, gently tear the

paper away.

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

Memo

• Use a thick thread.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-47

Tape or Elastic Attaching

aSelect a straight stitch and attach presser

foot “J”.

bSet the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.

3/16 inch), and loosen the upper thread

tension to 2.0 (see “Setting the Stitch

Length” on page S-10 and “Setting the

Thread Tension” on page S-12).

cSew two rows of straight stitches on the

right side of the fabric, then pull the bobbin

thread to create the necessary gather.

dPlace the tape over the gather, and hold it

in place with basting pins.

aTape

eSelect or .

fSew over the tape (or elastic).

gPull out the straight stitch threads.

Memo

• Be sure that neither automatic

reinforcement nor automatic thread

cutting is selected.

Memo

• Before sewing the straight stitch, rotate the

handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)

and pull up the bobbin thread. Holding the

top and bobbin thread, pull a length of

thread out from the rear of the machine. (Be

sure that the presser foot is raised.)

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

CAUTION

• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting

pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The

thread could tangle or the needle could break,

causing injury.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-48

Heirloom

■Hemstitching (1)

Use for sewing tablecloths, decorative hems, and

decorative stitching on shirt fronts.

aInsert a type 130/705H, size 100/16 Wing

needle.

* This specialty sewing needle is not furnished with

your machine. Must be purchased separately.

bSelect a stitch and attach presser foot “N”.

* Select any stitch between 3-01 and 3-22.

cStart sewing.

Example: Illustration of finished product

■Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1))

aPull out several threads from one area on a

piece of fabric to open the area.

* Pull out 5 or 6 threads to leave a 3 mm

(approx. 1/8 inch) area open.

bSelect .

cAttach presser foot “N”. With the right side

of the fabric facing up, sew one edge of the

open area.

Memo

• Use a light to medium weight homespun

fabric with a little stiffness.

CAUTION

• The “Automatic Threading” button cannot be

used. Thread the wing needle by hand, from

front to back. Using the “Automatic

Threading” button may result in damage to the

machine.

• A more attractive finish can be obtained if you

use a “130/705H Wing” needle when sewing

these patterns. If using a wing needle and the

stitch width has been set manually, check that

the needle will not touch the presser foot by

carefully rotating the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) before starting to sew.

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

Memo

• Loosely woven fabrics work best for this.

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-49

dPress to create a mirror image of the

stitch.

eMatch beginning needle drop points on the

opposite edge of the open area to keep the

stitching symmetrical.

■Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2))

aPull out several threads from both sides of

the 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) area which

are not yet open.

* Pull out four threads, leave five threads, and then

pull out four threads. The width of five threads is

approximately 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less.

aApprox. 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less

bFour threads (pull out)

cFive threads (leave)

bSelect .

cSew the decorative stitch in the center of

the five threads created above.

One-step Buttonholes

With one-step buttonholes, you can make

buttonholes appropriate to the size of your button.

See page S-62 for the detailed information of

stitches.

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

Memo

• A wing needle can be used for Hemstitching

(3).

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Narrow rounded buttonhole

Wide round ended

buttonhole

Tapered round ended

buttonhole

Round ended buttonhole

Round double ended

buttonhole

Narrow squared buttonhole

Wide squared buttonhole

Stretch buttonhole

Heirloom buttonhole

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-50

One-step buttonholes are sewn from the front of

the presser foot to the back, as shown below.

aReinforcement stitching

aSelect a buttonhole stitch, and attach

buttonhole foot “A”.

bMark the position and length of the

buttonhole on the fabric.

aMarks on fabric

bButtonhole sewing

cPull out the button holder plate on the

presser foot, and insert the button that will

be put through the buttonhole. Then tighten

the button holder plate around the button.

aButton holder plate

dAlign the presser foot with the mark on the

fabric, and lower the presser foot.

aMark on the fabric

bMarks on the presser foot

Bound buttonhole

Keyhole buttonhole

Tapered keyhole buttonhole

Keyhole buttonhole

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Memo

• The maximum buttonhole length is about

28 mm (approx. 1-1/16 inches) (diameter +

thickness of the button).

Memo

• The size of the buttonhole is determined by

the size of the button in the button holder

plate.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-51

eLower the buttonhole lever so that it is

positioned behind the metal bracket on the

buttonhole foot.

aButtonhole lever

aMetal bracket

fGently hold the end of the upper thread,

and then start sewing.

* Feed the fabric carefully by hand while the

buttonhole is sewn.

→Once sewing is completed, the machine

automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then

stops.

gInsert a pin along the inside of one of the

bar tacks, and then insert the seam ripper

into the center of the buttonhole and cut

towards the pin.

aBasting pin

bSeam ripper

Note

• Pass the thread underneath the presser

foot.

• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole

foot backward as far as possible as shown

in the illustration, making sure that there is

no gap behind the part of the foot marked

“A”. If the buttonhole foot is not slid back as

far as possible, the buttonhole will not be

sewn at the correct size.

Memo

• If automatic thread cutting is turned on

before you start sewing, both threads are

automatically cut after the reinforcement

stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed

(for example, because it is too thick),

increase the stitch length setting.

CAUTION

• When using the seam ripper to open the

buttonhole, do not put your hand or finger in

the path of the ripper. The ripper may slip and

cause injury. Do not use the seam ripper in any

other way than how it is intended.

Memo

• For keyhole buttonholes, use the eyelet

punch to make a hole in the rounded end of

the buttonhole. Then insert a pin along the

inside of one of the bar tacks, insert a seam

ripper into the hole made with the eyelet

punch, and cut towards the pin.

aEyelet punch

bBasting pin

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-52

■Sewing Stretch Fabrics

When sewing on stretch fabric with or ,

sew the buttonhole stitches over a gimp thread.

aHook the gimp thread onto the back of

presser foot “A”. Insert the ends into the

grooves at the front of the presser foot, and

then temporarily tie them there.

aUpper thread

bLower the presser foot and start sewing.

cOnce sewing is completed, gently pull the

gimp thread to remove any slack, and trim

off any excess.

■Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do

Not Fit into the Button Holder Plate

Use the markings on the presser foot scale to set the

size of the buttonhole. One mark on the presser foot

scale equals 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch).

Add the button diameter and thickness together, and

then set the plate at the calculated value.

aPresser foot scale

bButton holder plate

cCompleted measurement of diameter + thickness

d5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)

Memo

• Set the width of the satin stitches to the

width of the gimp thread, and set the

buttonhole width to be 2-3 times the width

of the gimp thread.

Memo

• After using the seam ripper to cut open the

threads over the buttonhole, trim off the

threads.

Memo

• For example, for a button with a diameter of

15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch) and a thickness

of 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch), the scale

should be set at 25 mm (approx. 1 inch).

a10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)

b15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch)

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-53

Darning

Use darning stitches for mending and other

applications.

See page S-62 for the detailed information of

stitches.

Darning is performed by sewing from the front of the

presser foot to the back as shown below.

aReinforcement stitches

aSelect a stitch, and attach buttonhole foot

“A”.

bSet the scale to the desired length of the

darning.

aPresser foot scale

bCompleted length measurement

cWidth 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)

d5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)

cCheck that the needle drops at the desired

position and lower the presser foot, making

sure the upper thread passes underneath

the buttonhole foot.

dLower the buttonhole lever so that it is

positioned behind the metal bracket on the

buttonhole foot.

aButtonhole lever

aMetal bracket

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Darning

Memo

• The maximum length for darning is 28 mm

(approx. 1-1/16 inches).

Note

• Pass the thread underneath the presser

foot.

• Set the presser foot so that there is no gap

behind the section marked with an “A” (the

shaded area in the illustration below). If

there is a gap, the size of the darning will

not be correct.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-54

eGently hold the end of the upper thread,

and then press the “Start/Stop” button to

start the machine.

→Once sewing is completed, the machine

automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then

stops.

Bar Tacks

Use bar tacks to reinforce areas that will be subject

to strain, such as pocket corners.

See page S-62 for the detailed information of

stitches.

aSelect .

bAttach buttonhole foot “A” and set the

scale to the length of the bar tack you wish

to sew.

aPresser foot scale

bCompleted length measurement

c5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)

cSet the fabric so that the pocket moves

toward you during sewing.

dCheck the first needle drop point and lower

the presser foot.

a2 mm (approx. 1/16 inch)

Memo

• If automatic thread cutting is turned on

before you start sewing, both threads are

automatically cut after the reinforcement

stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed

(for example, because it is too thick),

increase the stitch length setting.

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Bar tack

Memo

• Bar tacks can be between 5 mm (approx.

3/16 inch) and 28 mm (approx. 1-1/16

inches). Bar tacks are usually between 5

mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 10 mm (approx.

3/8 inch).

Note

• Pass the thread underneath the presser

foot.

• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole

foot backward as far as possible as shown

in the illustration, making sure that there is

no gap behind the part of the foot marked

“A”. If the buttonhole foot is not slid back as

far as possible, the bar tack will not be sewn

to the correct size.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-55

eLower the buttonhole lever so that it is

positioned behind the metal bracket on the

buttonhole foot.

aMetal bracket

fGently hold the end of the upper thread and

begin sewing.

→When sewing is completed, the machine will sew

reinforcement stitches and stop automatically.

■Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics

Place a piece of folded fabric or cardboard beside

the fabric being sewn to level the buttonhole foot

and allow for easier and even feeding.

aPresser foot

bThick paper

cFabric

Button Sewing

Buttons with 2 or 4 holes can be attached, using

the machine.

See page S-62 for the detailed information of

stitches.

aSelect .

→The feed dogs are lowered automatically.

bRaise the presser foot.

Memo

• If automatic thread cutting is turned on

before you start sewing, both threads are

automatically cut after the reinforcement

stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed

(for example, because it is too thick),

increase the stitch length setting.

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Button sewing

Note

• Do not use the automatic thread cutting

function when sewing buttons. Otherwise,

you will lose the thread ends.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-56

cAttach button sewing foot “M”, slide the

button along the metal plate and into the

presser foot, and lower the presser foot.

aButton

bMetal plate

dRotate the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) to check that the needle

goes into each hole correctly.

* If the needle does not reach the holes on the left

side, adjust the stitch width.

* To attach the button more securely, repeat the

process.

eGently hold the end of the upper thread and

start sewing.

→The machine stops automatically when sewing is

finished.

fFrom the wrong side of the fabric, pull the

end of the bobbin thread to pull the upper

thread through to the wrong side of the

fabric. Tie the two thread ends together and

cut the threads.

gAfter the button is attached, select another

stitch and rotate the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.

■Attaching 4 Hole Buttons

Sew the two holes closest to you. Then raise the

presser foot and move the fabric so that the needle

goes into the next two holes, and sew them in the

same way.

■Attaching a Shank to the Button

aPull the shank lever toward you before

sewing.

aShank lever

bPull the two ends of the upper thread

between the button and the fabric, wind

them around the shank, and then tie them

firmly together.

cTie the ends of the bobbin thread from the

beginning and end of sewing together on

the wrong side of the fabric.

dCut off any excess thread.

CAUTION

• Make sure the needle does not strike the

button during sewing. The needle may break

and cause injury.

Note

• When sewing is completed, be sure to

select the other stitch and rotate the

handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)

to raise the feed dogs.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-57

Eyelet

Use this stitch for making belt holes and other

similar applications.

See page S-62 for the detailed information of

stitches.

aSelect .

bUse or in either the stitch width

display or the stitch length display to

choose the size of the eyelet.

* Actual size

aLarge 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)

bMedium 6 mm (approx. 15/64 inch)

cSmall 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)

cAttach monogramming foot “N”, then

rotate the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) to check the needle

drop position.

aNeedle drop position

dLower the presser foot and start sewing.

→When sewing is finished, the machine sews

reinforcement stitches and stops automatically.

eUse the eyelet punch to make a hole in the

center of the stitching.

Multi-directional Sewing

(Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)

Use these stitch patterns to attach patches or

emblems to pant legs, shirt sleeves, etc.

aRemove the flat bed attachment to use the

free-arm.

Stitch Stitch name Presser foot

Eyelet

Note

• If the stitch pattern comes out poorly, make

adjustments to “SEWING STITCH

PATTERNS” on page S-75.

Memo

• Insert the tubular piece of fabric onto the

free-arm, and then sew in the order shown

in the illustration.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-58

bSelect and attach monogramming foot

“N”.

cSet the needle in the fabric at the sewing

start point, and sew seam “1” as shown.

aStart Point

dSelect and sew seam “2” as shown.

* The fabric will move sideways, guide the fabric by

hand to keep sewing straight.

eSelect and sew seam “3” as shown.

→The fabric feeds forward while stitching backward.

fSelect and sew seam “4” as shown.

→The seam will be connected to the starting point of

seam 1.

Zipper Insertion

■Centered Zipper

Use for bags and other such applications.

aSelect .

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

Memo

• For details on each stitch, refer to the

“STITCH SETTING CHART” on page S-62.

Note

• Make sure you sew using the middle needle

position.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-59

bAttach presser foot “J” and sew straight

stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to

a basting stitch (see page S-28) and sew to

the top of the fabric.

aBasting stitches

bReverse stitches

cEnd of zipper opening

dWrong side

cPress the seam allowance open and attach

the zipper with a basting stitch in the

middle of each side of the zipper tape.

aBasting stitches

bZipper

cWrong side

dRemove presser foot “J”. Align the right

side of the pin in zipper foot “I” with the

presser foot holder, and attach the zipper

foot.

aRight

bLeft

cNeedle drop position

eTopstitch 7 mm to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 inch

to 3/8 inch) from the seamed edge of the

fabric, then remove the basting.

■Inserting a Side Zipper

Use for side zippers in skirts or dresses.

aSelect .

CAUTION

• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the

straight stitch, middle needle position is

selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle

does not strike the presser foot. If another

stitch is selected, the needle will strike the

presser foot, causing the needle to break and

possibly causing injury.

CAUTION

• Make sure the needle does not strike the

zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the

zipper, the needle may break, leading to

injury.

Note

• Make sure you sew using the middle needle

position.

SEWING THE STITCHES

S-60

bAttach presser foot “J” and sew straight

stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to

a basting stitch and sew to the top of the

fabric.

aReverse stitches

bWrong side of fabric

cBasting stitches

dEnd of zipper opening

cPress the seam allowance open and align

the folded hem along the teeth of the

zipper, while maintaining 3 mm (approx.

1/8 inch) of sewing space.

aZipper pull tab

bWrong side of fabric

cZipper teeth

dEnd of zipper opening

e3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)

dRemove presser foot “J”.

eAlign the right side of the pin in zipper foot

“I” with the presser foot holder, and attach

the presser foot.

aRight

bLeft

cNeedle drop position

fSet the presser foot in the 3 mm (approx.

1/8 inch) margin.

gStarting from the end of the zipper opening,

sew to a point about 50 mm (approx.

2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, then

stop the machine.

hPull down the zipper slider, then continue

sewing to the edge of the fabric.

a50 mm (approx. 2 inches)

b3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)

CAUTION

• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the

straight stitch, middle needle position is

selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle

does not strike the presser foot. If another

stitch is selected, the needle will strike the

presser foot, causing the needle to break and

possibly causing injury.

SEWING THE STITCHES

Utility Stitches

Sewing S-61

iClose the zipper, turn the fabric over, and

sew a basting stitch.

aFront of the skirt (wrong side of fabric)

bBasting stitches

cFront of the skirt (right side of fabric)

dBack of the skirt (right side of fabric)

jRemove the presser foot, and reattach it so

that the left side of the pin is attached to the

presser foot holder.

* When sewing the left side of the zipper, the needle

should drop on the right side of the presser foot.

When sewing the right side of the zipper, the needle

should drop on the left side of the presser foot.

aRight

bLeft

cNeedle drop position

kSet the fabric so that the left edge of the

presser foot touches the edge of the zipper

teeth.

lSew reverse stitches at the top of the

zipper, then continue sewing.

mStop sewing about 50 mm (approx.

2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, leave

the needle in the fabric, and remove the

basting stitches.

nOpen the zipper and sew the rest of the

seam.

aBasting stitches

b7 mm to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch)

cReverse stitches

d50 mm (approx. 2 inches)

CAUTION

• Make sure the needle does not strike the

zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the

zipper, the needle may break, leading to

injury.

STITCH SETTING CHART

S-62

The following chart shows information for each utility stitch concerning applications, stitch lengths, stitch

widths, and whether or not the twin needle mode can be used.

STITCH SETTING CHART

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

Applications

Stitch width

[mm (inch)]

Stitch length

[mm (inch)] Twi n

needle

Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

Straight stitch

(Left)

General sewing, gather,

pintuck, etc. 0.0

(0)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Straight stitch

(Left)

General sewing, gather,

pintuck, etc. 0.0

(0)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Straight stitch

(Middle)

General sewing, gather,

pintuck, etc. 3.5

(1/8)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Straight stitch

(Middle)

General sewing, gather,

pintuck, etc. 3.5

(1/8)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Triple stretch

stitch

General sewing for

reinforcement and decorative

topstitching

0.0

(0)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing

and decorative applications 1.0

(1/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Decorative

stitch

Decorative stitching, top

stitching 0.0

(0)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Basting stitch Basting 0.0

(0)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

(3/4)

5 - 30

(3/16 -

1-3/16)

Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending. 3.5

(1/8)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.4

(1/16)

0.0 - 5.0

(0 - 3/16)

( J )

Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending. 3.5

(1/8)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.4

(1/16)

0.0 - 5.0

(0 - 3/16)

( J )

Zigzag stitch

(Right)

Start from right needle

position, zigzag sew at left. 3.5

(1/8)

2.5 - 5.0

(3/32 - 3/16)

1.4

(1/16)

0.3 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Zigzag stitch

(Left)

Start from left needle position,

zigzag sew at right. 3.5

(1/8)

2.5 - 5.0

(3/32 - 3/16)

1.4

(1/16)

0.3 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

2 steps elastic

zigzag

Overcasting (medium weight

and stretch fabrics), tape and

elastic

5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

3 steps elastic

zigzag

Overcasting (medium,

heavyweight and stretch

fabrics), tape and elastic

5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Overcasting

stitch

Reinforcing of light and

medium weight fabrics 3.5

(1/8)

2.5 - 5.0

(3/32 - 3/16)

2.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

STITCH SETTING CHART

Sewing S-63

Overcasting

stitch

Reinforcing of heavyweight

fabric 5.0

(3/16)

2.5 - 5.0

(3/32 - 3/16)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Overcasting

stitch

Reinforcing of medium,

heavyweight and easily friable

fabrics or decorative stitching.

5.0

(3/16)

3.5 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Overcasting

stitch

Reinforced seaming of stretch

fabric 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Overcasting

stitch

Reinforcing of medium stretch

fabric and heavyweight fabric,

decorative stitching

5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Overcasting

stitch

Reinforcement of stretch

fabric or decorative stitching 4.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

4.0

(3/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Overcasting

stitch

Stretch knit seam 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

4.0

(3/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Single diamond

overcast

Reinforcement and seaming

stretch fabric 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.0

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Single diamond

overcast

Reinforcement of stretch

fabric 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.8

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

With side cutter Straight stitch while cutting

fabrics 0.0

(0)

0.0 - 2.5

(0 - 3/32)

2.5

(3/32)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

With side cutter Zigzag stitch while cutting

fabrics 3.5

(1/8)

3.5 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

1.4

(1/16)

0.0 - 5.0

(0 - 3/16) NO

With side cutter Overcasting stitch while

cutting fabrics 3.5

(1/8)

3.5 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

2.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

With side cutter Overcasting stitch while

cutting fabrics 5.0

(3/16)

3.5 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

With side cutter Overcasting stitch while

cutting fabrics 5.0

(3/16)

3.5 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Piecing stitch

(Right)

Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm

(approx. 1/4 inch) left seam

allowance

5.5

(7/32)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Piecing stitch

(Middle)

Piecework/patchwork

——2.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Piecing stitch

(Left)

Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm

(approx. 1/4 inch) left seam

allowance

1.5

(1/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hand-look

quilting

Quilting stitch made to look

like hand quilting stitch 0.0

(0)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Quilting

appliqué zigzag

stitch

Zigzag stitch for quilting and

sewing on appliqué quilt

pieces

3.5

(1/8)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.4

(1/16)

0.0 - 5.0

(0 - 3/16) NO

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

Applications

Stitch width

[mm (inch)]

Stitch length

[mm (inch)] Twin

needle

Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

STITCH SETTING CHART

S-64

Quilting

appliqué stitch

Quilting stitch for invisible

appliqué or attaching binding 1.5

(1/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.8

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Quilting

stippling

Background quilting 7.0

(1/4)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Blind hem stitch Hemming woven fabrics

00 3← - →32.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Blind hem stitch

stretch

Hemming stretch fabric

00 3← - →32.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Blanket stitch Appliqués, decorative blanket

stitch 3.5

(1/8)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Shell tuck edge Shell tuck edge finish on

fabrics 4.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Satin scallop

stitch

Decorating collar of blouse,

edge of handkerchief 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

0.5

(1/32)

0.1 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Scallop stitch Decorating collar of blouse,

edge of handkerchief 7.0

(1/4)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.4

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Patchwork join

stitch

Patchwork stitches, decorative

stitching 4.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.2

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Patchwork

double overlock

stitch

Patchwork stitches, decorative

stitching 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Couching stitch Decorative stitching, attaching

cord and couching 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.2

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Smocking stitch Smocking, decorative

stitching 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Feather stitch Fagoting, decorative stitching 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Fagoting cross

stitch

Fagoting, bridging and

decorative stitching 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Tape attaching Attaching tape to seam in

stretch fabric 4.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Ladder stitch Decorative stitching 4.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.0

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Rick-rack stitch Decorative top stitching 4.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Decorative

stitch

Decorative stitching 5.5

(7/32)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

Applications

Stitch width

[mm (inch)]

Stitch length

[mm (inch)] Twi n

needle

Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

STITCH SETTING CHART

Sewing S-65

Serpentine

stitch

Decorative stitching and

attaching elastic 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Decorative

stitch

Decorative stitching and

appliqué 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Decorative

stippling stitch

Decorative stitching 7.0

(1/4)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hemstitching Decorative hems, triple

straight at left 1.0

(1/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching Decorative hems, triple

straight at center 3.5

(1/8)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching

zigzag

Decorative hems, top stitching 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.0

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching Decorative hems, lace

attaching pin stitch 3.5

(1/8)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hemstitching Decorative hems 3.0

(1/8)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.5

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hemstitching Decorative hems daisy stitch 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.0

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.5

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.5

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.5

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

4.0

(3/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 4.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Honeycomb

stitch

Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Honeycomb

stitch

Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.5

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.0

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

Applications

Stitch width

[mm (inch)]

Stitch length

[mm (inch)] Twin

needle

Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

STITCH SETTING CHART

S-66

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

4.0

(3/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 4.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching Decorative hems and bridging

stitch 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching Decorative hems. Fagoting,

attaching ribbon 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

3.0

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16)

( J )

Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking 6.0

(15/64)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 7.0

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Narrow rounded

buttonhole

Buttonhole on light to medium

weight fabrics 5.0

(3/16)

3.0 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

0.4

(1/64)

0.2 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Wide round

ended

buttonhole

Buttonholes with extra space

for larger buttons 5.5

(7/32)

3.5 - 5.5

(1/8 - 7/32)

0.4

(1/64)

0.2 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Tapered round

ended

buttonhole

Reinforced waist tapered

buttonholes 5.0

(3/16)

3.0 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

0.4

(1/64)

0.2 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Round ended

buttonhole

Buttonholes with vertical bar

tack in heavyweight fabrics 5.0

(3/16)

3.0 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

0.4

(1/64)

0.2 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Round ended

buttonhole

Buttonholes with bar tack 5.0

(3/16)

3.0 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

0.4

(1/64)

0.2 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Round double

ended

buttonhole

Buttonholes for fine, medium

to heavyweight fabrics 5.0

(3/16)

3.0 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

0.4

(1/64)

0.2 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Narrow squared

buttonhole

Buttonholes for light to

medium weight fabrics 5.0

(3/16)

3.0 - 5.0

(1/8 - 3/16)

0.4

(1/64)

0.2 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Wide squared

buttonhole

Buttonholes with extra space

for larger decorative buttons 5.5

(7/32)

3.5 - 5.5

(1/8 - 7/32)

0.4

(1/64)

0.2 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Stretch

buttonhole

Buttonholes for stretch or

woven fabrics 6.0

(15/64)

3.0 - 6.0

(1/8 - 15/64)

1.0

(1/16)

0.5 - 2.0

(1/32 - 1/16) NO

Heirloom

buttonhole

Buttonholes for heirloom and

stretch fabrics 6.0

(15/64)

3.0 - 6.0

(1/8 - 15/64)

1.5

(1/16)

1.0 - 3.0

(1/16 - 1/8) NO

Bound

buttonhole

The first step in making bound

buttonholes 5.0

(3/16)

0.0 - 6.0

(0 - 15/64)

2.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 4.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

Applications

Stitch width

[mm (inch)]

Stitch length

[mm (inch)] Twi n

needle

Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

STITCH SETTING CHART

Sewing S-67

Keyhole

buttonhole

Buttonholes in heavyweight or

thick fabrics for larger flat

buttons

7.0

(1/4)

3.0 - 7.0

(1/8 - 1/4)

0.5

(1/32)

0.3 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Tapered keyhole

buttonhole

Buttonholes in medium to

heavy weight fabrics for larger

flat buttons

7.0

(1/4)

3.0 - 7.0

(1/8 - 1/4)

0.5

(1/32)

0.3 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Keyhole

buttonhole

Buttonholes with vertical bar

tack for reinforcement in

heavyweight or thick fabrics

7.0

(1/4)

3.0 - 7.0

(1/8 - 1/4)

0.5

(1/32)

0.3 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Darning Darning of medium weight

fabric 7.0

(1/4)

2.5 - 7.0

(3/32 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 2.5

(1/64 - 3/32) NO

Darning Darning of heavyweight fabric 7.0

(1/4)

2.5 - 7.0

(3/32 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 2.5

(1/64 - 3/32) NO

Bar tack Reinforcement at opening of

pocket, etc. 2.0

(1/16)

1.0 - 3.0

(1/16 - 1/8)

0.4

(1/64)

0.3 - 1.0

(1/64 - 1/16) NO

Button sewing Attaching buttons 3.5

(1/8)

2.5 - 4.5

(3/32 - 3/16) ——NO

Eyelet For making eyelets, holes on

belts, etc. 7.0

(1/4)

7.0 6.0 5.0

(1/4 15/64

3/16)

7.0

(1/4)

7.0 6.0 5.0

(1/4 15/64

3/16)

Diagonally left

up (Straight)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric and

mitering corners

————NO

Reverse

(Straight)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric and

mitering corners

————NO

Diagonally right

up (Straight)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric and

mitering corners

————NO

Sideways to left

(Straight)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric ————NO

Sideways to

right (Straight)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric ————NO

Diagonally left

down (Straight)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric and

mitering corners

————NO

Forward

(Straight)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric and

mitering corners

————NO

Diagonally right

down (Straight)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric and

mitering corners

————NO

Sideways to left

(Zigzag)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric ————NO

Sideways to

right (Zigzag)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric ————NO

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

Applications

Stitch width

[mm (inch)]

Stitch length

[mm (inch)] Twin

needle

Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

STITCH SETTING CHART

S-68

Forward

(Zigzag)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric and

mitering corners

————NO

Reverse

(Zigzag)

For attaching appliqué on

tubular pieces of fabric and

mitering corners

————NO

Piecing stitch

(Middle)

Piecework/patchwork

——2.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Piecing stitch

(Right)

Piecework/patchwork

6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) right

seam allowance

5.50

(7/32)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Piecing stitch

(Left)

Piecework/patchwork

6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left

seam allowance

1.50

(1/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hand-look

quilting

Quilting stitch made to look

like hand quilting stitch 3.50

(1/8)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Basting stitch Basting 3.50

(1/8)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

(3/4)

5 - 30

(3/16 - 1-3/16)

Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing

and decorative applications 1.00

(1/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Quilting

appliqué zigzag

stitch

Zigzag stitch for quilting and

sewing on appliqué quilt

pieces

3.50

(1/8)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.0 - 5.0

(0 - 3/16) NO

Zigzag stitch

(Right)

Start from right needle

position, zigzag sew at left 3.50

(1/8)

2.50 - 5.00

(3/32 - 3/16)

1.6

(1/16)

0.3 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Zigzag stitch

(Left)

Start from left needle position,

zigzag sew at right 3.50

(1/8)

2.50 - 5.00

(3/32 - 3/16)

1.6

(1/16)

0.3 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

2 steps elastic

zigzag

Overcasting (medium weight

and stretch fabrics), tape and

elastic

5.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

1.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

3 steps elastic

zigzag

Overcasting (medium,

heavyweight and stretch

fabrics), tape and elastic

5.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

1.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Quilting

appliqué stitch

Quilting stitch for invisible

appliqué or attaching binding 2.00

(1/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Shell tuck edge Shell tuck edge finish on

fabrics 4.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Blanket stitch Appliqués, decorative blanket

stitch 3.50

(1/8)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Quilting

stippling

Background quilting 7.00

(1/4)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Overcasting

stitch

Stretch knit seam 5.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

4.0

(3/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

Applications

Stitch width

[mm (inch)]

Stitch length

[mm (inch)] Twi n

needle

Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

STITCH SETTING CHART

Sewing S-69

Tape attaching Attaching tape to seam in

stretch fabric 5.50

(7/32)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

1.4

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Serpentine

stitch

Decorative stitching and

attaching elastic 5.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Feather stitch Fagoting, decorative stitching 5.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Fagoting cross

stitch

Fagoting, bridging and

decorative stitching 5.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Couching stitch Decorative stitching, attaching

cord and couching 5.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

1.2

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Patchwork

double overlock

stitch

Patchwork stitches, decorative

stitching 5.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Smocking stitch Smocking, decorative

stitching 5.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Rick-rack stitch Decorative top stitching 4.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.5

(3/32)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Decorative

stitch

Decorative stitching and

appliqué 6.00

(15/64)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

1.0

(1/16)

0.2 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Decorative

stitch

Decorative stitching 5.50

(7/32)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

1.6

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 5.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Hemstitching Decorative hems and bridging

stitch 6.00

(15/64)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

2.0

(1/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Single diamond

overcast

Reinforcement and seaming

stretch fabric 6.00

(15/64)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

3.0

(1/8)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Overcasting

stitch

Reinforcement of stretch

fabric or decorative stitching 4.00

(3/16)

0.00 - 7.00

(0 - 1/4)

4.0

(3/16)

0.4 - 5.0

(1/64 - 3/16) NO

Stitch Stitch name

Presser foot

Applications

Stitch width

[mm (inch)]

Stitch length

[mm (inch)] Twin

needle

Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

Chapter 3

SSewing

Character/Decorative Stitches

SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS...............................71

Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch

Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch

Patterns/Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns ...........72

Characters ................................................................................72

■Deleting Characters ................................................................. 73

■Adjusting the Character Spacing .............................................. 74

SEWING STITCH PATTERNS ...................................75

Sewing Attractive Finishes .......................................................75

Basic Sewing .............................................................................75

Making Adjustments ................................................................76

EDITING STITCH PATTERNS...................................78

■Key Functions........................................................................... 78

Changing the Size .....................................................................80

Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ......80

Creating a Vertical Mirror Image .............................................80

Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ........................................80

Sewing a Pattern Continuously ................................................80

Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) .......81

Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern.................................81

Checking the Image ..................................................................82

COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS............................83

Before Combining .....................................................................83

Combining Various Stitch Patterns ..........................................83

Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns .............................84

Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns ...............85

Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length .........................85

Making Step Stitch Patterns

(for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) .......................................86

■More Examples......................................................................... 87

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ......................... 88

Stitch Data Precautions ............................................................88

■Types of Stitch Data that can be Used ..................................... 88

■Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used........................ 88

■Computers and Operating Systems with the Following

Specifications can be Used....................................................... 88

■

Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data

...... 88

Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ......................89

■If the Memory is Full................................................................ 89

Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media.........................................90

Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer.....................................91

Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ............92

Recalling from USB Media ........................................................93

Recalling from the Computer....................................................94

SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-71

Press to display the screen below. There are 7 categories of Character/Decorative stitch patterns.

aDecorative stitch patterns

b7mm decorative stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.

cSatin stitch patterns

d7mm satin stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.

eCross stitch

fUtility decorative stitch patterns

gCharacters (Gothic font, Handwriting font, Outline, Cyrillic font, Japanese font)

hPress this key to create your own stitches with the “MY CUSTOM STITCH” function (see page S-96)

iPatterns stored in “MY CUSTOM STITCH” (see page S-96)

jPatterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page S-92)

kPatterns saved in USB media (see page S-93)

lPatterns saved on the computer (see page S-94)

SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS

Note

• If the screen is locked ( ), unlock the screen by pressing . While the screen is locked, no other

key can be operated.

SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS

S-72

Selecting Decorative Stitch

Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch

Patterns/Satin Stitch

Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch

Patterns/Cross Stitch/Utility

Decorative Stitch Patterns

aSelect the category of the pattern you want

to sew.

bPress the key of the stitch pattern you want

to sew.

* Press to view the next page.

* Press to view the previous page.

* Touch the bar that appears between and to

leap multiple pages at one time.

* To select a different stitch pattern, press .

When the current stitch pattern is erased, select the

new stitch pattern.

→The selected pattern is displayed.

Characters

Example: Entering “Blue Sky”.

aPress .

bPress , , , or

to select a font.

cPress a tab to change the selection screens.

Memo

• There are four fonts for alphabet character

stitching, and a font for Japanese character

stitching. Refer to the Quick Reference

Guide for the details about the different font

selections available.

SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-73

dPress and then enter “B”.

ePress and then enter “lue”.

fPress to enter a space.

gPress again and enter “S”.

aSpace is a jumping stitch

* Remove the jumping stitches after sewing.

hPress and then enter “ky”.

* If you want to continue entering characters in a

different font, press , and then repeat from

step b.

■Deleting Characters

aPress to delete the last character.

bSelect the correct character.

* Continually press and all characters will be

deleted.

Memo

• Characters are deleted individually starting

with the last character entered.

SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS

S-74

■Adjusting the Character Spacing

The space between the characters can be adjusted.

aPress .

* Press to display on the screen.

→The character spacing window appears.

bPress or to adjust character spacing.

* Press to increase the character spacing and

press to decrease the character spacing.

Example:

* Each setting equals a specific distance between

characters.

Value mm

10.18

20.36

30.54

40.72

50.9

61.08

71.26

81.44

91.62

10 1.8

Memo

• The default setting is “0”. No number less

than “0” can be set.

• Changing character spacing by this

method, pertains to all characters. Spacing

changes are valid not only while entering

characters but also before and after the

entering of characters.

SEWING STITCH PATTERNS

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-75

Sewing Attractive Finishes

To achieve attractive results when sewing character/decorative stitches, check the table below for the

proper fabric/thread/needle combinations.

Basic Sewing

aSelect a stitch pattern.

bAttach monogramming foot “N”.

cPlace the fabric under the presser foot, pull

the upper thread out to the side, and then

lower the presser foot.

dPress the “Start/Stop” button to start

sewing.

SEWING STITCH PATTERNS

Note

• Other factors, such as fabric thickness, stabilizer material, etc., also have an effect on the stitch, so

you should always sew a few trial stitches before beginning your project.

• When sewing satin stitch patterns, there may be shrinking or bunching of stitches, so be sure to

attach a stabilizer material.

• Guide the fabric with your hand to keep the fabric feeding straight and even during sewing.

Fabric When sewing on stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, or fabrics with coarse weaves, attach stabilizer on the

wrong side of the fabric. If you do not wish to do so, place the fabric on a thin paper such as tracing paper.

aFabric

bStabilizer

cThin paper

Thread #50 - #60

Needle With lightweight, regular, or stretch fabrics: the Ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14

With heavyweight fabrics: home sewing machine needle 90/14

Presser foot Monogramming foot “N”.

Using another presser foot may give inferior results.

CAUTION

• When sewing 7 mm satin stitch patterns and

the stitches are bunched, lengthen the stitch

length. If you continue sewing when the

stitches are bunched, the needle may bend or

break (“Setting the Stitch Length” on

page S-10).

SEWING STITCH PATTERNS

S-76

ePress the “Start/Stop” button to stop

sewing.

fPress the “Reverse Stitch” button or

“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew

reinforcement stitches.

Making Adjustments

Your stitch pattern may sometimes turn out poorly,

depending on the type or thickness of fabric, the

stabilizer material used, sewing speed, etc. If your

sewing does not turn out well, sew trial stitches

using the same conditions as the real sewing, and

adjust the stitch pattern as explained below. If the

pattern does not turn out well even after making

adjustments based on the pattern, make

adjustments for each pattern individually.

aPress and select on 19/21.

Memo

• If the fabric is pulled or pushed during

sewing, the pattern may not turn out

correctly. Also, depending on the pattern,

there may be movement to the left and right

as well as front and back. Guide the fabric

with your hand to keep the fabric feeding

straight and even during sewing.

Memo

• When sewing character stitches, the

machine automatically sews reinforcement

stitches at the beginning and end of each

character.

• When sewing is completed, trim any excess

thread between letters.

Note

• When sewing some patterns, the needle will

temporarily pause in the raised position

while the fabric is fed due to the operation

of the needle bar separation mechanism

which is used in this machine. At such

times, a clicking sound different from the

sound generated during sewing will be

heard. This sound is normal and is not the

sign of a malfunction.

SEWING STITCH PATTERNS

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-77

bAttach monogramming foot “N” and sew

the pattern.

cCompare the finished pattern to the

illustration of the correct pattern below.

dPress , and then adjust the pattern

with the “Fine Adjust Verti.” or “Fine

Adjust Horiz.” displays.

* If the pattern is bunched:

Press in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.

→The displayed value increases each time the button

is pressed and the pattern will lengthen.

* If the pattern has gaps:

Press in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.

→The displayed value decreases each time the button

is pressed and the pattern will shorten.

* If the pattern is skewed to the left:

Press in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.

→The displayed value increases each time the button

is pressed and the pattern will slide to the right.

* If the pattern is skewed to the right:

Press in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.

→The displayed value decreases each time the button

is pressed and the pattern will slide to the left.

eSew the stitch pattern again.

* If the stitch pattern still comes out poorly, make

adjustments again. Adjust until the stitch pattern

comes out correctly.

fPress to return to the original screen.

Memo

• You can sew with the setting screen on the

display.

EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

S-78

■Key Functions

You can create just the finish you want using the editing functions. Make patterns larger or smaller, make mirror

images, etc.

EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

Note

• Some editing functions cannot be used with certain stitch patterns. Only the functions for the

displayed keys are available when a pattern is selected.

Display Key Name Explanation Page

aPattern display size Show the approximate size of the pattern selected.

: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern

: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern

: 1/4 the size of the sewn pattern

* The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type

of fabric and thread that is used.

S-21

EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-79

bPivot key Press this key to select the pivot setting. When the pivot setting is

selected, stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises

the presser foot automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted,

the presser foot is automatically lowered.

• If this key appears as , the pivot function cannot be used.

• Be sure the “Needle Position - UP/DOWN” of Machine Settings is

set to the down position.

S-15

cFree motion mode key Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode.

The feed dog is lowered and presser foot is raised to a height

appropriate for free motion quilting.

S-39

dAutomatic reinforcement

stitch key

Press this key to turn on the automatic reinforcement stitching mode. S-5

eAutomatic thread cutting

key

Press this key to turn on the automatic thread cutting mode. S-13

fHorizontal mirror image key After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a horizontal

mirror image of the stitch pattern.

S-80

gStitch width and stitch

length key

Shows the stitch width and stitch length of the selected stitch pattern.

The machine default settings are highlighted.

S-10 to

S-12

hThread tension key Shows the thread tension setting for the selected stitch pattern. The

machine default settings are highlighted

S-12

iMemory key Use this key to save stitch pattern combinations. S-89 to S-90

jElongation key When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press this key to choose

from 5 automatic length settings, without changing the stitch zigzag

width or stitch length settings.

S-80

kNeedle mode selection key

(Single/Double)

Press this key to choose single needle sewing or twin needle sewing. “Basic

operations”

lSensor function key Press this key to use the sensor function.

mSize selection key Use this key to select the size of the stitch pattern (large, small). S-80

nImage key Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch

pattern.

S-82

oVertical mirror image key After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a vertical mirror

image of the stitch pattern.

S-80

pThread density key After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to change the thread

density of the pattern.

S-81

qDelete key When you make a mistake selecting a stitch pattern, use this key to

delete the mistake. When you make a mistake in combining stitch

patterns, use this key to delete stitch patterns.

S-72,

S-73

rSingle/Repeat sewing key Press this key to choose single stitches or continuous stitches. S-80

sBack to beginning key When sewing is stopped, press this key to return to the beginning of

the pattern.

S-81

tHome page screen key (For embroidery and sewing machine only)

Press this key to return to the home page screen.

–

uScreen lock key Press this key to lock the screen. When the screen is locked, the

various settings, such as the stitch width and stitch length, are locked

and cannot be changed. Press this key again to unlock the settings.

S-18

vGuideline marker key (For

models equipped with the

guideline marker)

Press this key to display the guideline marker along the sewing line.

The guideline marker makes it easier to align stitches with the fabric

edge or other marker on the fabric.

S-14

w“L/R SHIFT” key Press to shift the stitch pattern to the right or press to shift

the pattern to the left. This feature is not available on all patterns. Only

those applicable will be shifted. The machine default setting is

highlighted.

S-11

xCharacter spacing key Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns. S-74

yFunction page key Press this key to show all the functions available in this screen. S-74

Display Key Name Explanation Page

EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

S-80

Changing the Size

Select a stitch pattern, then press to change

the size of the stitch pattern. The stitch pattern will

be sewn in the size highlighted on the key.

Actual Stitch Pattern Size

* The size differs depending on the fabric and threads.

Changing the Length (for 7mm

Satin Stitch Patterns Only)

When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press

to choose from 5 automatic length settings,

without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch

length settings.

Creating a Vertical Mirror Image

To create a vertical mirror image, select a stitch

pattern then press .

Creating a Horizontal Mirror

Image

To create a horizontal mirror image, select a stitch

pattern then press .

Sewing a Pattern Continuously

Press to select continuous sewing or single

stitch sewing.

Memo

• If you continue entering stitch patterns after

changing the size, those patterns will also

be sewn in that size.

• You cannot change the size of combined

stitch patterns once the stitch pattern is

entered.

EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-81

Changing Thread Density

(for Satin Stitch Patterns Only)

After selecting a satin stitch pattern, press to

select your preferred thread density.

Returning to the Beginning of the

Pattern

When sewing character/decorative stitches, you

can return to the beginning of the pattern after trial

sewing or when the stitching is sewn incorrectly.

aPress the “Start/Stop” button to stop the

machine, and then press .

→Sewing returns to the beginning of the selected

pattern (“W”) from the point where sewing was

stopped.

bPress the “Start/Stop” button to continue

sewing.

Memo

• To finish a complete motif while sewing the

pattern continuously, you can press the

key while sewing. The machine will

automatically stop when the motif is

finished.

CAUTION

• If the stitches bunch when thread density is

changed to , return the thread density to

. If you continue sewing when the stitches

are bunched, the needle may bend or break.

Memo

• Even if you select a new pattern after

changing the thread density, the thread

density remains the same until you change

it.

• You cannot change thread density for a

combined pattern after additional patterns

are added.

Memo

• If this key is pressed when sewing is

stopped, patterns can be added at the end

of a combined stitch pattern. (In this

example, “!” is added.)

EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

S-82

Checking the Image

You can display an approximate size image of the

selected stitch pattern. You can also check and

change the colors of the image on the screen.

aPress .

→An image of the selected pattern is displayed.

bPress to change the thread color in

the image to red, blue, or black.

→The color changes every time you press the button.

cPress to display the enlarged image.

dUse / / / to view any part of

the image that extends out of the viewable

display area.

ePress to return to the original screen.

Memo

• You can also sew from this screen when the

presser foot symbol is displayed.

• Image of some patterns will display in

default size only.

COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-83

You can combine many varieties of stitch patterns, such as character stitches, cross stitches, satin stitches,

or stitches you design with “MY CUSTOM STITCH” function (see page S-96 for information about “MY

CUSTOM STITCH”). You can also combine stitch patterns of different sizes, mirror image stitch patterns,

and others.

Before Combining

Single stitch sewing is automatically selected for sewing combined patterns. If you want to sew the

pattern continuously, press after finishing the stitch pattern combination.

When changing sizes, creating mirror images, or making other adjustments to a combined stitch pattern,

be sure to edit the selected stitch pattern before selecting the next one. You cannot edit a stitch pattern

once the next stitch pattern is selected.

Combining Various Stitch

Patterns

Example:

aPress .

bSelect .

cPress .

→The display returns to the stitch selection screen.

dPress .

COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

S-84

eSelect .

fPress to sew the pattern continuously.

gPress .

Combining Large and Small

Stitch Patterns

Example:

aPress .

→The large size stitch will be selected.

bPress again, then press to select

the small size.

→The pattern is displayed in a smaller size.

cPress to sew continuously.

→The entered pattern is repeated.

Memo

• Patterns are deleted individually starting

with the last pattern entered by pressing

COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-85

Combining Horizontal Mirror

Image Stitch Patterns

Example:

aPress .

bPress again, then press .

→The pattern is flipped along a vertical axis.

cPress .

→The entered pattern is repeated.

Combining Stitch Patterns of

Different Length

Example:

aPress , then press once.

→ The length of the image is set to .

bSelect again, then press 3 times.

→The length of the image is set to .

COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

S-86

cPress .

→The entered pattern is repeated.

Making Step Stitch Patterns (for

7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)

You can use the keys with 7mm satin

stitch patterns to create a step effect.

Stitch patterns sewn so that they create a step

effect are called step stitch patterns.

* Press to move the stitch pattern a distance

equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the left.

* Press to move the stitch pattern a distance

equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the right.

Example:

aPress .

bPress .

→The next stitch pattern will move to the right.

cPress again.

dPress .

→The next stitch pattern will move to the left.

COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-87

ePress .

→The entered pattern is repeated.

■More Examples

Press → → → → .

Press → → → → →

→ → → .

Press → → → .

Press → → → → →

→ → → .

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

S-88

Stitch Data Precautions

Observe the following precautions when using stitch data other than that created and saved in this

machine.

■Types of Stitch Data that can be Used

• In the Character/Decorative Stitch memory, “.pmv”, “.pmx” and “.pmu” stitch data files can be used with this

machine. “.pmu” stitch data files can be retrieved; however, when the machine is used to save the file, it is

saved as a “.pmv” stitch data file. Using data other than that created using this machine or the machine which

create “.pmu” data file, may cause the machine to malfunction.

■Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used

Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB external media. Use external media that meets the following

specifications.

• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)

• USB Floppy disk drive

Stitch data can be recalled only from;

• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives

You can also use the following types of media with the USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.

• Secure Digital (SD) Card

• CompactFlash

• Memory Stick

•Smart Media

• Multi Media Card (MMC)

• xD-Picture Card

• To create file folders, use a computer.

■Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be

Used

• Compatible models:

IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment

IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment

• Compatible operating systems:

Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7

■Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data

• If the name of the stitch data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains special

characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We recommend

using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9, “-”, and “_”.

• Stitch data in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.

• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If stitch data is stored in a folder in “Removable

Disk”, that stitch data cannot be retrieved by the machine.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Note

• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.

• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB Devices/Media, and it will take about 5 to 6

seconds to recognize the Devices/Media. (Time will differ depending on the USB Device/Media).

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-89

Saving Stitch Patterns in the

Machine’s Memory

You can save often used stitch patterns in the

machine’s memory. A total of about 1 MB of stitch

patterns can be saved in the machine’s memory.

aPress .

bPress .

* Press to return to the original screen without

saving.

→The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern

is saved, the display returns to the original screen

automatically.

■If the Memory is Full

If the following screen appears while you are trying

to save a pattern on the machine’s memory, the

memory is too full to hold the currently selected

stitch pattern. To save the stitch pattern in the

machine’s memory, you have to delete a previously

saved stitch pattern.

aPress .

* Press to return to the original screen without

saving.

bChoose a stitch pattern to delete.

* Press if you decide not to delete the stitch

pattern.

aPockets holding saved stitch patterns

Note

• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the

“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose

the stitch pattern you are saving.

Memo

• It takes a few seconds to save a stitch

pattern.

• See page S-92 for information on retrieving

a saved stitch pattern.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

S-90

cPress .

→A confirmation message appears.

dPress .

* If you decide not to delete the stitch pattern, press

→The machine deletes the stitch pattern, then

automatically saves the new stitch pattern.

Saving Stitch Patterns to USB

Media

When sending stitch patterns from the machine to

USB media, plug the USB media into the

machine’s top USB port.

aPress .

Memo

• USB media is commercially available, but

some USB media may not be usable with

this machine. Please visit our website for

more details.

• Depending on the type of USB media being

used, either directly plug the USB device

into the machine’s USB port or plug the

USB media Reader/Writer into the

machine’s USB port.

• The USB media can be inserted or removed

at any time except when saving or deleting.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-91

bInsert the USB media into the USB port on

the machine.

aUSB port

bUSB media

cPress .

* Press to return to the original screen without

saving.

→The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern

is saved, the display returns to the original screen

automatically.

Saving Stitch Patterns in the

Computer

Using the included USB cable, the machine can

be connected to your computer, and the stitch

patterns can be temporarily retrieved from and

saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in your

computer. A total of about 3 MB of stitch patterns

can be saved in the “Removable Disk”, but the

saved stitch patterns are deleted when the

machine is turned OFF.

aPlug the USB cable connector into the

corresponding USB ports for the computer

and for the machine.

bTurn on your computer and select

“Computer (My computer)”.

* The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports

on the computer and machine whether or not they

are turned on.

aUSB port for computer

bUSB cable connector

→The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in

“Computer (My computer)” on the computer.

Note

• The processing speed may vary by quantity

of data.

• Two USB media cannot be used with this

machine at the same time. If two USB

media are inserted, only the USB media

inserted first is detected.

Note

• Do not insert or remove USB media while

“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose

some or all of the pattern you are saving.

Note

• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the

“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose

the stitch pattern you are saving.

Note

• The connectors on the USB cable can only

be inserted into a port in one direction. If it

is difficult to insert the connector, do not

insert it with force and check the orientation

of the connector.

• For details on the position of the USB port

on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the

instruction manual for the corresponding

equipment.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

S-92

cPress .

dPress .

* Press to return to the original screen without

saving.

→The stitch pattern will be temporarily saved to

“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My

computer)”.

eSelect the stitch pattern’s .pmv file and

copy the file to the computer.

Retrieving Stitch Patterns from

the Machine’s Memory

aPress .

→The pocket selection screen appears.

bChoose a stitch pattern to retrieve.

* If the entire saved stitch pattern is not displayed,

press the thumbnail.

* Press to return to the original screen without

saving.

aSaved stitch patterns

cPress .

* Press to delete the stitch pattern.

→The selected stitch pattern is retrieved and the

sewing screen will be displayed.

Note

• Do not turn off the machine while the

“Saving” screen is showing. You may lose

the data.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-93

Recalling from USB Media

You can recall a specific stitch pattern from either

direct USB media or a folder in the USB media. If

the stitch pattern is in a folder, check each folder

to find the stitch pattern.

aInsert the USB Media into the USB port on

the machine (see page S-90).

aUSB port

bUSB media

bPress .

→Stitch patterns and a folder in a top folder are

displayed.

cPress when there is a subfolder to

sort two or more stitch patterns to USB

media, the stitch pattern in the subfolder is

displayed.

* Press to return to the original screen without

recalling.

→Stitch patterns and a subfolder within a folder are

displayed. Select the folder to display the patterns in

it.

aFolder name

bStitch patterns in a folder show only the first

pattern of any combined patterns.

cPath

* Press to return to the previous folder.

* Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot

be created with the machine.

dPress the key of the stitch pattern you want

to recall.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

S-94

ePress .

* Press to delete the stitch pattern. The pattern

will be deleted from the USB media.

→The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing

screen will be displayed.

Recalling from the Computer

aPlug the USB cable connector into the

corresponding USB ports for the computer

and for the machine (see page S-91).

bOn the computer, open “Computer (My

computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.

cMove/copy the pattern data to “Removable

Disk”.

→Stitch pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to

the machine.

dPress .

→The stitch patterns in the computer are displayed on

the selection screen.

ePress the key of the stitch pattern you want

to recall.

* Press to return to the original screen without

recalling.

Note

• While data is being written, do not

disconnect the USB cable.

• Do not create folders within “Removable

Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch

pattern data within folders cannot be

recalled.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Character/Decorative Stitches

Sewing S-95

fPress .

* Press to delete the stitch pattern.

The pattern will be deleted from the “Removable

Disk” folder in your computer.

→The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing

screen will be displayed.

Note

• The pattern recalled from the computer is

only temporarily written to the machine. It is

erased from the machine when the machine

is turned off. If you wish to keep the stitch

pattern, store it in the machine (“Saving

Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory”

on page S-89).

Chapter 4

SSewing

MY CUSTOM STITCH

DESIGNING A STITCH............................................97

ENTERING STITCH DATA .......................................99

■Key Functions........................................................................... 99

■Moving a Point ...................................................................... 101

■Moving Part or All of the Design ........................................... 102

■Inserting New Points ............................................................. 103

USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES....................104

Storing Custom Stitches in Your List .......................................104

■If the Memory is Full ............................................................. 104

Retrieving Stored Stitches .......................................................105

DESIGNING A STITCH

MY CUSTOM STITCH

Sewing S-97

By using the “MY CUSTOM STITCH” function,

you can register stitches you have created yourself.

You can also sew designs combining “MY

CUSTOM STITCH” creations with built-in

characters (see page S-83).

aDraw the stitch design on the grid sheet

(part code SA507, GS3:X81277-151).

bDecide the spacing of the stitch.

* By adjusting the spacing of a stitch, you can create

various patterns with one stitch.

cPlace points where the pattern intersects

with the grid, and connect all the points

with a line.

dDetermine the x and y coordinates of each

of the marked points.

DESIGNING A STITCH

Memo

• Stitches that you create with “MY CUSTOM

STITCH” can be a maximum of 7 mm

(approx. 9/32 inch) wide and 37 mm

(approx. 1-1/3 inches) long.

• Stitches can be designed more easily with

“MY CUSTOM STITCH” if you first draw the

stitch on the included grid sheet.

Memo

• Simplify the design so that it can be sewn

as a continuous line. For a more attractive

stitch, close the design by intersecting lines.

If the design is to be repeated and linked,

the start point and end point of the design

should be at the same height.

Memo

• This will determine the stitch design that will

be sewn.

DESIGNING A STITCH

S-98

Examples of Custom Stitches

Stitch 123456789101112131415

01218222321171412963136

003610131413111314131063

Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

12 41 43 40 41 38 35 32 30 32 35 41 45 47 44

00471113141310630047

Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45

45 47 50 54 56 55 51 45 70

11131413106300

Stitch 123456789101112131415

0 3032323233353537353230302926

0017101211812141411538

Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

24 18 13 12 13 10 12 8 12 7 12 6 10 5 10

1013141412111098663202

Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45

16 19 23 22 17 22 23 19 42

1006106000

Stitch 123456789101112131415

03581217202427293132302724

0581113141413121196310

Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

21 18 16 15 15 16 18 21 25 28 33 37 41 43 44

0135810121314141311850

Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45

Stitch 123456789101112131415

05458781111111611740

773770773773037

Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

4 7 11 16 21 20 21 24 23 24 27 27 27 32 27

11 14 11 7 7 11 7 7 14 7 7 11 7 7 11

Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45

23 20 16 20 23 27 32

141173037

ENTERING STITCH DATA

MY CUSTOM STITCH

Sewing S-99

■Key Functions

aThis area displays the stitch being created.

bDisplays the number of the present set point over the total number of points in the stitch.

cDisplays the y-coordinate of over the x-coordinate of .

ENTERING STITCH DATA

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page

dSingle/triple stitching

key

Press this key to select whether one or three stitches will be sewn

between two points.

S-100

ePoint delete key Press this key to delete a selected point. S-101

fReturn key Press this key to exit the entering stitch data screen. —

gTest key Press this key to sew a test of the stitch. S-101,

S-104

h“MY CUSTOM STITCH”

memory key

Press this key to store the stitch being created. S-104

iBlock move key Press this key to group points together and move them together. S-102

jInsert key Press this key to insert new points on the stitch design. S-103

kSet key Press this key to set a point on the stitch design. S-100 to

S-102

lArrow keys Use these keys to move over the display area. S-100 to

S-103

mPoint-to-point key Use these keys to move from point to point on the stitch, or to

the first or last point entered on the stitch.

S-101 to

S-103

nImage key Press this key to view an image of the stitch. S-101

oGrid direction key Press this key to change the direction of the grid sheet. S-100

pEnlarger key Press this key to see an enlarged version of the stitch being created. S-100

ENTERING STITCH DATA

S-100

aPress .

bPress .

cUse to move to the coordinates

of the first point on the grid sheet.

* Press to change the direction of the grid

sheet.

* Press to enlarge the image of the stitch being

created.

aCurrently selected point/Total number of points

bCoordinates of

dPress to add the point indicated by .

* To insert coordinates with the touch pen, move the

tip of the pen to a desired point. Once you release

the pen from the screen a point will be entered into

the graph at those coordinates. The number of the

currently selected points along with the total

number of points will be displayed.

eSelect whether one stitch or three stitches

will be sewn between the first two points.

* To sew three stitches, press the key so that it appears

as .

ENTERING STITCH DATA

MY CUSTOM STITCH

Sewing S-101

fUse to move to the second point

and press .

gRepeat the steps above for each point that

you have drawn on the grid sheet until the

stitch design is drawn on the screen as a

continuous line.

* Press to delete a selected point entered.

* Press to sew a test-run of the stitch.

* Press to return to the original screen.

* Press to view an image of the stitch.

■Moving a Point

aPress or to move to the point

that you want to move.

* To move to the first point, press .

* To move to the last point, press .

* You can also move by using the touch pen.

Memo

• If you have entered points that are too close

together, the fabric may not feed properly.

Edit the stitch data to leave a larger space

between points.

• If the stitch design is to be repeated and

linked, make sure that linking stitches are

added so that the stitch designs will not

overlap.

aLinking stitches

• You can touch on the grid sheet to set the

point, or you can also use a USB mouse.

ENTERING STITCH DATA

S-102

bUse to move the point.

■Moving Part or All of the Design

aPress or to move to the first

point of the section that you want to move.

* To move to the first point, press .

* To move to the last point, press .

* You can also move by using the touch pen.

bPress .

→The selected point and all points that were entered

after it are selected.

cPress or to move the section.

ENTERING STITCH DATA

MY CUSTOM STITCH

Sewing S-103

dPress .

→The section will be moved.

■Inserting New Points

aPress or to move to a place on

the design where you want to add a new

point.

* To move to the first point, press .

* To move to the last point, press .

* You can also move by using the touch pen.

bPress .

→A new point is entered and moves to it.

cUse to move the point.

USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES

S-104

Storing Custom Stitches in Your

List

Stitch patterns created using the “MY CUSTOM

STITCH” function can be stored for later use. Once

you finish entering the stitch data, press .

The “Saving” message appears and the stitch will

be stored.

Before storing a stitch, press to sew a

test-run of the stitch.

■If the Memory is Full

If the following message appears after is

pressed, the stitch pattern cannot be stored because

either the machine’s memory is full or the stitch

pattern being stored is larger than the amount of

space available in the memory. To be able to store

the stitch pattern in the machine’s memory, a

previously stored stitch pattern must be deleted.

USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES

Memo

• Storing a stitch pattern takes a few

seconds.

• For details on retrieving a stored stitch

pattern, see page S-105.

Note

• Do not turn off the machine while the

“Saving” message is displayed, otherwise

the stitch pattern data being saved may be

lost.

Note

• To save custom stitches to USB media or in

the computer, follow the previously

described procedure to store the custom

stitch, and then press to select the

stitch (see the following “Retrieving Stored

Stitches” section). Press to save the

stitch to USB media or in the computer. (For

details, “Saving Stitch Patterns to USB

Media” on page S-90 or “Saving Stitch

Patterns in the Computer” on page S-91.)

USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES

MY CUSTOM STITCH

Sewing S-105

Retrieving Stored Stitches

aPress .

→A list of stored stitch patterns is displayed.

bSelect the stitch pattern.

* Press to return to the previous screen without

retrieving.

cPress .

* To delete the stored stitch pattern, press .

* To edit the stored stitch pattern, press .

USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES

S-106

Embroidering

This section provides instruction to embroider designs with this machine.

Page number starts with “E” in this section.

The screen display and machine illustration may vary slightly, depending on the countries or regions.

Chapter1 Embroidery ............................................................. E-2

Chapter2 Embroidery Edit .................................................... E-56

Chapter 1

EEmbroidering

Embroidery

SELECTING PATTERNS ..............................................3

■Copyright Information .............................................................. 3

Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Brother “Exclusives”/Floral

Alphabet/Bobbin Work Patterns .................................................4

Selecting Character Patterns.......................................................5

Selecting Frame Patterns............................................................. 7

Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards..................................7

■About Embroidery Card Reader (Sold Separately) and USB Card

Writer Module*.......................................................................... 7

■About Embroidery Cards (Sold Separately) ............................... 7

Selecting Patterns from USB Media/Computer ...........................8

VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN ................. 9

■Key Functions........................................................................... 10

PREPARING THE FABRIC ........................................11

Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric ...............11

Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame ..........................13

■Types of Embroidery Frames .................................................... 13

■Inserting the Fabric .................................................................. 14

■Using the Embroidery Sheet .................................................... 15

Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges ............................16

■Embroidering Small Fabrics...................................................... 16

■Embroidering Edges or Corners................................................ 16

■Embroidering Ribbons or Tape................................................. 16

ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME ................17

■Removing the Embroidery Frame ............................................. 17

CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION ...............19

Checking the Pattern Position ..................................................19

Previewing the Completed Pattern ..........................................20

SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN..................... 21

Embroidery Attractive Finishes ................................................21

■Embroidery Needle Plate Cover .............................................. 22

Sewing Embroidery Patterns .....................................................22

Sewing Embroidery Patterns Which Use Appliqué ...................23

ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY

PROCESS..................................................................26

If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread ............................................26

If the Thread Breaks During Sewing .........................................27

Restarting from the Beginning ..................................................28

Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power..................28

MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS.................30

Adjusting Thread Tension .........................................................30

■Correct Thread Tension ........................................................... 30

■Upper Thread is Too Tight ....................................................... 30

■Upper Thread is Too Loose ...................................................... 30

Adjusting the Bobbin Case (with No Color on the Screw) ........31

■Correct Tension ....................................................................... 31

■Bobbin Thread is Too Loose ..................................................... 31

■Bobbin Thread is Too Tight ...................................................... 32

Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function

(END COLOR TRIM).................................................................32

Using the Thread Trimming Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)

......32

■Selecting the Length of Jump Stitch Not to Trim...................... 33

Adjusting the Embroidery Speed ...............................................33

Changing the Thread Color Display ......................................... 34

Changing the “Embroidery Frame Display”.............................. 35

REVISING THE PATTERN ........................................ 36

Moving the Pattern................................................................... 36

Aligning the Pattern and the Needle ........................................ 36

Changing the Size of the Pattern .............................................. 37

Rotating the Pattern ................................................................. 38

Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ........................................ 39

Enlarging the Editing Screen..................................................... 39

Changing the Density (Alphabet Character and Frame

Patterns Only) ......................................................................... 40

Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns .............. 40

Embroidering Linked Characters .............................................. 41

Uninterrupted Embroidering

(Monochrome - Using a Single Color) ...................................... 43

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION......................... 44

Embroidery Data Precautions................................................... 44

■Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used.............................44

■Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used ........................44

■Computers and Operating Systems with the Following

Specifications can be Used .......................................................44

■

Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data

.......44

■Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data..................................................45

Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ............ 45

■If the Memory is Full.................................................................45

Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media............................... 46

Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer........................... 47

Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory .................... 48

Recalling from USB Media ....................................................... 49

Recalling from the Computer ................................................... 50

EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS................................ 51

Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1)....................... 51

Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2)....................... 52

Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns............................................. 53

SELECTING PATTERNS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-3

■Copyright Information

The patterns stored in the machine and embroidery cards are intended for private use only. Any public or

commercial use of copyrighted patterns is an infringement of copyright law and is strictly prohibited.

There are many character and decorative embroidery patterns stored in the machine’s memory (see the “Quick

Reference Guide” for a full summary of patterns in the machine’s memory). You can also use patterns from the

embroidery cards (sold separately).

Once the machine has finished the initialization and the carriage has moved to the start position, the pattern type

selection screen will display.

If another screen is displayed, press , then to display the screen below.

There are 6 categories of patterns in this machine.

aEmbroidery patterns

bBrother “Exclusives”

cFloral alphabet patterns

dFrame patterns

eCharacter patterns

fBobbin work patterns (see “Appendix”)

gPatterns saved in the machine’s memory (see

page E-48)

hPatterns saved in USB media (see page E-49)

iPatterns saved on the computer (see page E-50)

jPress this key to position the embroidery unit for

storage

SELECTING PATTERNS

Memo

• A key that appears stacked, such as

and , indicates that

there are sub-categories, which must be

selected before a pattern selection screen

appears.

SELECTING PATTERNS

E-4

Selecting Embroidery

Patterns/Brother

“Exclusives”/Floral

Alphabet/Bobbin Work Patterns

aTouch the key of the category of the pattern

you want to embroider.

* Refer to “How to Create Bobbin Work” of

“Appendix” about the bobbin work patterns.

bPress the key of the pattern you want to

embroider.

* Press to view the next page.

* Press to view the previous page.

→The selected pattern is displayed.

cPress to create a mirror image of the

pattern as needed.

* If a mistake has been made when selecting the

pattern, press the key of the pattern you want to

embroider and the new selection appears.

d Press .

→The embroidery screen is displayed.

eProceed to “VIEWING THE

EMBROIDERING SCREEN” on page E-9 to

embroider the pattern.

* To return to the previous screen to select another

pattern, press .

SELECTING PATTERNS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-5

Selecting Character Patterns

Example: Entering “We Fly”.

aPress .

bPress the key of the font you want to

embroider.

cPress to change the selection screens.

dPress and then enter “W”.

* If you want to change the size of a character, select

the character and then press to change the

size. The size changes each time you press the key,

from large to medium to small.

* If you make a mistake, press to erase the

mistake.

* If the pattern is too small to see clearly, you can use

the key to check it.

ePress and enter “e”.

fPress to enter a space.

Memo

• If you continue adding characters after

changing the size, the new characters will

be entered in the new size.

• You cannot change the size of the entered

characters after combining character stitch

patterns.

SELECTING PATTERNS

E-6

gPress again and enter “F”.

hPress and then enter “ly”.

iPress .

→The embroidery screen is displayed.

jProceed to “VIEWING THE

EMBROIDERING SCREEN” on page E-9 to

embroider the pattern.

* To return to the previous screen to select another

pattern, press .

SELECTING PATTERNS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-7

Selecting Frame Patterns

aPress .

bPress the key of the frame shape you want

to embroider in the top part of the screen.

aFrame shapes

bFrame patterns

→Various frame patterns are displayed at the bottom

part of the screen.

cPress the key of the frame pattern you want

to embroider.

* If you make a mistake selecting the pattern, press the

key of the pattern you want to embroider.

→The selected pattern is displayed on the screen.

dPress .

→The embroidery screen is displayed.

eProceed to “VIEWING THE

EMBROIDERING SCREEN” on page E-9 to

embroider the pattern.

* To return to the previous screen to select another

pattern, press .

Selecting Patterns from

Embroidery Cards

■About Embroidery Card Reader

(Sold Separately) and USB Card

Writer Module*

• Use only an embroidery card Reader designed

for this machine. Using an unauthorized

embroidery card Reader may cause your

machine to operate incorrectly.

* If you have purchased the PE-DESIGN Ver5 or later,

PE-DESIGN NEXT, PE-DESIGN Lite, PED-BASIC or

PE-DESIGN PLUS, you can plug the included USB

card writer module into the machine as an

embroidery card reader, and recall patterns.

■About Embroidery Cards

(Sold Separately)

• Use only embroidery cards manufactured for this

machine. Using unauthorized cards may cause

your machine to operate incorrectly.

• Embroidery cards sold in foreign countries

cannot be used with this machine.

• Store embroidery cards in the hard case.

Note

• Embroidery patterns cannot be saved from

the machine to an embroidery card inserted

into a connected USB card writer module*.

SELECTING PATTERNS

E-8

aPlug the optional embroidery card

Reader/USB card writer module into the

USB port on the machine.

aUSB port

bEmbroidery card Reader/USB card writer module

bInsert the card completely into the card

Reader/USB card writer module.

* Insert the embroidery card so that the end with a

printed arrow is facing up.

cPress the key of the USB port.

→The patterns on the embroidery card are displayed

on the selection screen.

dFollow the steps on page E-4 to select a

pattern.

Selecting Patterns from USB

Media/Computer

To recall patterns from the computer or USB

media, see pages E-49 to E-50.

Note

• Two embroidery USB card Readers/USB

card writer module cannot be used with this

machine at the same time. If two

embroidery USB card Readers/USB card

writer module are inserted, only the

embroidery USB card Reader/USB card

writer module inserted first is detected.

VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN

Embroidery

Embroidering E-9

aShows the presser foot code.

Attach embroidery foot “W+” or “W” for all embroidery projects. When the foot presser symbol is displayed on the

screen, you are able to sew.

bShows the boundary for embroidering with the extra large frame (30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches)).

cShows a preview of the selected pattern.

dShows the size of the selected pattern.

eShows the embroidery frames that can be used for the selected pattern. Be sure to use the proper frame (see page

E-13).

fShows how far the sewing position is from the center (when you move the sewing position).

gShows the degree of rotation of the pattern.

hShows how many stitches are in the selected pattern and how many stitches have been sewn so far.

iShows the time necessary to sew the pattern, and the time already spent sewing the pattern (not including time for

changing and automatically trimming the thread).

jShows the number of colors in the selected pattern, and the number of the color currently being sewn.

kShows the part of the embroidery that will be sewn with the first thread color.

lShows the order for thread color changes and the embroidering time for each thread color.

* The displayed time is the approximate time that will be required. The actual embroidering time may be longer than the

displayed time, depending on the embroidery frame that is used. In addition, the amount of time required to change

thread colors is not included.

VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN

Note

• There is an explanation of additional key functions on the next page.

h i

VIEWING THE EMBROIDERING SCREEN

E-10

■Key Functions

Using these keys, you can change the size of the pattern, rotate the pattern, etc.

Note

• Some operations or functions are not

available for certain patterns. If the key

display is light gray, you cannot use that

function or operation with the selected

pattern.

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page

mArrow keys

( Center key)

Press an arrow key to move the pattern in the direction shown by the arrow.

(Press the Center key to return the pattern to the center of the embroidery

area.)

E-36

nRotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, 10

degrees or 90 degrees at a time.

E-38

oSize key Press this key to change the size of the pattern. E-37

pMulti color key Press this key to change the color of each letter when sewing alphabet

character patterns.

E-40

qReturn key Press this key to return to the pattern type selection screen. —

rCut/Tension key Press this key to specify automatic thread cutting, thread trimming or the

thread tension. For embroidery, these functions are set automatically.

E-32 to

E-32

sForward/Back key Press this key to move the needle forward or back in the pattern; useful if the

thread breaks while sewing or if you want to start again from the beginning.

E-27 to

E-29

tTrial key Press this key to check the position of the pattern.The embroidery frame moves

to the desired position so you can check that there is enough space to sew the

pattern.

E-19

uStarting point key Press this key to move the needle start position to align the needle with the

pattern position.

E-36

vMemory key Press this key to save a pattern in the machine’s memory, USB media or a

computer.

E-45 to

E-47

wUninterrupted

embroidery key

Press this key to embroider the selected pattern with a single color. E-43

xDensity key Press this key to change the density of alphabet character or frame patterns. E-40

yHorizontal mirror

image key

Press this key to create a horizontal mirror image of the pattern. E-39

zFunction page key Press this key to show all the keys in this screen. E-40

QImage key Press this key for a preview of the sewn image. E-20

PREPARING THE FABRIC

Embroidery

Embroidering E-11

Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers

(Backing) to the Fabric

For best results in your embroidery projects,

always use stabilizer material for embroidery.

Follow the package instructions for the stabilizer

being used.

When using fabrics that cannot be ironed (such as

towel or fabrics that have loops which expand

when ironed) or in places where ironing is

difficult, position the stabilizer material under the

fabric without fusing it, then position the fabric

and stabilizer in the embroidery frame, or check

with your authorized dealer for the correct

stabilizer to use.

aUse a piece of stabilizer which is larger

than the embroidery frame being used.

aSize of the embroidery frame

bIron-on stabilizer (backing)

PREPARING THE FABRIC

CAUTION

• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3 mm

(approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle to break.

• When using layers with thicker batting etc., you can sew more attractive embroidery by adjusting the

embroidery presser foot height in the embroidery settings screen (see below).

• In the case of thick terry cloth towels we recommend that you place a piece of water soluble stabilizer on

the top surface of the towel. This will help to reduce the nap of the toweling and result in more attractive

embroidery.

Note

• Press . In the “Embroidery Foot

Height” display, use and in the

settings screen. Adjust the presser foot

height for thick or puffy fabrics.

• To increase the space between the presser

foot and the needle plate, set the

embroidery foot height to a larger number,

1.5 mm setting is used for most

embroidery.

CAUTION

• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery

when sewing stretch fabrics, lightweight

fabrics, fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics

which cause pattern shrinkage. Otherwise, the

needle may break and cause injury. Not using

a stabilizer material may result in a poor finish

to your project.

PREPARING THE FABRIC

E-12

bIron the iron-on stabilizer material to the

wrong side of the fabric.

aFusible side of stabilizer

bFabric (wrong side)

Memo

• When embroidering on thin fabrics such as

organdy or lawn, or on napped fabrics such

as towel or corduroy, use water soluble

stabilizer (sold separately) for best results.

The water soluble stabilizer material will

dissolve completely in water, giving the

project a more attractive finish.

PREPARING THE FABRIC

Embroidery

Embroidering E-13

Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame

■Types of Embroidery Frames

The types and numbers of supplied embroidery frame are differs depending on the countries and regions.

Other optional embroidery frames can be used. When choosing frames that do not appear on the screen, be sure

to check the design size of the embroidery field of the optional frame. Check with your authorized dealer for

frame compatibility.

Select a frame that matches the pattern size. Included frame options are displayed on the LCD.

aHighlighted: Can be used

bShaded: Cannot be used

Extra Large Large Medium

Embroidery field

30 cm × 18 cm

(approx. 12 inches × 7 inches)

Embroidery field

18 cm × 13 cm

(approx. 7 inches × 5 inches)

Embroidery field

10 cm × 10 cm

(approx. 4 inches × 4 inches)

Use when embroidering

connected or combined

characters or patterns, or when

embroidering large patterns.

Use when embroidering patterns

between 10 cm × 10 cm (approx.

4 inches × 4 inches) and

18 cm × 13 cm (approx. 7 inches

× 5 inches).

Use when embroidering patterns

under 10 cm × 10 cm

(approx. 4 inches × 4 inches).

CAUTION

• If you use a frame that is too small, the presser foot may strike the frame during sewing and cause injury.

PREPARING THE FABRIC

E-14

■Inserting the Fabric

aLift-up and loosen the frame adjustment

screw and remove the inner frame.

aFrame adjustment screw

bInner frame

bLay the fabric right side up on top of the

outer frame.

Re-insert the inner frame making sure to align the

inner frame’s with the outer frame’s .

aInner frame’s

bOuter frame’s

cFrame adjustment screw

cSlightly tighten the frame adjustment screw,

and then remove the slack in the fabric by

pulling on the edges and corners. Do not

loosen the screw.

dGently stretch the fabric taut, and tighten

the frame adjustment screw to keep the

fabric from loosening after stretching.

* After stretching the fabric, make sure the fabric is

taut.

* Make sure the inside and outside frames are even

before you start embroidering.

aOuter frame

bInner frame

cFabric

Note

• If the fabric is not securely held in the

embroidery frame, the embroidery design

will sew out poorly. Insert the fabric on a

level surface, and gently stretch the fabric

taut in the frame. Follow the steps below to

insert the fabric correctly.

Memo

• Stretch the fabric from all four corners and

all four edges. While stretching the fabric,

tighten the frame adjustment screw.

PREPARING THE FABRIC

Embroidery

Embroidering E-15

eReturn the frame adjustment screw to its

initial position.

■Using the Embroidery Sheet

When you want to embroider the pattern in a

particular place, use the embroidery sheet with the

frame.

aWith a chalk pencil, mark the area of the

fabric you want to embroider.

aEmbroidery pattern

bMark

bPlace the embroidery sheet on the inner

frame. Align the guide lines on the

embroidery sheet with the mark you made

on the fabric.

aInner frame

bGuide line

cGently stretch the fabric so there are no

folds or wrinkles, and press the inner frame

into the outer frame.

aInner frame

bOuter frame

dRemove the embroidery sheet.

Memo

• You can use the included screwdriver when

you loosen or tighten the frame adjustment

screw.

PREPARING THE FABRIC

E-16

Embroidering Small Fabrics or

Fabric Edges

Use an embroidery stabilizer to provide extra

support. After embroidering, remove the stabilizer

carefully. Attach the stabilizer as shown in the

following examples. We recommend using a

stabilizer for embroidery.

■Embroidering Small Fabrics

Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small

piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.

If you do not wish to use a temporary spray

adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.

aFabric

bStabilizer

■Embroidering Edges or Corners

Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small

piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.

If you do not wish to use a temporary spray

adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.

aFabric

bStabilizer

■Embroidering Ribbons or Tape

Secure with double-sided tape or a temporary spray

adhesive.

aRibbon or tape

bStabilizer

ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME

Embroidery

Embroidering E-17

aPress the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to

raise the presser foot.

bAlign the embroidery frame guide with the

right edge of the embroidery frame holder.

aEmbroidery frame holder

bEmbroidery frame guide

cSlide the embroidery frame into the holder,

making sure to align the embroidery frame’s

with the holder’s .

aArrow mark

dLower the frame-securing lever to be level

with the frame to secure the embroidery

frame in the embroidery frame holder.

aFrame-securing lever

■Removing the Embroidery Frame

aRaise the frame-securing lever.

ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME

Note

• Wind and insert the bobbin before attaching the embroidery frame.

CAUTION

• If the frame-securing lever is not lowered, the

following message appears. You cannot start

sewing until you lower the frame-securing

lever.

ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME

E-18

bPull the embroidery frame toward you.

CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION

Embroidery

Embroidering E-19

The pattern is normally positioned in the center of the embroidery frame. If the pattern needs to be

repositioned for better placement on the garment, you can check the layout before starting embroidery.

Checking the Pattern Position

The embroidery frame moves and shows the

pattern position. Watch the frame closely to make

sure the pattern will be sewn in the right place.

aPress .

→The following screen is displayed.

bFrom , press the key for the position

that you want to check.

aSelected position

→The needle will move to the selected position on the

pattern.

cPress .

CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION

Memo

• To see the entire embroidering area, press

. The embroidery frame moves and

shows the embroidery area.

CAUTION

• Make sure the needle is up when the

embroidery frame is moving. If the needle is

down, it could break and result in injury.

CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION

E-20

Previewing the Completed

Pattern

aPress .

→An image of the pattern as it will be embroidered

appears.

bPress to select the frame

used in the preview.

* Frames displayed in light gray cannot be selected.

* Press to enlarge the image of the pattern.

* The pattern can be sewn as it appears in the

following display.

cPress to return to the original screen.

Memo

• You can begin sewing from this screen by

pressing the “Start/Stop” button.

SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

Embroidery

Embroidering E-21

Embroidery Attractive Finishes

There are many factors that go into beautiful embroidery. Using the appropriate stabilizer (see page E-11)

and hooping the fabric in the frame (see page E-13) are two important factors mentioned earlier. Another

important point is the appropriateness of the needle and thread being used. See the explanation of threads

below.

You can adjust thread tension with the screw on the bobbin case. Included bobbin case varies depending

on the type of machine. See the explanation of bobbin case types below.

SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

Thread Upper thread Use embroidery thread intended for use with this machine.

Other embroidery threads may not yield optimum results.

Bobbin thread Use embroidery bobbin thread intended for use with this machine.

Memo

• If you use threads other than those listed above, the embroidery may not sew out correctly.

Bobbin case (for the embroidery

and sewing machine)

aStandard bobbin case

(green marking on the screw)

Alternate bobbin case

(no color on the screw)

Standard bobbin case (green marking on the screw) originally installed in the machine has a green

marking on the screw. Do not adjust green marked screw.

Alternate bobbin case (no color on the screw) is set with tighter tension for embroidery with

different weights of bobbin threads and a variety of embroidery techniques. This bobbin case is

identified with a dark colored mark on the inside of the bobbin cavity. The screw on this case can

be adjusted if necessary (see page E-31).

Bobbin case (for the embroidery

machine)

aBobbin case (no color on the

screw)

The bobbin case (no color on the screw) is installed in the machine. We recommend using the

included embroidery bobbin thread. The screw on this case can be adjusted if necessary (see page

E-31).

See “Cleaning the Race” of “Appendix” for how to remove the bobbin case.

CAUTION

• When embroidering on large garments (especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do not let the fabric

hang over the table. Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move freely and the embroidery frame may

strike the needle, causing the needle to bend or break and possibly cause injury.

Place the fabric so that it does not hang off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from dragging.

Note

• Before embroidering, check that there is enough thread in the bobbin. If you start to sew your

embroidery project without enough thread in the bobbin, you will need to rewind the bobbin in the

middle of the embroidery pattern.

• Do not leave objects in the range of motion of the embroidery frame. The frame may strike the object

and cause a poor finish to the embroidery pattern.

• When embroidering on large garments (especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do not let the fabric

hang over the table. Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move freely, and the pattern may not turn

out as planned.

SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

E-22

■Embroidery Needle Plate Cover

Under some conditions, based on the type of fabric,

stabilizer, or thread being used, there may be some

looping in the upper thread. In this case, attach the

included embroidery needle plate cover to the

needle plate. Attach the cover by inserting the two

projections on the underside of the cover into the

notches on the needle plate as shown below.

aGroove

bProjection

cNotch

To remove the embroidery needle plate cover, place

your fingernail in the groove and lift the plate out.

Sewing Embroidery Patterns

Example:

aEmbroidery color order

bCursor

aThread the machine with thread for the first

color, pass the thread through the hole in

embroidery foot, pull out some thread to

give it some slack, and then lightly hold the

end of the thread in your left hand.

CAUTION

• Push the embroidery needle plate cover as far

as possible to attach it. If the embroidery

needle plate cover is not securely attached, it

may cause the needle to break.

Note

• Do not use the embroidery needle plate

cover for any applications other than

embroidery.

Memo

• The [+] cursor moves over the pattern,

showing which part of the pattern is being

sewn.

SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

Embroidery

Embroidering E-23

bLower the presser foot, then press the

“Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.

After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop”

button again to stop the machine.

cTrim the excess thread at the end of the

seam. If the end of the seam is under the

presser foot, raise the presser foot, then

trim the excess thread.

dPress the “Start/Stop” button to start

embroidering.

→When the first color is completely sewn, the machine

will automatically trim the threads and stop. The

presser foot will then automatically be raised.

On the embroidery color order display, the next

color will move to the top.

eRemove the thread for the first color from

the machine. Thread the machine with the

next color.

fRepeat the same steps for embroidering the

remaining colors.

→When the last color is sewn, “Finished sewing” will

appear on the display. Press , and the display

will return to the original screen.

Sewing Embroidery Patterns

Which Use Appliqué

There are some patterns which call for an appliqué

inside the pattern. Prepare the base fabric and the

appliqué fabric (appliqué piece).

When sewing an embroidery pattern with an

appliqué, the color sewing order display shows

“APPLIQUE MATERIAL”, “APPLIQUE POSITION”,

“APPLIQUE”, and then the sewing order of the

colors around the appliqué.

Memo

• If there is thread left over from the beginning

of sewing, it may be sewn over as you

continue embroidering the pattern, making

it very difficult to deal with the thread after

the pattern is finished. Trim the threads at

the beginning of each thread change.

Memo

• The Thread Trimming Function is originally

set to trim excess thread jumps (threads

linking parts of the pattern, etc.). Depending

on the type of thread and fabric that are

used, an end of upper thread may remain

on the surface of the fabric at the beginning

of the stitching. After embroidering is

finished, cut off this excess thread.

If the setting has been turned off, trim the

excess thread jumps using scissors after

the pattern is finished.

See page E-32 for information on the thread

trimming function.

Memo

• Depending on the thread color display

setting, the display may show ,

, or .

SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

E-24

aAttach an iron-on stabilizer to the wrong

side of the appliqué material.

aAppliqué material (cotton, felt, etc.)

bIron-on stabilizer

bPlace the appliqué material into the

embroidery frame, and then press the

“Start/Stop” button to sew the outline of

the appliqué.

aOutline of appliqué

bAppliqué material

→The machine will sew around the outline of the

appliqué pieces and will then stop.

cRemove the appliqué material from the

embroidery frame, and then cut carefully

along the stitching. After cutting, remove all

of the stitching thread carefully.

* Carefully cut out the pattern on the outline you just

sewed. Do not cut inside the stitching line, as the

appliqué fabric will not be caught by the appliqué

stitch.

dPlace the base material into the embroidery

frame.

aBase material

ePress the “Start/Stop” button to sew the

position of the appliqué.

* Use the same thread color you plan to use when

attaching the appliqué in step g.

aPosition of appliqué

bBase material

→The machine will sew around the position of the

appliqué and will then stop.

fApply a thin layer of adhesive or spray

adhesive to the back of the appliqué piece

and attach it to the appliqué position so that

it follows the seam of the outline.

Memo

• The embroidery procedure is the same as

the basic procedure explained on

page E-22.

Memo

• If the appliqué material is a lightweight

fabric, you may want to use a fusible web

on the back to stabilize the fabric and for

appliqué placement. Fuse appliqué in place

with an iron.

Do not remove fabric from the frame to iron

the appliqué material.

SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

Embroidery

Embroidering E-25

gPress the “Start/Stop” button.

→The appliqué will then be completed.

hChange the upper thread and then carry out

the rest of the embroidering.

Memo

• Some patterns may not show all three

appliqué steps. Sometimes the

“APPLIQUE” step will be shown as a color.

Memo

• Some glue may get onto the presser foot,

needle, and needle plate at this time. Finish

embroidering the appliqué pattern and then

clean away the glue.

• For best sewing results clip all threads

between color steps.

ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS

E-26

If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread

When the bobbin begins to run out of thread

during embroidering, the machine will stop and

the message below will appear. Press and

follow the directions below to rethread the lower

threading. If very little sewing remains, you can

embroider 10 final stitches without rethreading the

machine by pressing . The machine will stop

after sewing the 10 stitches.

aPress .

→After the thread is automatically cut, the carriage

will move.

bUnlock the frame-securing lever and

remove the embroidery frame.

* Be careful not to apply strong force to the fabric at

this time. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the

frame.

cInsert a wound bobbin into the machine.

(see “Setting the Bobbin” of “Basic

operations”.)

dPress .

→The carriage will return to its original position.

eAttach the embroidery frame.

fTo return to the spot in the pattern where

you stopped sewing, follow steps c

through f in the next section.

ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS

Note

• Be careful not to bump the embroidery unit carriage or the presser foot when removing or attaching

the embroidery frame. Otherwise, the pattern will not embroider correctly.

Note

• If “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” in the

settings screen of the machine setting

mode is set to “OFF”, the message shown

above does not appear.

ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-27

If the Thread Breaks During

Sewing

aPress the “Start/Stop” button to stop the

machine.

bIf the upper thread is broken, redo the

upper threading. If the bobbin thread is

broken, press and follow the

directions in steps a through e from the

previous section to reset the bobbin.

cPress .

dPress , , , or to move

the needle back the correct number of

stitches before the spot where the thread

broke.

* If you cannot move back to the spot where the

thread broke, press to select the color and

move to the beginning position of that color, then

use , , , or to move ahead

to slightly before where the thread broke.

ePress to return to the original screen.

fPress the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to

lower the presser foot, and press the

“Start/Stop” button to continue sewing.

ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS

E-28

Restarting from the Beginning

aPress .

bPress .

→The embroidery frame moves, returning the needle

to the pattern’s beginning position.

cPress the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to

lower the presser foot and start sewing.

Resuming Embroidery After

Turning Off the Power

The current color and stitch number are saved

when embroidery is stopped. The next time the

machine is turned on, you have the option to

continue or delete the pattern.

aCurrent stitch number when embroidery was

stopped

aTurn the main power to ON.

bFollow the instructions shown on the screen

and remove the embroidery frame.

→The following message will appear.

Memo

• Even if the power goes out in the middle of

embroidery, the machine returns to the

point where embroidery was stopped when

the machine is turned on again.

Note

• Do not remove the embroidery unit or the

memory will no longer remember your

design.

ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-29

cAttach the embroidery frame and press

→The previous embroidery screen displayed before

the machine was turned off appears.

dContinue embroidering.

aStitch number when embroidery is resumed

Memo

• If you want to start a new embroidery

pattern, press so the pattern

selection screen appears.

MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

E-30

Adjusting Thread Tension

When embroidering, the thread tension should be

set so that the upper thread can slightly be seen on

the wrong side of the fabric.

■Correct Thread Tension

The pattern can be seen from the wrong side of the

fabric. If the thread tension is not set correctly, the

pattern will not finish well. The fabric may pucker or

the thread may break.

aRight side

bWrong side

Follow the operations described below to adjust

thread tension according to the situation.

■Upper Thread is Too Tight

The tension of the upper thread is too tight, resulting

in the bobbin thread being visible from the right side

of the fabric.

aRight side

bWrong side

aPress .

bPress to weaken the upper thread

tension. (The tension number will

decrease.)

cPress .

■Upper Thread is Too Loose

The tension of the upper thread is too loose,

resulting in a loose upper thread, loose thread locks,

or loops appearing on the right side of the fabric.

aRight side

bWrong side

aPress .

MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

Note

• If the thread tension setting is made

extremely weak, the machine may stop

during sewing. This is not the sign of a

malfunction. Increase the thread tension

slightly, and begin sewing again.

Memo

• If you turn the main power to OFF or select

a different pattern, the thread tension will

reset to the automatic setting.

• When you retrieve a saved pattern, the

thread tension setting will be the same as

when the pattern was saved.

Note

• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly

threaded, the upper thread may be too

tight. In this case, refer to “Setting the

Bobbin” of “Basic operations” and rethread

the bobbin thread.

Note

• If the upper thread was incorrectly

threaded, the upper thread may be too

loose. In this case, refer to “Upper

Threading” of “Basic operations” and

rethread the upper thread.

MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-31

bPress to tighten the upper thread

tension. (The tension number will increase.)

cPress .

Adjusting the Bobbin Case (with

No Color on the Screw)

The bobbin case (with no color on the screw) can

be adjusted when bobbin tension changes are

required to accommodate different bobbin

threads. See “Embroidery Attractive Finishes” on

page E-21.

To adjust the bobbin tension for embroidery

function, using the bobbin case (with no color on

the screw), turn the slotted-head screw (-) with a

(small) screwdriver.

aDo not turn a phillips screw (+).

bAdjust with a screwdriver (small).

■Correct Tension

Upper thread slightly appears on the wrong side of

fabric.

aRight side

bWrong side

■Bobbin Thread is Too Loose

Bobbin thread appears slightly on the right side of

fabric.

aRight side

bWrong side

If this occurs, turn the slotted-head screw (-)

clockwise, being careful not to over-tighten the

screw, approximately 30-45 degrees to increase

bobbin tension.

Note

• With “Embroidery Tension” on the setting

screen, the tension of the upper thread can

be adjusted for embroidering. The selected

setting will be applied to all patterns.

When embroidering, if the overall tension of

the upper thread is too tight or too loose,

adjust it from the setting screen. Press

to tighten the upper thread tension and

press to loosen the upper tension. If an

individual embroidery pattern needs

additional fine tuning, refer to “Adjusting

Thread Tension” on page E-30.

MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

E-32

■Bobbin Thread is Too Tight

Upper thread on the right side of fabric seems to be

lifting/looping and bobbin thread is not seen on the

wrong side of fabric.

aRight side

bWrong side

If this occurs, turn the slotted-head screw (-)

counterclockwise, being careful not to over-loosen

the screw, approximately 30-45 degrees to decrease

bobbin tension.

Using the Automatic Thread

Cutting Function

(END COLOR TRIM)

The automatic thread cutting function will cut

the thread at the end of sewing each color. This

function is initially turned on. To turn this function

off, press key and then . This function can

be turned on or off during embroidering.

* This setting returns to its default

when the machine is turned off.

aPress .

bPress to turn off the automatic thread

cutting function.

→The key will display as

* When one color thread is sewn, the machine will

stop without cutting the thread.

Using the Thread Trimming

Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)

The thread trimming function will

automatically trim any excess thread jumps within

the color. This function is initially turned on. To

turn this function off, press key and then

. This function can be turned on or off during

embroidering.

* Your customized setting remains after turning the

machine off and on.

aJump stitch

CAUTION

• When adjusting the bobbin case, be sure to

remove the bobbin from the bobbin case.

• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)

screw on the bobbin case as this may result in

damage to the bobbin case, rendering it

unusable.

• If the slotted-head screw (-) is difficult to turn,

do not use force. Turning the screw too much

or providing force in either (rotational)

direction may cause damage to the bobbin

case. Should damage occur, the bobbin case

may not maintain proper tension.

MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-33

aPress .

bPress to turn off the thread trimming

function.

→The key will display as

* The machine will not trim the thread before moving

to the next stitching.

■Selecting the Length of Jump Stitch

Not to Trim

When the thread trimming function is turned

on, you can select the length of the jump stitch not

to trim the thread. This function can be turned on or

off during embroidering.

Select a setting from 5 mm to 50 mm in 5 mm

increments.

* Your customized setting remains after turning the

machine off and on.

Press or to select the length of jump stitch.

For example: Press to select 25 mm (1 inch)

and the machine will not trim a jump stitch of 25

mm or less before moving to the next stitching.

Adjusting the Embroidery Speed

aPress .

bIn the “Max Embroidery Speed” display, use

to change the maximum

embroidery speed.

* You can choose from 3 different speed levels, 350

spm, 600 spm or 1050 spm.

Note

• When this function is turned on, use the

included ball point needle 75/11 for

embroidering patterns with short jump

stitches such as alphabet characters. Using

other needles may cause the thread to

break.

Note

• If design has many trims it is recommended

to select a higher jump stitch trim setting in

order to reduce the amount of excess tails

on backside of fabric.

• The higher number of the jump stitch length

selected, the fewer number of times the

machine will trim. In this case, more jump

stitches remain on the surface of the fabric.

MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

E-34

cPress .

Changing the Thread Color

Display

You can display the name of the thread colors or

embroidery thread number.

aPress .

bIn the “Thread Color Display”, use

to display the name of the thread colors or

the embroidery thread number.

cWhen the thread number is

displayed, use to select from six

embroidery thread brands pictured below.

* Depending on the country or area, cotton-like

polyester thread is sold.

dPress .

Memo

• “spm” is the number of stitches sewn in one

minute.

• Decrease the sewing speed when

embroidering on thin, thick, or heavy

fabrics.

• The sewing speed can be changed after an

embroidery has been started.

• The maximum sewing speed setting does

not change until a new setting is selected.

The setting specified before the main power

is set to OFF remains selected the next time

that the machine is turned on.

• Decrease the sewing speed to 600 spm

when using a speciality thread like a

metallic thread.

• While selecting the bobbin work pattern, the

embroidery speed recommendation is set at

“100 spm”; however you can choose from

100 spm, 200 spm, or 350 spm.

Memo

• Colors on the screen may vary slightly from

actual spool colors.

EMBROIDERY / POLYESTER

THREAD#

COUNTRY/COTTON THREAD#*

MADEIRA /POLYESTER

THREAD#

MADEIRA RAYON THREAD#

SULKY THREAD#

ROBISON-ANTON/POLYESTER

THREAD#

#123

MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-35

Changing the “Embroidery Frame

Display”

aPress .

bIn the “Embroidery Frame Display”, use

to change the embroidery frame display

mode.

* There are 16 choices.

* For the optional embroidery frame.

aExtra large frame embroidering area

30 cm × 18 cm (12 inches × 7 inches)

bCenter mark

cLarge frame embroidering area

18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches × 5 inches)

dEmbroidering area for optional border embroidery

frame

18 cm × 10 cm (7 inches × 4 inches)

eEmbroidery area for optional quilt embroidery

frame

15 cm × 15 cm (6 inches × 6 inches)

fMedium frame embroidering area

10 cm × 10 cm (4 inches × 4 inches)

gEmbroidery area for optional small embroidery

frame

2 cm × 6 cm (1 inch × 2-1/2 inches)

hEmbroidery area for optional border embroidery

frame

30 cm x 10 cm (12 inches x 4 inches)

iGrid lines

cPress .

REVISING THE PATTERN

E-36

Moving the Pattern

Use to move the pattern in the direction

shown by the arrow.

Press to center the pattern.

aDistance from the center

The pattern can also be moved by dragging it.

If a USB mouse is connected, move the mouse to

position the pointer on the desired pattern, and

then select and drag the pattern. The pattern can

also be dragged by selecting it directly in the

screen with your finger or the touch pen.

Aligning the Pattern and the

Needle

Example: Aligning the lower left side of a

pattern and the needle

REVISING THE PATTERN

CAUTION

• When you have revised the pattern, check the display of available embroidery frames and use an

appropriate frame. If you use an embroidery frame not displayed as available for use, the presser foot may

strike the frame and possibly cause injury.

Memo

• Patterns cannot be moved in screens where

does not appear.

REVISING THE PATTERN

Embroidery

Embroidering E-37

aMark the embroidery start position on the

fabric, as shown.

bPress .

cPress .

aStart position

bThis key is used for aligning linked characters (see

page E-41).

→The needle position moves to the bottom left corner

of the pattern (the embroidery frame moves so that

the needle is positioned correctly).

dPress .

eUse to align the needle and the mark

on the fabric, and begin embroidering the

pattern.

Changing the Size of the Pattern

aPress .

bSelect the direction in which to change the

size.

* Press to enlarge the pattern proportionately.

* Press to shrink the pattern proportionately.

* Press to stretch the pattern horizontally.

* Press to compact the pattern horizontally.

* Press to stretch the pattern vertically.

* Press to compact the pattern vertically.

* Press to return the pattern to its original

appearance.

REVISING THE PATTERN

E-38

aSize of the pattern

cPress to return to the original screen.

Rotating the Pattern

aPress .

bSelect the angle of rotation for the pattern.

* Press to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the

left.

* Press to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the

right.

* Press to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the

left.

* Press to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the

right.

* Press to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the left.

* Press to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the

right.

* Press to return the pattern to its original

position.

Memo

• Some patterns or characters can be

enlarged more than others.

• Some patterns or characters can be

enlarged to a greater degree if they are

rotated 90 degrees.

• You can change the size of the pattern by

rotating the mouse wheel. Rotate the

mouse wheel away from you to shrink the

pattern. Rotate the mouse wheel toward

you to enlarge the pattern.

REVISING THE PATTERN

Embroidery

Embroidering E-39

aDegree of rotation

cPress to return to the original screen.

Creating a Horizontal Mirror

Image

Press so it appears as to create a

horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern.

Press again to return the pattern to normal.

Enlarging the Editing Screen

Enlarge the editing screen by pressing .

Press to close the enlarged screen.

0°

Memo

• You can rotate the pattern by rotating the

mouse wheel. Rotate the mouse wheel

away from you to rotate the pattern 10

degrees to the left. Rotate the mouse wheel

toward you to rotate the pattern 10 degrees

to the right.

REVISING THE PATTERN

E-40

Changing the Density

(Alphabet Character and Frame

Patterns Only)

The thread density for some alphabet character

and frame patterns can be changed.

A setting between 80% and 120% in 5%

increments can be specified.

aPress .

* Press to display all the function keys on the

screen.

bChange the density.

* Press to make the pattern less dense.

* Press to make the pattern more dense.

aNormal

bFine (stitches closer together)

cCoarse (stitches farther apart)

→The pattern density changes each time you press a

button.

cPress to return to the pattern

selection screen.

Changing the Colors of Alphabet

Character Patterns

Combined alphabet character patterns can be

sewn with each letter in a different color. If

“MULTI COLOR” is set, the machine stops after

each character is sewn so that the thread can be

changed to a different color.

aPress so that it appears as .

* Press to display all the function keys on the

screen.

* Press the key again to return to the original setting.

REVISING THE PATTERN

Embroidery

Embroidering E-41

bAfter a character is sewn, change the thread

color, and then sew the next character.

Embroidering Linked Characters

Follow the procedure described below to

embroider linked characters in a single row when

the entire pattern extends beyond the embroidery

frame.

Example: Linking “DEF” to the characters

“ABC”

aSelect the character patterns for “ABC”.

bPress .

cPress .

→The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of

the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the

needle is positioned correctly.

Note

• For details on selecting character patterns,

refer to “Selecting Character Patterns” on

page E-5.

Note

• To cancel the starting point setting and

return the starting point to the center of the

pattern, press .

• Use to select a different starting

point for embroidering.

REVISING THE PATTERN

E-42

dPress .

ePress .

fPress to turn off the thread cutting

function and then press .

gPress the “Start/Stop” button.

hAfter the characters are embroidered, cut

the threads to a generous length, remove

the embroidery frame, and then attach the

embroidery frame again so that the

remaining characters (“DEF”) can be

embroidered.

aEnd of the embroidering

iAs in step a, select the character patterns

for “DEF”.

jPress .

kPress .

→The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of

the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the

needle is positioned correctly.

lPress .

REVISING THE PATTERN

Embroidery

Embroidering E-43

mUse to align the needle with the end

of embroidering for the previous pattern.

nPress the “Start/Stop” button to begin

embroidering the remaining character

patterns.

Uninterrupted Embroidering

(Monochrome - Using a Single

Color)

A selected pattern can be stitched out in one color

instead of multicolor. The machine will hesitate

but not stop between color steps, and then

continue till the pattern is completed. Press

for the multicolor steps to become shaded and the

selected pattern will embroider in a single color,

instead of changing the thread while

embroidering. Press again to return to the

pattern’s original settings.

* Press to display all the function keys on the

screen.

→The thread color displayed on the screen will be

grayed out.

Memo

• Even if uninterrupted embroidering has

been set, the automatic thread cutting

function and the thread trimming function

can be used (see page E-32).

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

E-44

Embroidery Data Precautions

Observe the following precautions when using

embroidery data other than that created and saved

in this machine.

■Types of Embroidery Data that can

be Used

• Only .pes, .phc, and .dst embroidery data files

can be used with this machine. Using data other

than that saved using our data design systems or

machines may cause the embroidery machine to

malfunction.

■Types of USB Devices/Media that

can be Used

Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB

media. Use media that meets the following

specifications.

• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)

• USB Floppy disk drive

Stitch data can be recalled only.

• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives

You can also use the following types of media with

the USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer

module.

• Secure Digital (SD) Card

• CompactFlash

• Memory Stick

•Smart Media

• Multi Media Card (MMC)

• XD-Picture Card

■Computers and Operating Systems

with the Following Specifications

can be Used

• Compatible models:

IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment

IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a

USB port as standard equipment

• Compatible operating systems:

Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista,

Windows 7

■Precautions on Using the Computer

to Create and Save Data

• If the name of the embroidery data file/folder

cannot be identified, for example, because the

name contains special characters, the file/folder

is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name

of the file/folder. We recommend using the 26

letters of the alphabet (uppercase and

lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9,”-”, and

“_”.

• If embroidery data larger than 30 cm × 18 cm

(approx.12 inches × 7 inches) is selected, a

message is shown asking if you wish to rotate the

pattern 90 degrees.

Even after being rotated 90 degrees, embroidery

data larger than 30 cm × 18 cm (approx.

12 inches × 7 inches) cannot be used.

(All designs must be within the 30 cm × 18 cm

(approx. 12 inches × 7 inches) design field size.)

• .pes files saved with the number of stitches or the

number of colors exceeding the specified limits

cannot be displayed. The combined design can

not exceed a maximum number of 500,000

stitches or a maximum number of 125 color

changes (Above numbers are approximate,

depending on the overall size of the design). Use

one of our design software programs to edit the

embroidery pattern so that it meets these

specifications.

• Embroidery data stored in a folder created in

USB media can be retrieved.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

CAUTION

• When using embroidery data other than our

original patterns, the thread or needle may

break when sewing with a stitch density that is

too fine or when sewing three or more

overlapping stitches. In that case, use one of

our original data design systems to edit the

embroidery data.

Note

• The processing speed may vary by quantity

of data stored.

• Some USB media may not be usable with

this machine. Please visit our website for

more details.

• The access lamp will begin blinking after

inserting USB devices/media, and it will

take about 5 to 6 seconds to recognize the

devices/media. (Time will differ depending

on the USB device/media).

Memo

• To create file folders, use a computer.

• Letters and numerals can be used in the file

names. In addition, if the file name contains

no more than eight characters, the entire file

name will appear on the screen.

If the file name is more than eight

characters long, only the first six characters

followed by “~” and a number appear as

the file name.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Embroidery

Embroidering E-45

• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a

computer. If embroidery data is stored in a folder

in “Removable Disk”, that embroidery data

cannot be retrieved by the machine.

• Even if the embroidery unit is not attached, the

machine will recognize embroidery data.

■Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data

• .dst data is displayed in the pattern list screen by

file name (the actual image cannot be displayed).

Only the first eight characters of the file name

can be displayed.

• Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific

thread color information, it is displayed with our

default thread color sequence. Check the

preview and change the thread colors as desired.

Saving Embroidery Patterns in the

Machine’s Memory

You can save embroidery patterns that you have

customized and will use often; for example, your

name, patterns that have been rotated or had the

size changed, patterns that have had the sewing

position changed, etc. A total of about 2 MB of

patterns can be saved in the machine's memory.

aPress when the pattern you want to

save is in the embroidery screen.

bPress .

* Press to return to the original screen without

saving.

→The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern

is saved, the display returns to the original screen

automatically.

■If the Memory is Full

If the screen below displays, either the maximum

number of patterns have been saved or the pattern

you want to save takes a lot of memory, and the

machine cannot save it. If you delete a previously

saved pattern, you can save the current pattern.

aPress .

* Press to return to the original screen without

saving.

→The machine displays the patterns currently saved.

Note

• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the

“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose

the pattern you are saving.

Memo

• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern to

the machine’s memory.

• See page E-48 for information on retrieving

a saved pattern.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

E-46

bSelect the pattern you want to delete.

cPress .

aAmount of memory used by the pattern to be

deleted

bAmount of memory needed to save the current

pattern

dPress .

* If you decide not to delete the pattern, press .

→The “Saving” screen displays. When the pattern is

saved, the display returns to the original screen

automatically.

Saving Embroidery Patterns to

USB Media

When sending embroidery patterns from the

machine to USB media, plug the USB media into

the machine’s USB port.

aPress when the pattern you want to

save is in the embroidery screen.

Note

• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the

“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose

the pattern you are saving.

Memo

• If there is enough memory available after

deleting the pattern, the pattern you want to

save will be saved automatically. If there is

not enough memory available after deleting

the pattern, repeat the steps above to

delete another pattern from the machine’s

memory.

• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern.

• See page E-48 for more information about

retrieving saved patterns.

Memo

• USB media is commercially available, but

some USB media may not be usable with

this machine. Please visit our website for

more details.

• Depending on the type of USB media being

used, either directly plug the USB device

into the machine’s USB port or plug the

USB media Reader/Writer into the

machine’s USB port.

• The USB media can be inserted or removed

at any time except while saving or deleting a

pattern.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Embroidery

Embroidering E-47

bInsert the USB media into the USB port on

the machine.

aUSB port

bUSB media

cPress .

* Press to return to the original screen without

saving.

→The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern

is saved, the display returns to the original screen

automatically.

Saving Embroidery Patterns in the

Computer

Using the included USB cable, the machine can

be connected to your computer, and the

embroidery patterns can be temporarily retrieved

from and saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in

your computer. A total of about 3 MB of

embroidery patterns can be saved in the

“Removable Disk”, but the saved embroidery

patterns are deleted when the machine is turned

OFF.

aPlug the USB cable connector into the

corresponding USB ports for the computer

and for the machine.

bTurn on your computer and select

“Computer (My computer)”.

* The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports

on the computer and embroidery machine whether

or not they are turned on.

aUSB port for computer

bUSB cable connector

→The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in

“Computer (My computer)” on the computer.

Note

• The processing speed may vary by quantity

of data.

• Two USB media cannot be used with this

machine at the same time. If two USB

media are inserted, only the USB media

inserted first is detected.

• Do not insert anything other than USB

media into the USB media port. Otherwise,

the USB media drive may be damaged.

Note

• Do not insert or remove USB media while

“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose

some or all of the pattern you are saving.

Note

• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the

“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose

the pattern you are saving.

Note

• The connectors on the USB cable can only

be inserted into a port in one direction. If it

is difficult to insert the connector, do not

insert it with force. Check the orientation of

the connector.

• For details on the position of the USB port

on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the

instruction manual for the corresponding

equipment.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

E-48

cPress when the pattern you want to

save is in the embroidery screen.

dPress .

* Press to return to the original screen without

saving.

→The pattern will be temporarily saved to

“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My

computer)”.

eSelect the pattern’s .phc file in “Removable

Disk” and copy the file to the computer.

Retrieving Patterns from the

Machine’s Memory

aPress .

→The machine displays the patterns currently in the

memory.

bPress the key of the pattern you want to

retrieve.

* Press to return to the original screen.

cPress .

→The embroidery screen is displayed.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Embroidery

Embroidering E-49

Recalling from USB Media

You can recall a specific embroidery pattern from

either direct USB media or a folder in the USB

media. If the pattern is in a folder, check each

folder to find the embroidery pattern.

aInsert the USB media into the USB port on

the machine (see page E-46).

aUSB port

bUSB media

bPress .

→Embroidery patterns and a folder in a top folder are

displayed.

cPress when there is a subfolder to

sort two or more stitch patterns to USB

media, the embroidery pattern in the

subfolder is displayed.

* Press to return to the original screen without

recalling.

aFolder name

bEmbroidery patterns in USB media

cPath

* The path to shows the current folder at the top of the

list.

Embroidery patterns and subfolders within a folder

are displayed.

* Press to return to the previous folder.

* Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot

be created with the machine.

dPress the key of the pattern you want to

retrieve.

* Press to return to the original screen.

ePress .

* Press to delete the pattern. The pattern will be

deleted from the USB media.

→The embroidery screen is displayed.

Note

• The processing speed may vary by quantity

of data.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

E-50

Recalling from the Computer

aPlug the USB cable connector into the

corresponding USB ports for the computer

and for the machine (see page E-47).

bOn the computer, open “Computer (My

computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.

cMove/copy the pattern data to “Removable

Disk”.

→Pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to the

machine.

dPress .

→The patterns in the computer are displayed on the

selection screen.

ePress the key of the pattern you want to

recall.

* Press to return to the original screen.

fPress .

→The embroidery screen is displayed.

Note

• While data is being written, do not

disconnect the USB cable.

• Do not create folders within “Removable

Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch

pattern data within folders cannot be

recalled.

EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-51

Using a Frame Pattern to Make

an Appliqué (1)

You can use framed patterns of the same size and

shape to create an appliqué. Embroider one

pattern with a straight stitch and one pattern with a

satin stitch.

aSelect a straight stitch frame pattern.

Embroider the pattern onto the appliqué

material, then cut neatly around the outside

of the shape.

bEmbroider the same pattern from step a

onto the base fabric.

cApply a thin layer of fabric glue or a

temporary spray adhesive to the rear of the

appliqué created in step a. Attach the

appliqué to the base fabric matching the

shapes.

dSelect the satin stitch frame pattern of the

same shape as the appliqué. Embroider over

the appliqué and base fabric from step c to

create the appliqué.

EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS

Note

• If you change the size or position of the

patterns when selecting them, make a note

of the size and location.

aAppliqué material

EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS

E-52

Using a Frame Pattern to Make

an Appliqué (2)

This is a second method to make appliqué using

embroidery patterns. You do not have to change

the fabric in the embroidery frame using this

method. Embroider one pattern with a straight

stitch and one pattern with a satin stitch.

aSelect a straight stitch frame pattern, and

embroider the pattern onto the base fabric.

bPlace the appliqué fabric over the pattern

embroidered in step a.

* Be sure that the appliqué fabric completely covers

the stitched line.

cEmbroider the same pattern on the appliqué

fabric.

dRemove the embroidery frame from the

embroidery unit, and cut around the

outside of the stitches.

eSelect the satin stitch frame pattern of the

same shape as the appliqué.

Note

• Do not remove the fabric from the

embroidery frame to cut it. Also, do not pull

or push on the fabric. Otherwise, the fabric

may loosen in the frame.

Note

• Do not change the size or position of the

pattern.

• If you change the size or position of the

patterns when selecting them, make a note

of the size and location.

aAppliqué material

EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-53

fReattach the embroidery frame to the

embroidery unit, and embroider the satin

stitch pattern to create an appliqué.

Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns

Split embroidery patterns created with PE-DESIGN

Ver.7 or later, or PE-DESIGN NEXT can be sewn.

With split embroidery patterns, embroidery

designs larger than the embroidery hoop are

divided into multiple sections, which combine to

create a single pattern after each section is sewn.

For details on creating split embroidery patterns

and for more detailed sewing instructions, refer to

the Instruction manual included with PE-DESIGN

Ver.7 or later, or PE-DESIGN NEXT.

The following procedure describes how to read

the split embroidery pattern shown below from

USB media and embroider it.

aConnect to the machine the media

containing the created split embroidery

pattern, and then select the split

embroidery pattern to be embroidered.

* For details on recalling patterns, refer to “Selecting

Patterns from Embroidery Cards” on page E-7,

“Recalling from USB Media” on page E-49, or

“Recalling from the Computer” on page E-50.

→A screen appears so that a section of the split

embroidery pattern can be selected.

bSelect section to be embroidered.

* Select the sections in alphabetical order.

* A maximum of 12 sections can be displayed in one

page. If there are 13 or more sections in the pattern,

press or to display the previous or next

page.

EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS

E-54

cPress .

dIf necessary, edit the pattern.

* For details, refer to “REVISING THE PATTERN” on

page E-36.

ePress the “Start/Stop” button to embroider

the pattern section.

fWhen embroidering is finished, the

following screen appears. Press .

→A screen appears so that a section of the split

embroidery pattern can be selected.

gRepeat steps b through f to embroider

the remaining sections of the pattern.

Memo

• The pattern can be rotated 90° to either the

left or right when is pressed.

EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS

Embroidery

Embroidering E-55

Chapter 2

EEmbroidering

Embroidery Edit

EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS.............................57

SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT .............................58

Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Brother “Exclusives”/Floral

Alphabet Patterns/Frame/Bobbin Work Patterns ......................59

Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns......................................59

EDITING PATTERNS ................................................61

■Key Functions........................................................................... 62

Moving the Pattern ..................................................................63

Rotating the Pattern..................................................................63

Changing the Size of the Pattern...............................................63

Deleting the Pattern .................................................................63

Displaying Patterns in the Screen Magnified by 200% .............63

Changing the Configuration of Character Patterns ...................64

Changing Character Spacing .....................................................64

Reducing Character Spacing .....................................................65

Separating Combined Character Patterns .................................65

Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character in a Pattern

.....66

Embroidering Linked Characters ...............................................67

Changing the Thread Color ......................................................67

Creating a Custom Thread Table...............................................68

■Adding a Color to the Custom Thread Table from the List ....... 69

■Saving the Custom Thread Table to USB media ....................... 70

■Recalling the Custom Thread Table data from USB media....... 70

Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table .....................71

Designing Repeated Patterns ....................................................72

■Sewing Repeated Patterns ........................................................ 72

■Repeating One Element of a Repeated Pattern......................... 74

■Color Sorting Repeated Patterns .............................................. 75

■Assigning Thread Marks ........................................................... 75

Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly .......................................76

Duplicating a Pattern................................................................78

After Editing..............................................................................79

COMBINING PATTERNS.........................................80

Editing Combined Patterns........................................................80

■Selecting combined embroidery patterns................................. 82

Sewing Combined Patterns .......................................................83

VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS ...............84

Uninterrupted Embroidering

(Monochrome - Using a Single Color).......................................84

Basting Embroidery...................................................................84

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ......................... 85

EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-57

With the “Embroidery Edit” functions, you can combine embroidery patterns and character patterns,

change the size of patterns, rotate patterns, and perform many other editing functions. This machine can

perform the 9 functions listed below.

■Combine Patterns

You can easily create combinations of embroidery patterns, frame patterns, character patterns, patterns from the

machine’s memory, patterns from separately sold embroidery cards, and many other patterns.

■Move Patterns

Within the 30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches) wide embroidery area, you can change the position of

patterns, and check the position on the LCD.

■Rotate Patterns

You can rotate patterns one degree, ten degrees or ninety degrees at a time.

■Enlarge or Reduce Patterns

You can make patterns larger or smaller.

• This function is not available for some patterns.

■Create Mirror Images

You can create horizontal mirror images.

• This function is not available for some patterns.

■Change Alphabet Character Spacing

You can increase or decrease the spacing between characters in combined patterns.

■Change Alphabet Character Appearance/Layout

You can change the layout of the characters to a curved line, diagonal, etc. There are 6 choices total.

■Change the Thread Colors of Patterns

You can change the thread colors of the pattern to your favorite colors.

■Creating a Repeating Pattern

You can add copies of a pattern to create a pattern that repeats in a vertical or horizontal direction.

EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS

SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT

E-58

Prepare the machine for embroidery according to the instructions on “BEFORE EMBROIDERING” of

“Basic operations”, and press , then to display the screen below.

aEmbroidery patterns

bBrother “Exclusives”

cFloral alphabet patterns

dFrame patterns

eCharacter patterns

fBobbin work patterns (see “Appendix”)

gPatterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page E-48)

hPatterns saved in USB media (see page E-49)

iPatterns saved on the computer (see page E-50)

jPress this key to position the embroidery unit for storage.

SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT

Memo

• See included “Quick Reference Guide” for more information on each category’s selection screen.

SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-59

Selecting Embroidery

Patterns/Brother

“Exclusives”/Floral Alphabet

Patterns/Frame/Bobbin Work

Patterns

aSelect the category of the pattern.

* Refer to “How to Create Bobbin Work” of

“Appendix” about the bobbin work patterns.

bPress the key of the pattern you want to

edit.

* See page E-4 and E-7 for more information on

selecting patterns.

→The pattern is displayed in the top part of the screen.

cPress .

→The pattern selected for editing is outlined in red on

the “Embroidery Edit” display.

dProceed to “EDITING PATTERNS” on

page E-61 to edit the pattern.

Selecting Alphabet Character

Patterns

When you select character patterns from the

“Embroidery Edit” screen, you can edit the

appearance of the pattern at the same time.

aPress .

bSelect the font, then enter the characters.

(Example: A B C)

* See page E-5 for more information about selecting

characters.

SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT

E-60

cPress to change the layout of the

pattern.

* If the characters are too small to see, press to

view a display of all entered characters.

dSelect the layout. (Example: )

When selecting an arc, use and to

change the degree of the arc.

* Press to make the arc flatter.

* Press to make the arc rounder.

ePress to return to the original screen.

fAfter you finish your selections, press

→The “Embroidery Edit” screen will appear.

gProceed to “EDITING PATTERNS” on

page E-61 to edit the pattern.

Memo

• When selecting , and

change to and . You can

increase or decrease the incline.

EDITING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-61

EDITING PATTERNS

aShows the size of the entire combined pattern.

bShows the size of the pattern currently selected.

cShows the distance from the center of the frame.

dShows the color sequence and times of each step of the pattern currently selected.

eShows the degree of rotation for the pattern.

Memo

• If a key display is light gray, you cannot use that function with the selected pattern.

EDITING PATTERNS

E-62

■Key Functions

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page

aMagnify key Press this key to magnify the pattern by 200% in the screen. E-63

bThread palette key Press this key to change the colors of the displayed pattern. E-67

cRotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, ten

degrees or ninety degrees at a time.

E-38

dSize key Press this key to change the size of the pattern. Patterns can be enlarged or

reduced.

E-37

eArray key Press this key to change the configuration of a character pattern. E-64

fMulti color key Press this key to change the color of individual characters in a pattern. E-66

gCharacter spacing

key

Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns. E-64

hAdd key Press this key to add another pattern to the editing pattern. E-79

iDelete key Press this key to delete the selected pattern (the pattern outlined by the red

box).

E-63

j“Embroidery” key Press this key to call up the “Embroidery” screen. E-79

kPattern select key When a combined pattern is selected, use these keys to select a part of the

pattern to edit.

E-64

lDuplicate key Press this key to duplicate a pattern. E-78

mDensity key Press this key to change the density of frame patterns or character patterns. E-40

nHorizontal mirror

image key

Press this key to make a horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern. E-39

oBorder key Press this key to make and edit a repeating pattern. E-72

pArrow keys

( Center key)

Press these keys to move the pattern in the direction indicated by the arrow on

the key. (Press to return the pattern to its original position.)

E-36

EDITING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-63

Moving the Pattern

For details on moving the pattern, refer to “Moving

the Pattern” on page E-36.

Rotating the Pattern

For details on rotating the pattern, refer to

“Rotating the Pattern” on page E-38.

Changing the Size of the Pattern

For details on changing the size of the pattern,

refer to “Changing the Size of the Pattern” on

page E-37.

Deleting the Pattern

Press to delete the pattern from the screen.

Displaying Patterns in the Screen

Magnified by 200%

aPress .

→The pattern is magnified by 200%.

bCheck the displayed pattern.

→Use to scroll through the display

in any direction.

cTo display the pattern back to the normal

size (100%), press .

EDITING PATTERNS

E-64

Changing the Configuration of

Character Patterns

aPress .

bPress the key of the layout you want to

embroider.

* See page E-60 for more information about layout

types.

→The display will show the selected layout.

cPress .

Changing Character Spacing

aPress .

bUse to change the spacing.

* Press to increase the character spacing.

* Press to decrease the character spacing.

* Press to return the pattern to its original

appearance.

cPress to return to the original screen.

EDITING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-65

Reducing Character Spacing

The spacing between characters can be reduced to

50% of the narrowest character in the group.

Separating Combined Character

Patterns

Combined character patterns can be separated to

adjust the character spacing or to separately edit

the patterns after all characters have been entered.

aPress .

bPress .

→The key appears as .

Note

• It is not recommended to edit data and

transfer to other or older version machines.

Same features do not apply in other

machines, so problems may occur.

• Character spacing can be reduced only

when characters are arranged normally on a

straight line.

EDITING PATTERNS

E-66

cUse to select where the pattern is

to be separated, and then press to

separate it. For this example, the pattern

will be separated between “T” and “a”.

dUse to select a pattern, and

then use to adjust the character

spacing.

ePress .

Changing the Color of Each

Alphabet Character in a Pattern

aPress so you can assign a thread color

to each character.

bChange the thread to sew each character in

a different color.

* Press to change the colors in the sewing order.

aColor for each character

Note

• A separated character pattern cannot be

combined again.

EDITING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-67

Embroidering Linked Characters

You can embroider linked characters exampled

below, in a single row when the pattern extends

beyond the embroidery frame.

For details on embroidering linked characters,

refer to “Embroidering Linked Characters” on

page E-41.

Example: Linking “DEF” to the characters

“ABC”

Changing the Thread Color

You can change the thread color by moving the

color to be changed to the top of the sewing order

and selecting a new color from the thread colors in

the machine.

aIn the pattern editing screen, press .

→The thread color palette screen displays.

bPress or to put the color you want

to change at the top of the sewing order.

a64 Embroidery threads table

cPress to choose a new

color from the color palette.

* To return to the original color, press . If

multiple colors have been changed, this command

will return all colors to their original colors.

* You can select colors from the color palette by

directly touching the color selection with the touch

pen.

aColor palette

→The selected color appears at the top of the sewing

order.

dPress .

→The display shows the changed colors.

Memo

• To select a color from the Custom Thread

Table, “Choosing a Color from the Custom

Thread Table” on page E-71.

EDITING PATTERNS

E-68

Creating a Custom Thread Table

You can create a custom thread table containing

the thread colors that you most often use. You can

select thread colors from the machine’s extensive

list of thread colors from nine different thread

brands. You can select any color and move the

color to your custom thread table.

aIn the pattern editing screen, press and

then press .

bUse to choose where to

add a color on the custom thread table.

* You can choose colors from the custom thread table

by directly touching the screen with the touch pen.

* You can scroll through 100 colors at a time using

and on the custom thread table.

aCustom thread table

bPress to recall the custom thread table

data (See page E-70)

cUse to select one of the thread

brands in the machine.

dUse

to enter a color’s 4-digit number.

* If you make a mistake, press to erase the

entered number, and then enter the correct number.

aThread brand

Note

• Some machines may already have an

additional 300 Robison-Anton thread colors

contained in the custom thread table. 300

Robison-Anton thread colors table data can

be downloaded from our website

“ http://solutions.brother.com ”.

EDITING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-69

ePress .

aThread brand

bEntered thread color number

→The selected thread color is set in the custom thread

table.

fRepeat the previous steps until all desired

thread colors are specified.

* To delete a specified color from the palette, select

the color to be deleted, and then press .

* To delete all the specified color from the palette,

press .

gPress to return to the original screen.

■Adding a Color to the Custom

Thread Table from the List

aRepeat the previous steps a through c on

page E-68.

bPress to display the thread list.

cUse to select a thread color.

aThread list

bThread brand

dPress .

Note

• If is not pressed, the thread color

number will not be changed.

Note

• You can save the created custom thread

table data. Refer to “Saving the Custom

Thread Table to USB media” on page E-70

for the detailed procedure.

EDITING PATTERNS

E-70

eRepeat the previous steps until all desired

thread colors are specified.

* To delete a specified color from the palette, select

the color to be deleted, and then press .

* To delete all the specified color from the palette,

press .

fPress to return to the original screen.

■Saving the Custom Thread Table to

USB media

You can save a custom thread table data file to USB

media.

aPress and then press .

bSet your desired colors in the custom thread

table according to the procedure in

“Creating a Custom Thread Table” on

page E-68.

cInsert the USB media into the USB port on

the machine.

aUSB port

bUSB media

dPress .

→The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the data is

saved, the display returns to the original screen

automatically.

■Recalling the Custom Thread Table

data from USB media

You can recall a custom thread table data from USB

media.

Note

• Custom thread table data can only be saved

to USB media. You cannot save the data in

the machine’s memory or in the computer.

• Custom thread table data is saved as “.pcp”

data file.

Note

• Two USB media cannot be used with this

machine at the same time. If two USB

media are inserted, only the USB media

inserted first is detected.

Note

• Do not insert or remove USB media while

“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose

some or all of the data you are saving.

Note

• Do not store two or more “.pcp” data file in

USB media. You can only recall one custom

thread table data at a time.

EDITING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-71

aInsert the USB media containing the custom

thread table data into the USB port.

aUSB port

bUSB media

bPress and then press .

cPress .

→The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the data is

loaded to the machine, the display returns to the

original screen automatically.

dThe recalled custom thread table is

displayed on the screen.

Choosing a Color from the

Custom Thread Table

You can select a color from the up to 300 thread

colors you have set in the custom thread table.

aPress .

→The thread color palette screen displays.

bPress or to put the color you want

to change at the top of the sewing order.

Note

• Do not insert or remove USB media while

“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose

some or all of the data you are saving.

EDITING PATTERNS

E-72

cPress .

aCustom thread change key

→The custom thread table will appear.

dPress to choose a new

color from the custom thread table.

* Use and to scroll through the custom

thread table.

* Press to return to the original color.

* You can choose colors from the custom thread table

by directly touching the screen with the touch pen.

aCustom thread table

→The display shows the changed colors.

ePress .

Designing Repeated Patterns

■Sewing Repeated Patterns

Using the border function, you can create stitches

using repeated patterns. You can also adjust the

spacing of the patterns within a repeated pattern

stitch.

aSelect a pattern, and then press .

bPress .

cSelect the direction in which the pattern

will be repeated.

EDITING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-73

aVertical direction

bHorizontal direction

cRepeating and deleting vertical keys

dRepeating and deleting horizontal keys

eSpacing keys

→The pattern direction indicator will change

depending on the direction selected.

dUse to repeat the pattern on top and

to repeat the pattern at the bottom.

* To delete the top pattern, press .

* To delete the bottom pattern, press .

eAdjust the spacing of the repeated pattern.

* To widen spacing, press .

* To tighten spacing, press .

aPress to change a repeated pattern back to

one single pattern.

fComplete repeated patterns by repeating

steps c through e.

gPress to finish repeating.

Memo

• You can only adjust the spacing of patterns

included in the red frame.

Memo

• When there are two or more patterns, all

patterns will be grouped together as one

pattern in the red frame.

• When changing the direction in which the

pattern will be repeated, all of the patterns

in the red frame will automatically be

grouped as one repeating unit. Press

to change a repeated pattern back to one

single pattern. See the following section on

how to repeat one element of a repeated

pattern.

EDITING PATTERNS

E-74

■Repeating One Element of a

Repeated Pattern

By using the Cut function, you can select one

element of a repeated pattern and repeat only that

single element. This function allows you to design

complex repeated patterns.

aChoose the direction in which the repeated

pattern will be cut.

* Press to cut horizontally.

* Press to cut vertically.

→The pattern direction indicator will change

depending on the direction selected.

bUse and to select the cut line.

→The cut line will move.

cPress .

→The repeated pattern will be divided into separate

elements.

dPress .

eUse and to select the element to

repeat.

fRepeat the selected element.

EDITING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-75

gPress to finish repeating.

■Color Sorting Repeated Patterns

Press to automatically change the sewing

order of colors in combined border embroidery

patterns so that the same color can be continuously

sewn. This allows you to continue sewing without

repeatedly changing the upper thread or changing

the sewing order manually.

■Assigning Thread Marks

By sewing thread marks, you can easily align

patterns when embroidering a series. When sewing

is finished on a pattern, a thread mark in the shape

of an arrow will be sewn using the final thread.

When sewing a series of patterns, use the point of

this arrow for positioning the following designs to be

sewn.

Note

• Once you have cut a repeated pattern into

separate elements, you cannot return to the

original repeated pattern.

• Each element can be edited separately in

the edit screen. See “Selecting combined

embroidery patterns” on page E-82.

Memo

• In combined stitch patterns that contain two

or more border patterns or other patterns

combined with border patterns, the sewing

order of only the border patterns is

changed.

• When a group of two or more patterns using

border patterns is repeated, the sewing

order is changed so that the same color can

be sewn continuously in each pattern.

Memo

• When repeatedly sewing individual patterns,

thread marks can be sewn around the

perimeter of the pattern only.

EDITING PATTERNS

E-76

aPress .

bPress .

cPress to select the thread mark to be

sewn.

dPress .

Embroidering the Pattern

Repeatedly

After creating the repeated pattern, rehoop the

embroidery frame and keep sewing for the next

pattern.

Memo

• When there are two or more elements, use

and or and to select a

pattern that you want to assign a thread

mark(s) to.

Memo

• The optional border frame allows you to

easily rehoop the fabric without removing

the embroidery frame from the machine.

EDITING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-77

aCreate the repeated pattern with the thread

mark at the center of the end of the pattern.

* Refer to “Assigning Thread Marks” on page E-75.

bPress , then .

cPress the “Start/Stop” button to begin

embroidering.

→When embroidering is finished, the thread mark is

sewn with the last thread color.

dRemove the embroidery frame.

eRehoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.

fAttach the embroidery frame to the

machine, and then touch .

Note

• Adjust the position of the fabric so that the

embroidering area for the next pattern is

within the embroidering area of the

embroidery sheet.

aPattern embroidered first

bPosition of pattern to be embroidered next

cEmbroidering area of embroidery sheet

EDITING PATTERNS

E-78

gTouch to set the starting point to the

center top of the pattern.

hTouch .

iPress the positioning keys to move the

embroidery frame until the starting point is

aligned with the thread mark on the fabric.

aPositioning keys

* Press to check the embroidering position.

jRemove the thread mark.

kPress the “Start/Stop” button to begin

embroidering.

Duplicating a Pattern

aPress .

→The duplicate is positioned over the original pattern.

aDuplicated pattern

Note

• If multiple patterns are displayed in the

screen, only the pattern selected using

and is duplicated.

• Move and edit each duplicated pattern

individually.

EDITING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-79

After Editing

aPress .

* To combine the pattern with other patterns, select

(see page E-80).

* See page E-21 for more information about sewing

patterns.

Memo

• If you want to return to the edit screen after

pressing , press .

COMBINING PATTERNS

E-80

Editing Combined Patterns

Example: Combining alphabet characters

with an embroidery pattern and

editing

aPress to select an embroidery

pattern.

bSelect .

cPress .

COMBINING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-81

dPress .

ePress to enter the alphabet

characters.

* Press to return to the previous screen.

fSelect and enter “Flower”.

* After selecting , press to change the

character case, then enter the remaining characters.

→The characters you enter will be displayed in the

center of the display.

gPress .

hUse to move the characters.

* With a USB mouse, your finger or the touch pen,

drag the characters to move them.

iPress to change the layout of the

characters. Press .

* See page E-64 for more information about changing

the layout.

COMBINING PATTERNS

E-82

jPress to change the color of the

characters.

* See page E-67 for more information about changing

the color.

kWhen all editing is finished, press .

■Selecting combined embroidery

patterns

If multiple patterns have been combined, use

to select the pattern to be edited. If a

USB mouse is connected, the pattern can be

selected by clicking it. Move the mouse to position

the pointer over the desired pattern, and then click

the left mouse button. In addition, patterns can be

selected by directly touching the screen with your

finger or touch pen.

Memo

• Use to select patterns that are

overlapping and cannot be selected by

clicking them or by touching the screen.

COMBINING PATTERNS

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-83

Sewing Combined Patterns

Combined patterns will be embroidered in the

order they were entered. In this example, the

embroidery order will be as follows:

→

aEmbroider by following the

color order on the right side of the display.

→After the flowers are embroidered, the [+] cursor

will move to the “Flower” part of the pattern.

bEmbroider .

Note

• Follow the directions in “Sewing Embroidery

Patterns” on page E-22.

VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS

E-84

Uninterrupted Embroidering

(Monochrome - Using a Single

Color)

A selected pattern can be stitched out in one color

instead of multicolor. The machine will hesitate

but not stop between color steps, and then

continue till the pattern is completed. Press

for the multicolor steps to become shaded and the

selected pattern will embroider in a single color,

instead of changing the thread while

embroidering. Press again to return to the

pattern’s original settings.

Basting Embroidery

Before embroidering, basting stitches can be sewn

along the outline of the pattern. This is useful for

embroidering fabric that cannot have stabilizer

material affixed with an iron or adhesive. By

stitching stabilizer material to the fabric, shrinkage

of the stitching or misaligned pattern can be

minimized.

aPress .

bIn the “Embroidery Basting Distance”

display, use and to specify the

distance from the pattern to the basting

stitching.

cPress to return to the previous

screen.

dPress .

ePress to select the basting setting.

VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS

Note

• It is recommended to finish combining and

editing the pattern before selecting the

basting setting. If the pattern is edited after

selecting the basting setting, the basting

and pattern may become misaligned, and

the basting under the pattern may be

difficult to remove after embroidering is

complete.

Memo

• The higher the setting, the farther the

basting is from the pattern.

• The setting remains selected even if the

machine is turned off.

Note

• When is pressed, the pattern is moved

to the center. After selecting the basting

setting, move the pattern to the desired

position.

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Embroidery Edit

Embroidering E-85

→Basting is added to the beginning of the sewing

order.

fPress the “Start/Stop” button to begin

embroidering.

gWhen embroidering is finished, remove the

basting stitching.

In the same way as embroidery patterns in Chapter 1, you can save and retrieve edited embroidery

patterns to and from the machine’s memory, a personal computer, or USB media. Refer to the relevant

sections in Chapter 1 on saving and retrieving embroidery patterns and follow the same procedures in

order to save and retrieve edited embroidery patterns.

See page E-44 for more information about the memory function.

Memo

• To cancel the setting, press .

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

E-86

Appendix

This section provides important information for operating this machine. Please read this section to find

troubleshooting tips and pointers as well as how to keep your machine in the best working order.

Page number starts with “A” in this section.

The screen display and machine illustration may vary slightly, depending on the countries or regions.

Chapter1 How to Create Bobbin Work ................................. A-2

Chapter2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting....................... A-18

Chapter 1

AAppendix

How to Create Bobbin Work

ABOUT BOBBIN WORK............................................3

PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK.............................3

Required Materials......................................................................3

■Bobbin case and bobbin cover ................................................... 3

■Lower thread.............................................................................. 4

■Upper thread ............................................................................. 4

■Needle ....................................................................................... 4

■Presser foot ................................................................................ 4

■Fabric......................................................................................... 4

Upper Threading.........................................................................4

Preparing the Bobbin Thread ......................................................5

■When tension is applied to the bobbin thread............................ 6

■When tension is not applied to the bobbin thread ..................... 7

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING) .....................9

Positioning the Fabric and Sewing ..............................................9

■Finishing the thread ends ......................................................... 11

Bobbin Work Free Motion Sewing ............................................11

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY) ..........12

Selecting the Pattern.................................................................12

Start Embroidering....................................................................14

ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION...................... 16

■Adjusting the upper thread tension .......................................... 16

■Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread .............................. 16

TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................17

■The thread was accidentally cut automatically and the bobbin

thread is caught inside the machine......................................... 17

■Correcting bobbin work tension .............................................. 17

■The bobbin thread catches on the tension

spring of the bobbin case ......................................................... 17

ABOUT BOBBIN WORK

How to Create Bobbin Work

Appendix A-3

Beautiful embroidery work, with a three-dimensional appearance, can be created by winding the bobbin

with medium to heavy weight thread or ribbon, which is too thick to be threaded through the machine’s

needle. The decorative thread or ribbon will stitch out on the underneath side of fabric while sewing with

the fabric wrong side facing up.

Bobbin work embroidery is sewn using the bobbin work patterns included with this machine.

Required Materials

■Bobbin case and bobbin cover

aBobbin case (gray)

There is a notch at the location indicated by the

letter “A”.

aBobbin cover

There are two small v-shaped tabs on the back of

the bobbin cover as indicated by the letter “B”.

The tabs help hold the bobbin in place so it does

not lift up while thick thread is being pulled

through.

ABOUT BOBBIN WORK

1. Utility stitches 2. Decorative stitches 3. Free motion sewing

PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK

A-4

■Lower thread

We recommend the following types of threads for

bobbin work.

* When wide ribbon or heavy weight threads are being used, we

recommend test sewing with and without bobbin case tension

being applied to see which gives the best stitching results.

If wide ribbon such as 3.5mm (approx. 1/8 inch) is to be used,

we recommend that bobbin case tension not be applied. Refer

to page A-7 for more detailed instructions.

■Upper thread

Sewing machine embroidery thread (polyester

thread) or monofilament (transparent nylon) thread.

If you do not wish for the upper thread to be visible,

we recommend using transparent nylon

monofilament thread or polyester light weight

thread (50wt. or above) that is the same color as the

lower thread.

■Needle

Use a needle appropriate for the upper thread and

fabric being used. Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle

Combinations” on page B-59 and “Embroidery Step

by Step” on page B-60.

■Presser foot

Utility stitches or decorative stitches:

Monogramming foot “N”

Free motion sewing:

Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”

Embroidery foot “W” or embroidery foot with LED

pointer “W+”

■Fabric

Be sure to sew trial stitches on a piece of scrap

fabric, which includes the same threads and fabric

as what is being used in your project.

Upper Threading

aInstall a needle appropriate for the upper

thread and fabric to be used.

For details on installing the needle, refer to

“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page B-57.

bAttach the presser foot.

cThread the machine with the upper thread.

For details on threading the machine, refer to

“Upper Threading” on page B-48.

No.5 or finer hand embroidery

thread or decorative thread

Flexible woven ribbon

(When embroidering: approx. 2mm

(approx. 5/64 inch) is recommended)

Fine embroidery ribbon (silk or

silk-like material) (3.5 mm (approx.

1/8 inch) or less is recommended)

Note

• Do not use thread heavier than No.5 hand

embroidery thread.

• Some threads may not be appropriate for

bobbin work. Be sure to sew trial stitches

before sewing on your project.

Note

• The sewing results may be affected by the

type of fabric used. Before sewing your

project, be sure to sew trial stitches on a

piece of scrap fabric that is the same as the

fabric used in the project.

PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK

How to Create Bobbin Work

Appendix A-5

Preparing the Bobbin Thread

In order to create bobbin work, the bobbin case

must be replaced with the one for bobbin work.

Before creating bobbin work, clean the bobbin case

and the race.

aRaise the needle and presser foot, and then

turn off the machine.

bRemove the flat bed attachment or

embroidery unit.

cGrasp both sides of the needle plate cover,

and then slide it toward you to remove it.

aNeedle plate cover

dRemove the bobbin case.

a Bobbin case

eUse the cleaning brush included with the

machine or a vacuum cleaner to remove

any lint and dust from the race and its

surrounding area.

aCleaning brush

bRace

fWipe the bobbin case (gray) with a soft lint

free cloth to clean it.

gInsert the bobbin case so that the S mark

on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark

on the machine.

* Align the S and ● marks.

aS mark

b● mark

cBobbin case

Note

• The bobbin case (gray) cannot be used for

sewing in any way other than bobbin work.

After sewing bobbin work, refer back to the

steps in “Preparing the Bobbin Thread” on

page A-5 for removing and cleaning the

bobbin case (gray), and then reinstall the

standard bobbin case.

CAUTION

• Be sure to use the bobbin case (gray) when

creating bobbin work. Using any other bobbin

case may result in the thread becoming

tangled or damage to the machine.

• Make sure that the bobbin case is correctly

installed. If the bobbin case is incorrectly

installed, the thread may become tangled or

the machine may be damaged.

PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK

A-6

hWind a decorative thread around the

bobbin by hand. After winding the bobbin

so it is filled as shown below (about 80%),

cut the thread.

For precautions on winding the bobbin for

embroidering, refer to step b of “Selecting the

Pattern” on page A-12.

iUsing scissors carefully trim the thread tail

as close to the bobbin as possible.

aBeginning of wound thread

jInstall the bobbin wound with thread.

Whether or not tension should be applied to the

bobbin thread depends on the type of thread being

used.

■When tension is applied to the

bobbin thread

Insert bobbin into bobbin case so the thread

unwinds from the left side.

Then correctly pass the thread through the tension

spring as shown below.

aTension spring

CAUTION

• Be sure to use the machine’s included bobbin

or one designed specifically for this machine.

Using any other bobbin may result in damage

or injuries.

* Actual size

aThis model

bOther models

c11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)

Note

• Slowly and evenly wind the thread around

the bobbin.

• For best results, wind the bobbin so the

thread is snug and not twisted.

CAUTION

• If thread extends beyond the top of the bobbin

too much, the thread may become tangled or

the needle may break.

CAUTION

• When winding the bobbin, make sure the

thread is not frayed. Sewing with frayed

thread may result in the thread catching on

the tension spring of the bobbin case, the

thread completely becoming tangled or

damage to the machine.

• Do not guide the bobbin thread through the

groove in the needle plate cover, otherwise

the lower threading cannot be done correctly.

PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK

How to Create Bobbin Work

Appendix A-7

■When tension is not applied to the

bobbin thread

If the bobbin thread in the trial stitching is too tight

and adjusting the bobbin case tension does not help,

do not pass the thread through the tension spring.

Hold the bobbin with your left hand so the thread

unwinds from the right side and hold the end of the

thread with your right hand.

kPull out about 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) of

bobbin thread.

lLightly hold the end of the upper thread

while turning the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) until the mark on the

handwheel aligns with the center top of

machine.

mGently pull the upper thread to bring the

bobbin thread up through the needle plate.

→A loop of the bobbin thread comes out through the

hole in the needle plate.

nInsert tweezers through bobbin thread loop

and pull bobbin thread above the needle

plate.

oAlign the upper thread and bobbin thread,

and then pull out about 10 cm (approx.

4 inches) of the threads and pass them

under the presser foot toward the rear of

the machine.

PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK

A-8

pInstall the needle plate cover and bobbin

cover with tabs.

For details on installing the needle plate cover, refer to

“Cleaning the Race” on page A-19.

aBobbin cover

bBobbin cover with tabs

qInstall the flat bed attachment or

embroidery unit.

→This completes the upper and lower threading.

CAUTION

• When creating bobbin work, use the bobbin

cover with tabs, otherwise the thread may

become tangled or the needle may break.

Note

• When installing the needle plate cover, do

not allow it to pinch the thread.

Note

• When installing the flat bed attachment or

embroidery unit, do not allow it to pinch the

thread.

• When the bobbin thread is replaced with a

new one, be sure to repeat the procedure

from a, otherwise the lower threading will

not be done correctly.

Note

• If utility stitches are to be used, refer to

“CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)” on

page A-9. If embroidery patterns are to be

used, refer to “CREATING BOBBIN WORK

(EMBROIDERY)” on page A-12.

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)

How to Create Bobbin Work

Appendix A-9

Positioning the Fabric and Sewing

aTurn on the machine.

bSelect a stitch in the Utility and Decorative

Stitches mode. For this example, press .

cIncrease the upper thread tension. Upper

thread tension setting between 6 and 8 is

recommended for bobbin work.

For details on adjusting the upper thread tension,

refer to “Setting the Thread Tension” of

“Sewing”.

dMake sure the automatic thread cutting

( ) and automatic reinforcement

stitching ( ) have been turned off.

ePlace stabilizer on top (wrong side) of the

fabric.

fIf thread is too thick to pull through fabric

to machine surface use an awl to punch a

small hole in the fabric at the beginning of

stitching so the bobbin thread can be fed

through the opening.

gPress .

→The screen changes, and all keys and operation

buttons are locked.

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)

Note

• Recommended stitches for bobbin work are

open “airy” type stitches.

• Be sure to sew trial stitches using same

fabric and threads as project in order to

check the sewing results.

• The bobbin thread may become tangled

due to the type of pattern and thread that

are being used. Since this may cause the

needle to break, immediately stop sewing if

this occurs. Turn off the machine and cut

out the tangled thread with scissors. Then,

clean the race and bobbin case as

described in “Fabric is caught in the

machine and cannot be removed” on

page A-27.

Memo

• For best results, select a longer stitch length

and a wider stitch width. Depending on the

selected stitch, it may not be possible to

change the stitch length and stitch width

settings.

• Depending on the fabric, bunched stitches

may result. We recommend selecting a

simple stitch and sewing trial stitches to

check the sewing results.

Examples of simple stitches: , ,

Note

• Before sewing, check that there is enough

thread in the bobbin.

CAUTION

• Before sewing, make sure the automatic thread

cutting has been turned off. If sewing is started with

automatic thread cutting turned on, the thread may

become tangled or the machine may be damaged.

Note

• Type and weight of stabilizer will depend on

fabric and thread being used.

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)

A-10

hUse the presser foot lever to raise the

presser foot.

iWith the wrong side facing up, place the

fabric under the presser foot.

aWrong side of fabric

jTurn the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) to feed the needle into

the fabric or punched hole. Position the

upper thread over the presser foot and

lightly hold, and then lower the presser foot

lever.

aPunched hole

bUpper thread over the presser foot

kPulling the upper thread gently, turn the

handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)

until the mark on the handwheel aligns with

the center top of machine.

→A loop of the bobbin thread comes out through the

hole in the fabric.

lRaise the presser foot lever, and then use

tweezers to pull up the bobbin thread and

bring the end of the thread to the top of the

fabric.

mAlign the upper thread and bobbin thread,

and then pass them under the presser foot

toward the rear of the machine.

nWhile gently holding threads at the rear of

the machine, turn the handwheel to feed

the needle into the fabric or punched hole

again, and then lower the presser foot lever.

oPress at lower right of LCD screen.

→All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and

the previous screen is displayed.

pSelect a low speed, gently hold the threads

behind the presser foot and start sewing.

Threads can be released after several

stitches have been made.

Note

• If the bobbin thread does not come up, hold

the upper thread as shown below to pull up

the bobbin thread.

aUpper thread

Note

• Pull the thread while holding down the

fabric so it does not move out of place.

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)

How to Create Bobbin Work

Appendix A-11

qWhen you have reached the end of the

stitching area, stop the machine.

rRaise the needle and presser foot.

sLeaving about 10 cm (approx. 4 inches) of

thread at the ends, use scissors to cut the

threads.

a10 cm (approx. 4 inches)

■Finishing the thread ends

aAt the end of the stitching, use a hand

sewing needle to bring the bobbin thread

up to the wrong side of the fabric.

aWrong side of fabric

bBobbin thread

bWorking from the wrong side of the fabric,

tie the bobbin and upper threads together

by hand. Cut away excess threads with

scissors.

aWrong side of fabric

bRight side of fabric

cIf the desired results could not be achieved,

adjust the tension of the bobbin thread and

of the upper thread, and then try sewing the

stitching again.

For more details, refer to “ADJUSTING THE

THREAD TENSION” on page A-16.

Bobbin Work Free Motion

Sewing

If so desired, use a template or draw your design

on the stabilizer to allow for ease of stitching.

Remember, your stitches with your decorative

thread will be on the underneath side of your

fabric and the stabilizer will be on the top of the

wrong side of your fabric.

* For information about using free motion open toe

quilting foot “O” refer to “Free Motion Quilting” on

page S-39.

Note

• Do not sew reverse/reinforcement stitches

at the end of the stitching, otherwise the

threads may become tangled or the needle

may break. In addition, it will be difficult to

pull the bobbin thread up to the wrong side

of the fabric.

Note

• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button to

cut the threads, otherwise the machine may

be damaged.

Note

• If it is difficult to place bobbin thread

through the eye of a hand sewing needle,

use a ribbon embroidery needle to pull the

thread up to the wrong side of the fabric.

Otherwise, use an awl to pull up the bobbin

thread.

Note

• To ensure threads do not come undone

after being tied place a drop of fabric glue

on knots.

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)

A-12

Selecting the Pattern

aAttach the embroidery foot and the

embroidery unit.

bInstall a bobbin wound with an adequate

amount of thread for pattern.

cPull up the bobbin thread above the needle

plate.

dTurn on the machine.

ePress .

→The carriage will move to the initialization position.

fTo select a bobbin work embroidery

pattern, press (Embroidery).

gPress , then select one of the bobbin

work embroidery patterns.

Embroidery patterns for bobbin work appear with

the letter “B” in the lower-left corner of the key.

a“B” mark

→Regardless of the setting that had been selected, the

automatic thread cutting function is turned off.

→When a bobbin work embroidery pattern is selected

the embroidery sewing speed can only be adjusted

from 100 spm to a maximum of 350 spm.

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)

Note

• Prepare the machine for bobbin work as

described in “PREPARING FOR BOBBIN

WORK” on page A-3.

Note

• For an estimated length of bobbin thread

required for each pattern, refer to the

“Quick Reference Guide” included with the

machine. Be sure to use a bobbin wound

with enough thread. If the bobbin runs out

of thread while sewing, the embroidery

cannot be completed.

• Depending on the thread thickness, it may

not be possible to wind the bobbin with the

necessary length of thread. In this case, try

winding the bobbin again, or use a lighter

weight thread.

Note

• Embroidery patterns for bobbin work “B”

cannot be used in the “Embroidery Edit”

screen ( ).

Note

• The beginning and end of stitching are

specified for bobbin work patterns. They

cannot be used for normal embroidering.

• Recommended default setting for bobbin

work embroidery is 100 spm.

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)

How to Create Bobbin Work

Appendix A-13

hPress .

→The sewing screen is displayed. iPress , and then adjust the tension of

the upper thread.

For details on adjusting the tension of the upper

thread, refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on

page E-30.

CAUTION

• When sewing bobbin work, be sure to select an

embroidery pattern for bobbin work. If any other

type of pattern is selected, the machine may be

damaged.

Note

• Bobbin work embroidery sewing speed

defaults to 100 spm when a bobbin work

embroidery pattern is selected. The

Settings screen will only allow speed to be

adjusted from 100 spm to a maximum

sewing speed of 350 spm.

Memo

• When an embroidery pattern for bobbin

work is selected, the automatic thread

cutting function is turned off. Afterward, if a

pattern other than one for bobbin work is

selected, the automatic thread cutting

function is returned to the setting that was

selected before the embroidery pattern for

bobbin work was chosen.

Note

• Since bobbin work is sewn from the wrong

side of the fabric, the pattern shown in the

screen appears as a mirror image of the

final sewn embroidery. If necessary, flip the

image to preview it. In addition, when

sewing with the thread colors shown in the

embroidery screen, select a bobbin thread

that matches what is shown in the screen.

aImage shown in screen bSewn embroidery

(Right side of fabric)

Memo

• With embroidery patterns for bobbin work,

the size and thread density cannot be

changed. In addition, the automatic thread

cutting function cannot be turned on.

Memo

• We recommend a setting between 6 and 8

for the upper thread tension.

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)

A-14

Start Embroidering

aHoop the fabric so the right side of the

fabric is facing down with the stabilizer

lying on the top. Use an embroidery frame

that fits the size of the pattern and then

attach the frame to the machine. These

patterns are embroidered from the wrong

side of the fabric so technically you are

working in “reverse” of normal

embroidering.

aWrong side of fabric

bPress .

cPress .

→The screen changes, and all keys and operation

buttons are locked.

dUsing the presser foot lever, raise the

presser foot.

eTo bring the bobbin thread above the

fabric, rotate the handwheel

counterclockwise while holding the upper

thread.

fAs shown below, pull the upper thread to

pull the bobbin thread up through the

fabric.

aUpper thread

bBobbin thread

gPress to unlock all keys and

buttons.

hLower the presser foot.

iIt is necessary to move to the beginning of

stitching so press , and then press .

→The embroidery frame moves to the beginning of

stitching.

jWhile holding both the upper thread and

the bobbin thread, sew a section of the

pattern.

CAUTION

• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery.

Otherwise, the needle may break and cause injuries.

Not using a stabilizer material may result in a poor

finish to your project.

Memo

• If the bobbin thread cannot be pulled up,

use an awl to create small hole to help pull

bobbin thread to surface.

CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)

How to Create Bobbin Work

Appendix A-15

kStop the machine, and then tie the upper

thread and the bobbin thread together to

secure the threads.

lStart sewing again to finish the pattern.

mRaise the needle and presser foot, remove

the embroidery frame, and then cut the

upper thread and the bobbin thread.

When cutting the threads, be sure to leave an

adequate length of thread so they can be

properly secured.

nUsing a hand sewing needle such as a

ribbon embroidering needle, pull the

bobbin thread to the top (wrong side) of the

fabric, and then tie the upper thread and

the bobbin thread together.

oRemove the fabric from the embroidery

frame, and check the finished embroidery.

pIf the desired results could not be achieved,

adjust the tension of the bobbin thread and

the upper thread, and then try sewing the

pattern again.

For more details, refer to “ADJUSTING THE THREAD

TENSION” on page A-16.

Memo

• If there is a gap between the start point and

end point of the pattern, leave an adequate

length of thread, cut the threads, and

remove the fabric from the machine. Use a

ribbon embroidering needle to hand sew

stitches to connect the starting and ending

points.

aRight side of fabric bWrong side of fabric

Memo

• Check bobbin after each bobbin work

embroidery pattern is sewn to make sure

there is adequate bobbin thread for the next

pattern.

• While selecting the bobbin work pattern, the

embroidery speed value is set to “100

spm”. Refer to “Adjusting the Embroidery

Speed” on page E-33 to change the

embroidery speed.

ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION

A-16

After sewing trial stitches and checking the sewing results, adjust the thread tensions if necessary. After adjusting the

tensions, be sure to sew trial stitches again in order to check the sewing results.

■Adjusting the upper thread tension

We recommend a setting between 6 and 8 for the upper

thread tension when sewing bobbin work.

Refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on page E-30.

■Adjusting the tension of the bobbin

thread

If the desired stitching cannot be achieved after

adjusting the upper thread tension, adjust the tension of

the bobbin thread. The tension of the bobbin thread can

be adjusted by turning the slotted-head (–) screw on the

bobbin case (gray) for bobbin work.

aDo not turn the phillips screw (+).

bAdjust with a small screwdriver.

To increase the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the

slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° clockwise.

To decrease the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the

slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° counterclockwise.

ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION

Note

• Turning the screw on the bobbin case (gray)

may push up the spring plate, as shown

below.

If this occurs, gently press down the spring

plate with a screwdriver so it is lower than

the top surface of the bobbin case (gray),

and then insert the bobbin case into the

machine.

aSpring plate

CAUTION

• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)

screw on the bobbin case (gray) as this may result in

damage to the bobbin case, rendering it useless.

• If the slotted-head screw (-) is difficult to turn, do

not use force. Turning the screw too much or

providing force in either (rotational) direction may

cause damage to the bobbin case. Should damage

occur, the bobbin case may not maintain proper

tension.

Note

• If the bobbin thread tension is tight, the

thread cannot be passed through the

tension spring when the bobbin is installed

in the bobbin case. (Refer to “When tension

is not applied to the bobbin thread” on

page A-7.)

TROUBLESHOOTING

How to Create Bobbin Work

Appendix A-17

Several solutions for minor problems are described below. If the problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest

authorized Brother dealer.

■The thread was accidentally cut

automatically and the bobbin thread

is caught inside the machine

aCut the thread near the fabric above the

needle plate, and then remove the fabric.

aThread

bRemove the bobbin, and then hold it out

toward the left side of the machine.

cLower the presser foot.

dApply slight tension on bobbin thread by

holding thread out to the left side of presser

foot. Press the “Thread Cutter” button

again.

■Correcting bobbin work tension

* If the top thread shows on the bobbin side of the

fabric, increase the upper tension (Refer to

“ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION” on

page A-16).

* If the top thread still shows on the bobbin side of the

fabric, reduce the tension of the bobbin thread or

bypass the bobbin tension. (Refer to “ADJUSTING

THE THREAD TENSION” on page A-16.)

* Some bobbin threads are too coarse to pass through

to wrong side of fabric. In this case, be sure to color

match top thread with bobbin threads.

Example: Decorative Stitch

aCorrect tension

bThe upper thread tension is too loose, or the

bobbin thread tension is too tight.

■The bobbin thread catches on the

tension spring of the bobbin case

Sew with no tension applied to the bobbin thread.

(Refer to “When tension is not applied to the bobbin

thread” on page A-7.)

TROUBLESHOOTING

Note

• If an embroidery pattern was sewn, remove

the embroidery frame.

CAUTION

• Do not pull on the thread with excessive force,

otherwise the machine may be damaged.

Chapter 2

AAppendix

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

CARE AND MAINTENANCE ....................................19

Restrictions on oiling ................................................................19

Precautions on storing the machine ..........................................19

Cleaning the LCD Screen .........................................................19

Cleaning the Machine Casing ...................................................19

Cleaning the Race .....................................................................19

Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area............................21

About the Maintenance Message ..............................................21

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN .......................................22

Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen Display .........................22

Touch Panel is Malfunctioning..................................................22

TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................23

Frequent troubleshooting topics ...............................................23

Upper thread tightened up .......................................................23

■Symptom.................................................................................. 23

■Cause ....................................................................................... 23

■Remedy/check details .............................................................. 23

Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric ....................................24

■Symptom.................................................................................. 24

■Cause ....................................................................................... 24

■Remedy/check details .............................................................. 24

Incorrect thread tension ...........................................................26

■Symptoms ................................................................................ 26

■Cause/remedy/check details .................................................... 26

Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed ..........27

■Removing the fabric from the machine .................................... 27

■Checking machine operations .................................................. 29

List of Symptoms.......................................................................30

ERROR MESSAGES...................................................34

SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................37

UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE........38

Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media ......................................38

Upgrade Procedure Using Computer ........................................39

INDEX......................................................................40

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-19

Restrictions on oiling

In order to prevent damaging this machine, it must

not be oiled by the user. This machine was

manufactured with the necessary amount of oil

applied to ensure correct operation, making

periodic oiling unnecessary.

If problems occur, such as difficulty turning the

handwheel or an unusual noise, immediately stop

using the machine, and contact your authorized

dealer or the nearest authorized service center.

Precautions on storing the

machine

Do not store the machine in any of the locations

described below, otherwise damage to the

machine may result, for example, rust caused by

condensation.

* Exposed to extremely high temperatures

* Exposed to extremely low temperatures

* Exposed to extreme temperature changes

* Exposed to high humidity or steam

* Near a flame, heater or air conditioner

* Outdoors or exposed to direct sunlight

* Exposed to extremely dusty or oily environments

Cleaning the LCD Screen

If the screen is dirty, gently wipe it with a soft, dry

cloth. Do not use organic solvents or detergents.

Cleaning the Machine Casing

If the surface of the machine is dirty, lightly soak a

cloth in a neutral detergent, squeeze it out firmly,

and then wipe the surface. Then wipe again with a

dry cloth.

Cleaning the Race

If dust or bits of dirt collect in the race or bobbin

case, the machine will not run well, and the

bobbin thread detection function may not operate.

Keep the machine clean for best results.

aPress the “Needle Position” button to raise

the needle.

bTurn the main power to OFF.

cRemove the needle, presser foot, and

presser foot holder (see page B-55 through

B-57).

dRemove the flat bed attachment or the

embroidery unit if either is attached.

eGrasp both sides of the needle plate cover,

and then slide it toward you.

aNeedle plate cover

→The needle plate cover is removed.

fGrasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out.

aBobbin case

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Be sure to unplug the machine before cleaning it. Otherwise, electric shock or injury may result.

Note

• In order to extend the life of this machine,

periodically turn it on and use it. Storing this

machine for an extended period of time

without using it may reduce its efficiency.

Note

• Do not wipe the LCD screen with a damp

cloth.

Memo

• Occasionally, condensation may form on

the LCD screen or it may become fogged

up; however, this is not a malfunction. After

a while, the cloudiness will disappear.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

A-20

gUse the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner

to remove any lint and dust from the race

and bobbin thread sensor and the

surrounding area.

aCleaning brush

bRace

cBobbin thread sensor

hInsert the bobbin case so that the S mark

on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark

on the machine.

* Align the S and ● marks.

aS mark

b● mark

cBobbin case

* Make sure that the indicated points are aligned

before installing the bobbin case.

iInsert the tabs on the needle plate cover

into the needle plate, and then slide the

cover back on.

Note

• Do not apply oil to the bobbin case.

• If lint or dust collects on the bobbin thread

sensor, the sensor may not operate

correctly.

CAUTION

• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;

otherwise, the upper thread may become

tangled, the needle may break, or sewing

performance may suffer. For a new bobbin

case (part code: XE5342-101 (green marking

on the screw), XC8167-551 (no color on the

screw), XE8298-001 (gray, for bobbin work)),

contact your dealer or nearest authorized

dealer.

• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case

properly, otherwise the needle may break.

Note

• If the needle plate has been removed it is

especially important to reinstall the needle

plate and tighten the screws prior to

installing the bobbin case.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-21

Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin

Case Area

The cutter below the needle plate should be

cleaned. If dust or lint accumulate on the cutter, it

will be difficult to cut the thread when the “Thread

Cutter” button is pressed or the automatic thread

cutting function is used. Clean the cutter when the

thread is not easily cut.

aFollow steps a through e in “Cleaning the

Race” to remove the needle plate cover.

bUse the screwdriver included with the

machine to unscrew and remove the needle

plate.

cUse the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner

to remove any lint and dust from the cutter

in the bobbin case area.

aCutter

dUse the screwdriver included with the

machine to screw and attach the needle

plate.

eInsert the tabs on the needle plate cover

into the needle plate, and then slide the

cover back on.

About the Maintenance Message

Once this message appears, it is recommended to

take your machine to an authorized dealer or

nearest authorized service center for a regular

maintenance check. Although this message will

disappear and the machine will continue to

function once you press , the message will

display several more times until the appropriate

maintenance is performed.

Please take the time to arrange the maintenance

your machine requires once this message appears.

Such steps will help to ensure you receive

continued, uninterrupted hours of machine

operation for the future.

CAUTION

• Do not touch the cutter, otherwise injuries

may result.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

A-22

Adjusting the Brightness of the

Screen Display

If the screen does not look very clear under certain

situation, you can adjust the brightness of the

screen display.

aPress .

→The settings screen appears.

bPress .

→The General settings screen appears.

cDisplay page 6 of the General settings

screen.

dPress or to adjust the brightness of

the screen display.

* The screen appears dim as the number on the

settings screen decreases. The screen appears

brighter as the number increases.

Touch Panel is Malfunctioning

If the screen does not respond correctly when you

touch a key (the machine does not perform the

operation or performs a different operation), follow

the steps below to make the proper adjustments.

aHolding your finger on the screen, turn the

main power switch to OFF and back to ON.

→The touch panel adjustment screen is displayed.

bUsing the included touch pen, lightly touch

the center of each +, in order from 1 to 5.

cTurn the main power to OFF, then turn it

back to ON.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

Note

• Only use the included touch pen to touch

the screen. Do not use a mechanical pencil,

pin, or other sharp object. Do not press too

hard on the screen. Otherwise, damage

may result.

Note

• If you finish the screen adjustment and the

screen still does not respond, or if you

cannot do the adjustment, contact your

authorized dealer.

+1 +4

TROUBLESHOOTING

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-23

If the machine stops operating correctly, check the following possible problems before requesting service.

You can solve most problems by yourself. If you need additional help, the Brother Solutions Center offers

the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips. Visit us at “ http://solutions.brother.com ”.

If the problem persists, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized service center.

Frequent troubleshooting topics

Detailed causes and remedies for common troubleshooting topics are described below. Be sure to refer to

this before contacting your dealer.

Upper thread tightened up

■Symptom

* The upper thread appears as a single continuous

line.

* The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the

fabric. (Refer to the illustration below.)

* The upper thread has tightened up, and comes out

when pulled.

* The upper thread has tightened up, and wrinkles

appear in the fabric.

* The upper thread tension is tight, and the results do

not change even after the thread tension is adjusted.

aLower side of fabric

bLower thread visible from upper side of fabric

cUpper thread

dUpper side of fabric

eLower thread

■Cause

Incorrect lower threading

If the lower thread is incorrectly threaded, instead of

the appropriate tension being applied to the lower

thread, it is pulled through the fabric when the

upper thread is pulled up. For this reason, the thread

is visible from the upper side of the fabric.

■Remedy/check details

Correctly install the lower thread.

aTurn off the sewing machine.

bRemove the bobbin from the bobbin case.

cPlace the bobbin in the bobbin case so that

the thread unwinds in the correct direction.

* Hold the bobbin with your right hand with the

thread unwinding to the left, and hold the end of the

thread with your left hand. Then, with your right

hand, place the bobbin in the bobbin case.

If the bobbin is inserted with the thread unwinding

in the wrong direction, sewing will be done with

an incorrect thread tension.

TROUBLESHOOTING

■Upper thread tightened up page A-23

■Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric page A-24

■Incorrect thread tension page A-26

■Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be

removed page A-27

TROUBLESHOOTING

A-24

dWhile holding the bobbin in place with

your finger, pass the thread through the slit

in the needle plate.

* Hold down the bobbin with your right hand, and

then pull the end of the thread around the tab with

your left hand.

aTab

bHold down the bobbin with your right hand.

Pull the thread to pass it through the slit in the

needle plate, then cut it with the cutter.

cSlit

dCutter

Sewing with the correct thread tension is possible

after the bobbin has been correctly installed in the

bobbin case.

Tangled thread on wrong side of

fabric

■Symptom

* The thread becomes tangled on the lower side of the

fabric.

* After starting sewing, a rattling noise is made and

sewing cannot continue.

* Looking under the fabric, there is tangled thread in

the bobbin case.

■Cause

Incorrect upper threading

If the upper thread is incorrectly threaded, the upper

thread passed through the fabric cannot be firmly

pulled up and the upper thread becomes tangled in

the bobbin case, causing a rattling noise.

■Remedy/check details

Remove the tangled thread, and then correct the

upper threading.

aRemove the tangled thread. If it cannot be

removed, cut the thread with scissors.

* Refer to “Cleaning the Race” in “CARE AND

MAINTENANCE” on page A-19.

bRemove the upper thread from the

machine.

cRefer to the following steps to correct the

upper threading.

* If the bobbin was removed from the bobbin case,

refer to “LOWER THREADING” on page B-40 and

“Remedy/check details” in the section “Upper

thread tightened up” on page A-23 to correctly

install the bobbin.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-25

dRaise the presser foot using the presser foot

lever.

* If the presser foot is not raised, the sewing machine

cannot be threaded correctly.

eRaise the needle by turning the handwheel

toward you (counterclockwise) so that the

mark on the wheel points up, or press

“Needle Position” button once or twice to

raise the needle.

aMark

fWhile holding the thread with both hands,

pull the thread up from under the thread

guide plate.

aThread guide plate

gWhile holding the thread in your right

hand, pass the thread through the thread

guide in the direction indicated.

hGuide the thread down, up, then down

through the groove, as shown in the

illustration.

iPass the thread through the needle bar

thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the

thread with both hands and guiding it as

shown in the illustration.

aNeedle bar thread guide

jThread the needle according to steps j

and o in “Upper Threading” on page B-48.

Memo

• Look in the upper groove area to check if

the thread catches on the take-up lever

visible inside the upper groove area.

aLook in the upper groove area

TROUBLESHOOTING

A-26

Incorrect thread tension

■Symptoms

• Symptom 1: The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the fabric.

• Symptom 2: The upper thread appears as a straight line on the upper side of the fabric.

• Symptom 3: The upper thread is visible from the lower side of the fabric.

• Symptom 4: The lower thread appears as a straight line on the lower side of the fabric.

• Symptom 5: The stitching on the lower side of the fabric is loose or has slack.

■Cause/remedy/check details

□Cause 1

The machine is not correctly threaded.

The lower threading is incorrect.

Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Upper Thread is Too Tight” on page S-12.

The upper threading is incorrect.

Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric” on page A-24 to

correct the upper threading.

□Cause 2

A needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not being used.

The sewing machine needle that should be used depends on the type of fabric sewn and the thread thickness.

If a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not being used, the thread tension will not be adjusted

correctly, causing wrinkles in the fabric or skipped stitches.

* Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations” on page B-59 to check that a needle and thread appropriate for the

fabric are being used.

□Cause 3

An appropriate upper tension is not selected.

Adjust the upper thread tension to select an appropriate thread tension.

The appropriate thread tension differs according to the type of fabric and thread being used.

* Adjust the thread tension while test sewing on a piece of scrap fabric that is the same as that used in your project.

* When the lower thread is visible on the upper side

of the fabric. Set the upper thread tension to a lower

number. (Loosen the thread tension.)

* When the upper thread is visible on the lower side

of the fabric. Set the upper thread tension to a higher

number. (Tighten the thread tension.)

□Symptom 1 □Symptom 3

aLower side of fabric

bLower thread visible on

upper side of fabric

cUpper thread

dUpper side of fabric

eLower thread

fUpper thread visible from

lower side of fabric

Note

• If the upper threading and lower threading are incorrect, the thread tension cannot be adjusted

correctly, even by adjusting the upper thread tension. Check the upper threading and lower threading

first, and then adjust the thread tension.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-27

Fabric is caught in the machine

and cannot be removed

If the fabric is caught in the sewing machine and

cannot be removed, the thread may have become

tangled under the needle plate. Follow the

procedure described below to remove the fabric

from the machine. If the operation could not be

completed according to the procedure, instead of

attempting to complete it forcefully, contact your

dealer or nearest authorized service center.

■Removing the fabric from the

machine

aImmediately stop the sewing machine.

bTurn off the sewing machine.

cRemove the needle.

If the needle is lowered into the fabric, turn the

handwheel away from you (clockwise) to raise the

needle out of the fabric, and then remove the needle.

* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page B-57.

dRemove the presser foot and presser foot

holder.

* Refer to “CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on

page B-55.

eLift up the fabric and cut the threads below

it.

If the fabric can be removed, remove it. Continue with

the following steps to clean the race.

fRemove the needle plate cover.

aNeedle plate cover

gCut out the tangled threads, and then

remove the bobbin.

hRemove the bobbin case.

If threads remain in the bobbin case, remove them.

aBobbin case

iUse the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner

to remove any dust or loose threads from

the race and its surrounding area.

aCleaning brush

bRace

jUse the enclosed disc-shaped screwdriver

to loosen the two screws on the needle

plate.

If the fabric could be removed Continue with

step p.

If the fabric could not be

removed

Continue with

step j.

Note

• Be careful not to drop the removed screws

in the machine.

TROUBLESHOOTING

A-28

kSlightly lift up the needle plate, cut any

tangled threads, and then remove the

needle plate.

Remove the fabric and threads from the needle plate.

If the fabric cannot be removed, even after completing

these steps, contact your dealer or nearest authorized

service center.

lRemove any threads in the race and around

the feed dogs.

mTurn the handwheel to raise the feed dogs.

nAlign the two screw holes in the needle

plate with the two holes at the needle plate

mounting base, and then fit the needle plate

onto the machine.

oLightly finger-tighten the screw on the right

side of the needle plate. Then, use the

disc-shaped screwdriver to firmly tighten

the screw on the left side. Finally, firmly

tighten the screw on the right side.

Turn the handwheel to check that the feed dogs move

smoothly and do not contact the edges of the slots in

the needle plate.

aCorrect position of feed dogs

bIncorrect position of feed dogs

pInsert the bobbin case so that the S mark

on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark

on the machine.

* Align the S and ● marks.

aS mark

b● mark

cBobbin case

* Make sure that the indicated points are aligned

before installing the bobbin case.

Note

• Be careful not to drop the removed screws

in the machine.

CAUTION

• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;

otherwise, the upper thread may become

tangled, the needle may break, or sewing

performance may suffer. For a new bobbin

case (part code: XE5342-101 (green marking

on the screw), XC8167-551 (no color on the

screw), XE8298-001 (gray, for bobbin work)),

contact your nearest authorized dealer.

• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case

properly, otherwise the needle may break.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-29

qInsert the tabs on the needle plate cover

into the needle plate, and then slide the

cover back on.

rCheck the condition of the needle, and then

install it.

If the needle is in a poor condition, for example, if it is

bent, be sure to install a new needle.

* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page B-57.

■Checking machine operations

If the needle plate has been removed, check

machine operations to confirm that installation has

been completed correctly.

aTurn on the machine.

bSelect .

cSlowly turn the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise), and look from all sides

to check that the needle falls at the center

of the hole in the needle plate.

If the needle contacts the needle plate, remove the

needle plate, and then install it again, starting with

step m in “Removing the fabric from the machine” on

page A-28.

aHole in the needle plate

bHandwheel

dSelect zigzag stitch . At this time,

increase the stitch length and width to their

maximum settings.

eSlowly turn the handwheel toward you

(counterclockwise) and check that the

needle bar and feed dogs operate correctly.

If the needle or feed dogs contact the needle plate, the

machine may be malfunctioning; therefore, contact

your dealer or nearest authorized service center.

fTurn off the machine, and then install the

bobbin and presser foot.

* Refer to “Setting the Bobbin” and “CHANGING THE

PRESSER FOOT” on page B-55.

gCorrectly thread the machine.

* For details on the machine, refer to “Upper

Threading” on page B-48.

hPerform trial sewing with normal fabric.

Note

• If the needle plate has been removed it is

especially important to reinstall the needle

plate and tighten the screws prior to

installing the bobbin case.

CAUTION

• Never use bent needles. Bent needles can

easily break, possibly resulting in injuries.

Note

• After completing this procedure, continue

with the following procedure in “Checking

machine operations” to check that the

machine is operating correctly.

Memo

• Since the needle may have been damaged

when the fabric was caught in the machine,

we recommend replacing it with a new one.

Note

• Do not yet install the presser foot and

thread.

Note

• The thread may have become tangled as a

result of incorrect upper threading. Make

sure that the machine is correctly threaded.

Note

• Incorrect sewing may be the result of

incorrect upper threading or sewing thin

fabrics. If there are poor results from the

trial sewing, check the upper threading or

the type of fabric being used.

TROUBLESHOOTING

A-30

List of Symptoms

Problem Cause Solution Page

The thread is tangled

on the wrong side of

the fabric.

Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine

and rethread the machine.

B-48

Using improper needle or thread for the

selected fabric.

Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle

Combinations” chart.

B-59

The upper thread is

too tight.

The bobbin thread is incorrectly installed. Correctly install the bobbin thread. B-45

Cannot thread the

needle

Needle is not in the correct position. Press the “Needle Position” button to raise

the needle.

B-14

Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. B-57

Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-57

Cannot lower the

presser foot with the

presser foot lever

Presser foot was raised using the “Presser Foot

Lifter” button.

Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to

lower the presser foot.

B-14

Thread tension is

incorrect

Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine

and rethread the machine.

B-48

Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin. (If needle plate was

removed, reinstall needle plate and tighten

screws prior to installing bobbin case.)

B-45

Using improper needle or thread for the

selected fabric.

Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle

Combination” chart.

B-59

Presser foot holder is not attached correctly. Reattach the presser foot holder correctly. B-55

Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. S-12, E-30

Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. B-40

Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-57

Upper thread breaks Machine is not threaded correctly (used the

wrong spool cap, spool cap is loose, the thread

did not catch the needle bar threader, etc.)

Rethread the machine correctly. B-48

Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-57

There are scratches on the bobbin case. Replace the bobbin case, or consult your

authorized dealer.

A-19

Upper thread tension is too strong. Adjust the thread tension. S-12, E-30

Using improper needle or thread for the

selected fabric.

Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle

Combinations” chart.

B-59

Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread

and remove it from the race, etc.

—

There are scratches near the hole of the needle

plate.

Replace the needle plate, or consult your

authorized dealer.

S-26

There are scratches near the hole in the presser

foot.

Replace the presser foot, or consult your

authorized dealer.

B-55

Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. B-57

Thread is knotted or tangled. Rethread upper and lower thread. B-45, B-48

A bobbin designed specifically for this machine

is not used.

Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only

use a bobbin designed specifically for this

machine.

B-45

Bobbin thread breaks Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. B-45

There are scratches on the bobbin or it doesn’t

rotate properly.

Replace the bobbin. B-45

Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc. to cut the twisted thread

and remove it from the race, etc.

—

A bobbin designed specifically for this machine

is not used.

Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only

use a bobbin designed specifically for this

machine.

B-45

Bobbin thread does

not wind neatly on the

bobbin.

The thread is not passed through the bobbin

winding thread guide correctly.

Correctly pass the thread through the bobbin

winding thread guide.

B-41

Bobbin spins slowly. Press [+] in the bobbin winding window to

increase the bobbin winding speed.

B-43

The thread that was pulled out was not wound

onto the bobbin correctly.

Wind the thread that was pulled off around

the bobbin 5 or 6 times clockwise.

B-42

TROUBLESHOOTING

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-31

Skipped stitches Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-57

Using improper needle or thread for the

selected fabric.

Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle

Combination” chart.

B-59

Machine is threaded incorrectly. Check the steps for threading the machine

and rethread it correctly.

B-48

Dust or lint has collected under the needle

plate.

Remove the dust or lint with the brush. A-19

Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. B-57

Needle is defective. Replace the needle. B-57

Thin or stretch fabrics are being sewn. Sew with one sheet of thin paper under the

fabric.

S-9

Needle breaks Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. B-57

Needle clamp screw is not tightened. Tighten the needle clamp screw. B-57

Needle is turned or bent. Replace the needle. B-57

Using improper needle or thread for the

selected fabric.

Check the needle and fabric combination. B-58, E-21

Wrong presser foot was used. Use the recommended presser foot.

S-62

Upper thread tension is too strong. Adjust the thread tension setting. S-12, E-30

Fabric is pulled during sewing. Do not pull the fabric during sewing. —

Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool

cap, then reattach the spool cap.

B-48

There are scratches around the holes in the

needle plate.

Replace the needle plate, or consult your

authorized dealer.

A-19

There are scratches around the hole(s) in the

presser foot.

Replace the presser foot, or consult your

authorized dealer.

B-55

There are scratches on the bobbin case. Replace the bobbin case, or consult your

authorized dealer.

A-19

Needle is defective. Replace the needle. B-57

Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine

and rethread the machine.

B-48

Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. B-45

Presser foot is attached incorrectly. Attach the presser foot correctly. B-55

Screw of the presser foot holder is loose. Securely tighten the screw of the presser

foot.

B-55

Fabric is too thick. Use fabric that the needle can pierce when

the handwheel is turned.

S-7

Fabric is fed forcefully when sewing thick fabric

or thick seams.

Allow the fabric to be fed without being

forcefully pushed.

Stitch length is too short. Adjust the stitch length. S-10

Stabilizer is not attached to fabric being

embroidered.

Attach stabilizer. S-75, E-11

Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. B-40

Fabric does not feed

through the machine

Feed dogs are set in the down position.

Press , and then turn the handwheel to

raise the feed dogs.

S-39

Stitches are too close together. Lengthen the stitch length setting. S-10

Wrong presser foot was used. Use the correct presser foot.

S-62

Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-57

Thread is entangled. Cut the entangled thread and remove it from

the race.

A-27

Fabric puckers There is a mistake in the upper or bobbin

threading.

Check the steps for threading the machine

and rethread it correctly.

B-45, B-48

Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. S-12, E-30

Stitches are too long when sewing thin fabrics. Shorten the stitch length. S-10

Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-57

Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool

cap, then reattach the spool cap.

B-48

Wrong presser foot. Use the correct presser foot.

S-62

Problem Cause Solution Page

TROUBLESHOOTING

A-32

High-pitched sound

while sewing

Dust or lint is caught in the feed dogs. Remove the dust or lint. A-19

Pieces of thread are caught in the race. Clean the race. A-19

Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine

and rethread the machine.

B-48

There are scratches on the bobbin case. Replace the bobbin case, or consult your

authorized dealer.

A-19

A bobbin designed specifically for this machine

is not used.

Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only

use a bobbin designed specifically for this

machine.

B-45

Character pattern

does not turn out

Wrong presser foot was used. Attach the correct presser foot.

S-62

Pattern adjustment settings were set

incorrectly.

Revise the pattern adjustment settings. S-76

Did not use a stabilizer material on thin fabrics

or stretch fabrics.

Attach a stabilizer material. S-75

Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. S-12, E-30

Fabric was pulled, pushed or fed at an angle

while it was being sewn.

Sew while guiding the fabric with your hands

so that the fabric is fed in a straight line.

S-3

Machine does not

operate

There is no pattern selected. Select a pattern. S-21, S-71, E-3,

E-58

“Start/Stop” button was not pushed. Press the “Start/Stop” button. B-14

Main power switch is not turned on. Turn the main power to ON. B-21

Presser foot is not lowered. Lower the presser foot. B-14

“Start/Stop” button was pushed with the foot

controller attached.

Remove the foot controller, or use the foot

controller to operate the machine.

S-4

The “Start/Stop” button was pressed while the

machine is set for the sewing speed controller

to control the zigzag stitch width.

Use the foot controller instead of the

“Start/Stop” button to operate the machine,

or set the “Width Control” to “OFF” in the

settings screen.

B-28, S-4

All keys and buttons have been locked by

Press to unlock all keys and

buttons.

B-55, B-57

Nothing happens,

even if the LCD

display is pressed

The screen has been locked. Press either of the following keys to unlock

the screen.

—

The fabric feeds in the

opposite direction.

The feed mechanism is damaged. Contact your dealer or the nearest authorized

service center.

—

The LCD screen is

fogged up.

Condensation has formed on the LCD screen. After a while, the cloudiness will disappear. —

Embroidery pattern

does not sew out

correctly

Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread

and remove it from the race, etc.

A-27

Fabric was not inserted into the frame correctly

(fabric was loose, etc.).

If the fabric is not stretched tight in the frame,

the pattern may turn out poorly or there may

be shrinkage of the pattern. Set the fabric

into the frame correctly.

E-14

Stabilizing material was not attached. Always use stabilizing material, especially

with stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics,

fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics that

often cause pattern shrinkage. See your

authorized dealer for the proper stabilizer.

E-11

There was an object placed near the machine,

and the carriage or embroidery frame hit the

object during sewing.

If the frame bumps something during sewing,

the pattern will turn out poorly. Do not place

anything in the area where the frame may

bump it during sewing.

E-21

Fabric outside the frame edges interferes with

the sewing arm, so the embroidery unit cannot

move.

Reinsert the fabric in the embroidery frame so

that the excess fabric is away from the

sewing arm, and rotate the pattern 180

degrees.

E-14

Fabric is too heavy, so the embroidery unit

cannot move freely.

Place a large thick book or similar object

under the arm head to lightly lift the heavy

side and keep it level.

—

Problem Cause Solution Page

TROUBLESHOOTING

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-33

Embroidery pattern

does not sew out

correctly

Fabric is hanging off the table. If the fabric is hanging off the table during

embroidery, the embroidery unit will not

move freely. Place the fabric so that it does

not hang off the table or hold the fabric to

keep it from dragging.

E-21

Fabric is snagged or caught on something. Stop the machine and place the fabric so that

it does not get caught or snagged.

—

Embroidery frame was removed during sewing

(for example, to reset the bobbin). The presser

foot was bumped or moved while removing or

attaching the embroidery frame, or the

embroidery unit was moved.

If the presser foot is bumped or the

embroidery unit is moved during sewing, the

pattern will not turn out. Be careful when

removing or reattaching the embroidery

frame during sewing.

E-26

Stabilizer is incorrectly attached, for example, it

is smaller than the embroidery frame.

Attach the stabilizer correctly. E-11

Loops appear on the

surface of the fabric

when embroidering

The thread tension is incorrectly set. Adjust the thread tension. E-30 to E-32

The tension of the upper thread is incorrectly

set for the combination of the fabric, thread and

pattern being used.

Use the embroidery needle plate cover. E-22

The combination of the bobbin case and

bobbin thread is incorrect.

Change the bobbin case or bobbin thread so

that the correct combination is used.

E-21

Embroidery unit does

not operate

There is no pattern selected. Select a pattern. E-3, E-58

Main power switch is not turned on. Turn the main power to ON. B-21

Embroidery unit is not attached correctly. Reattach the embroidery unit correctly. B-64

Embroidery frame was attached before the unit

was initialized.

Perform the initialization process correctly. B-64

Pointer of embroidery

foot “W+” with LED

pointer does not

indicate the position

correctly

With thick elastic fabric, the position will be

misaligned only at raised parts in the fabric.

Manually adjust the position according to the

thickness of the fabric.

B-63

With fabric having a very uneven surface, the

position is not correctly aligned.

The pointer indication should be used only as

a reference.

B-62

Specifying with

sensor pen cannot be

done accurately

The sensor pen has not been calibrated. Before using the sensor pen for the first time,

be sure to calibrate it.

B-74

The pen is being held differently than when it

was calibrated.

When using the sensor pen, be sure to hold it

at the same angle as when it was calibrated.

The specification location may be misaligned

if the pen is held at a slightly different angle.

In this case, make fine adjustments after

making the selection.

B-74

CAUTION

• This machine is equipped with a thread detection device. If the “Start/Stop” button is pushed before the

upper threading is done, the machine will not operate properly. Also, depending on the pattern selected,

the machine may feed the fabric even if the needle is raised. This is due to the needle bar release

mechanism. At these times, the machine will make a sound different from what is made during normal

sewing. This is not the sign of a malfunction.

• If the power is disconnected during sewing:

Turn the main power to OFF and unplug the machine.

If you restart the machine, follow the instructions for operating the machine correctly.

Problem Cause Solution Page

ERROR MESSAGES

A-34

If the machine is not properly set and the “Start/Stop” button or the “Reverse Stitch” button is pressed, or

if the operation procedure is incorrect, the machine does not start. An alarm sounds and an error message

is displayed on the LCD. If an error message displays, follow the instructions in the message.

Below is an explanation of error messages. Refer to these when necessary (if you press or do the

operation correctly while the error message is displayed, the message disappears).

ERROR MESSAGES

CAUTION

• Be sure to rethread the machine. If you press the “Start/Stop” button without rethreading the machine,

the thread tension may be wrong or the needle may break and cause injury.

Marks Error Messages Cause/Solution

A malfunction occurred.Turn the machine off, then on again. This message is displayed if some malfunction occurs.

An invalid area was touched by the sensor pen. Touch again

within the active sensor area. (130mm x 200mm / 5"X 8")

This message appears when you touch the invalid area of

sensor pen. Touch the active area. (see page B-76)

An invalid sewing area was touched by the sensor pen. Touch

again within the valid sewing area.

This message appears when you touch the invalid area of

sewing with the sensor pen. Touch the active area. (see page

B-76)

Attach the embroidery frame. This message appears if the embroidery frame is not attached

when you press in the embroidery screen. (see page

B-83)

Can not change the configuration of the characters This message is displayed when there are too many characters

and the curved character configuration is impossible.

Check and rethread the upper thread. This message is displayed when the upper thread is broken or

not threaded correctly, and the “Start/Stop” button or the

“Reverse Stitch” button is pressed.

Data volume is too large for this pattern. This message is displayed when the patterns you are editing

take up too much memory, or if you are editing too many

patterns for the memory.

Failed to save file. This message appears when you try to save more than 100

settings screen image files in the USB media. In this case,

delete a file from the USB media or use different USB media.

(see page B-35)

In twin needle mode, the automatic needle threading button

cannot be used.

This message is displayed when the automatic needle

threading button is pushed while twin needle sewing is set.

Lower the buttonhole lever. This message is displayed when the buttonhole lever is up, a

buttonhole stitch is selected, and the “Start/Stop” button or

“Reverse Stitch” button is pushed.

Lower the presser foot lever. This message is displayed when the “Presser Foot Lifter”

button is pushed while the presser foot lever is raised/the

needle is lowered.

Move the sensor pen away from the currently marked position. This message appears when you press down the sensor pen

tip before pressing and keep pressing for the certain

period. Move the sensor pen away from the current position.

Not enough available memory to save the pattern. Delete

another pattern?

This message is displayed when the memory is full and the

stitch or pattern cannot be saved.

OK to automatically lower the presser foot? This message is displayed when is pressed (the

presser foot is raised).

OK to delete the ending point setting? This message appears when you try to recall the pattern

stored in the machine while specifying the sewing end point

using the sensor function. (see page B-81)

ERROR MESSAGES

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-35

OK to delete the selected pattern? This message is displayed when, after selecting a pattern,

or is pressed and the pattern is about to be

deleted.

OK to delete the selected picture? This message is displayed when the image is deleted.

OK to delete the setting? This message appears when or is pressed to

delete the settings for a utility stitch. To delete the selected

settings, press .

OK to recall and resume previous memory? This message appears if the machine is turned off while

sewing, then turned on again.

Press to return the machine to the condition (pattern

position and number of stitches) when it was turned off. Follow

the procedure described in “If the Thread Breaks During

Sewing” on page E-27 to align the needle position and sew the

remainder of the pattern.

OK to reset the pattern’s border setting, position and/or angle? This message appears when you try to use the automatic

positioning function using the sensor pen with the pattern,

rotated or replaced, or with the border pattern. (see page B-83)

OK to revert to the original position and/or angle? This message appears when you try to use the automatic

positioning function using the sensor pen with the pattern,

rotated or replaced. (see page B-83)

Preventive maintenance is recommended. This message is displayed when the machine needs to be

maintained. (see page A-19)

Raise the buttonhole lever. This message is displayed when the buttonhole lever is down,

a stitch other than a buttonhole is selected, and the

“Start/Stop” button or the “Reverse Stitch” button is pushed.

Remove Dual Feed module from the machine. This message appears when you try to start embroidering with

the dual feed foot attached to the machine. Remove the dual

feed foot before entering the embroidery mode. (see page

B-68)

Remove Embroidery foot with LED pointer from the machine. This message appears when you try to start sewing

utility/decorative stitch or character pattern with the

embroidery foot with the LED pointer attached to the machine.

Remove the embroidery foot with the LED pointer before

entering the sewing mode. (see page B-61)

Retrieving the pattern. Wait a moment. This message is displayed when the machine is retrieving a

previously saved pattern while in “Embroidery Edit” mode.

Sensor module error. This message appears when something is wrong with the

sensor unit of the machine. Consult your authorized dealer.

Set the clock. This message appears when the time/date is not set. Set

time/date. (see page B-22)

The bobbin thread is almost empty. This message is displayed when the bobbin thread is running

out.

The bobbin winder safety device has activated. Is the thread

tangled?

This message is displayed when the bobbin is being wound,

and the motor locks because the thread is tangled, etc.

The carriage of the embroidery unit will move. Keep your

hands etc. away from the carriage.

This message appears before embroidery unit moves.

The ending point cannot be selected for this stitch. This message appears when the function to specify the sewing

end point cannot be used with the current stitch. Select other

stitch. (see page B-81)

The needle position cannot be changed for this stitch. This message appears when the function to specify the needle

drop position cannot be used with the current stitch. Select

other stitch. (see page B-81)

The needle will move. Keep your hands etc. away from the

needle area.

This message appears when you touch the point closer than 2

cm from the needle drop point with the sensor pen in the

sensor function. (see page B-73)

Marks Error Messages Cause/Solution

ERROR MESSAGES

A-36

The pattern extends out of the pattern area, repeat positioning

of center and angle using sensor pen.

This message appears when the specified pattern position

extends out of the pattern area. Specify more centered

position of the embroidery frame. (see page B-83)

The pockets are full. Delete a pattern. This message is displayed when the memory is full and a

pattern must be deleted.

The safety device has been activated.Is the thread tangled? Is

the needle bent?

This message is displayed when the motor locks due to

tangled thread or for other reasons related to thread delivery.

The shutoff support mode has been activated. Turn off the

machine.

This message appears when the machine is in the shutoff

support mode. Turn off the machine once to start the machine

again. (see page B-32)

The “Start/Stop” button does not operate with the foot

controller attached. Remove the foot controller.

This message is displayed when the “Start/Stop” button is

pushed to sew Utility stitches or Character/Decorative stitches

while the foot controller is connected.

(This message does not appear when embroidering).

The upper thread may not be threaded correctly. Thread the

upper thread from the beginning.

This message is displayed when it seems that the upper

thread has not been threaded correctly.

The USB media was changed. Do not change the USB media

while it is being read.

This message is displayed when you attempt to select a

pattern after the USB media in which the pattern is saved has

been changed.

There is no needle plate cover. Attach a needle plate cover. This message is displayed when the needle plate cover is not

attached.

This file cannot be used. This message appears if the file format is incompatible with

this machine. Check the list of compatible file formats. (see

page S-88)

This file exceeds the data capacity and cannot be used. Use a

suitable size file.

This message is displayed when the file size exceeds the data

capacity of the machine.

Confirm the file size and format. (see page S-89)

This function cannot be used while in the sensor mode. This message appears when the selected function is not

available with the sensor function. (see page B-71)

This key cannot be used at this time.

This message is displayed when you press in

the screen other than the Utility Stitch, or press

in the screen other than the Utility Stitch or

Character/Decorative Stitch.

This key does not operate when the needle is down. Raise the

needle and press the key again.

This message is displayed when a key on the LCD display is

touched while the needle is in the down position.

This pattern cannot be sewn with this mode. This message is displayed when the selected stitch is not

available for the specific function.

This stitch is not “Dual Feed Mode” compatible. This message appears when the dual feed foot cannot be used

with the current stitch. Select other stitch. (see page B-67)

This USB media cannot be used. This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible

media.

This USB media is incompatible. This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible

USB media. For a list of compatible USB media, visit

“ http://solutions.brother.com ”.

Transmitting by USB This message is displayed while the USB media is

transmitting.

Turn off the power and replace the needle plate. This message is displayed when you try to sew with a stitch

other than a middle needle position stitch while the single-hole

needle plate is installed.

This message is displayed when the needle plate is removed

with the machine on or when the machine is turned on and

“Embroidery” or “Embroidery Edit” mode is selected (see page

B-24).

USB media error This message is displayed when an error occurs with the USB

media.

USB media is not loaded. Load USB media. This message is displayed when you try to recall or save a

pattern while no USB media is loaded.

Marks Error Messages Cause/Solution

SPECIFICATIONS

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-37

* Please be aware that some specifications may change without notice.

Use the presser foot lifter button to raise the presser foot. This message is displayed when a button, such as the

“Start/Stop” button, is pushed while the presser foot is raised.

When the speed controller is set to control the zigzag stitch

width, the "Start/Stop" button does not operate.

This message is displayed when the speed control lever is set

to control the zigzag stitch width, and the “Start/Stop” button

is pushed. Use the foot controller to operate the machine.

SPECIFICATIONS

Item Specification

Sewing Machine and Accessories

(Box 1 of 2)

Dimensions of machine Approx. 57.1 cm (W) × 33.2 cm (H) × 28.4 cm (D) (approx.

22-1/2 inches (W) × 13-1/16 inches (H) × 11-3/16 inches (D))

Dimensions of box Approx. 68.5 cm (W) × 55.0 cm (H) × 37.7 cm (D) (approx.

26-15/16 inches (W) × 21-5/8 inches (H) × 14-13/16 inches

(D))

Weight of machine Approx. 15.4 kg (approx. 33.9 lb)

Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 22.0 kg (approx. 48.5 lb)

Sewing speed 70 to 1050 stitches per minute

Needles Home sewing machine needles (HA × 130)

Embroidery Unit

(Box 2 of 2)

Dimensions of embroidery unit Approx. 54.5 cm (W) × 13.0 cm (H) × 46.4 cm (D) (approx.

21-7/16 inches (W) × 5-1/8 inch (H) × 18-1/4 inches (D))

Dimensions of machine with

embroidery unit attached

Approx. 81.5 cm (W) × 33.2 cm (H) × 46.4 cm (D) (approx.

32-1/16 inches (W) × 13-1/16 inch (H) × 18-1/4 inches (D))

Dimensions of box Approx. 68.5 cm (W) × 55.0 cm (H) × 18.8 cm (D) (approx.

26-15/16 inches (W) × 21-11/16 inch (H) × 7-7/16 inches (D))

Weight of embroidery unit Approx. 3.9 kg (approx. 8.5 lb)

Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 6.0 kg (approx. 13.2 lb)

Total Shipping Weight (Combination of all 2 boxes complete) Approx. 31.0 kg (approx. 68.3 lb)

Marks Error Messages Cause/Solution

UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE

A-38

You can use USB media or a computer to upgrade software for your sewing machine.

When an upgrade program is available on “ http://solutions.brother.com ”, please download the files

following the instructions on the website and steps below.

Upgrade Procedure Using USB

Media

aWhile pressing the “Automatic Threading”

button, turn the main power to ON.

→The following screen will appear on the LCD.

bPress .

cInsert the USB media into the USB port for

media/mouse on the machine. The media

device should only contain the upgrade file.

aUSB port for media/mouse

bUSB media

dPress .

→The upgrade file is loaded.

eRemove the USB media, and turn the

machine off and on again.

UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE

Note

• When using USB media to upgrade the software, check that no data other than the upgrade file is

saved on the USB media being used before starting to upgrade.

Note

• The access lamp will begin blinking after

inserting USB media, and it will take about 5

to 6 seconds to recognize the media. (Time

will differ depending on the USB media).

Note

• If an error occurs, a red text error message

will appear. When the installation is

performed successfully, following message

will appear.

UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Appendix A-39

Upgrade Procedure Using

Computer

aWhile pressing the “Automatic Threading”

button, turn the main power to ON.

→The following screen will appear on the LCD.

bPress .

cPlug the USB cable connector into the

corresponding USB ports for the computer

and for the machine.

→“Removable Disk” will appear in “Computer (My

computer)”.

dCopy the upgrade file to “Removable Disk”.

→The following message will appear.

eWhen the message disappears, press

→The upgrade file is loaded.

fUnplug the USB cable, and turn the

machine off and on again.

Note

• If an error occurs, a red text error message

will appear. When the installation is

performed successfully, following message

will appear.

INDEX

A-40

Accessories

included accessories ............................................................ B-15

options ................................................................................. B-18

Accessory compartment ........................................................... B-15

Adapter .................................................................................... B-56

Adjusting the LED pointer ........................................................ B-63

Air vent .................................................................................... B-12

Aligning the position ................................................................. E-36

Alphabet characters

character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-72

embroidery ............................................................................. E-5

embroidery edit ..................................................................... E-59

Appliqué ................................................................................... S-42

embroidery patterns .............................................................. E-23

quilting ................................................................................. S-37

using a zigzag stitch .............................................................. S-31

using an embroidery frame pattern ........................................ E-51

Array key ....................................................................... E-60, E-64

Arrow keys ........................................................ S-100, E-36, E-81

Automatic fabric sensor system ................................................. S-17

Automatic reinforcement stitch key ............................................. S-6

Automatic thread cutting key .................................................... S-13

Automatic Threading button ......................................... B-14, B-48

Back to beginning key ............................................................... S-81

Ball point needle 75/11 .................................................. B-59, E-33

Bar tacks ................................................................................... S-54

Basting ...................................................................................... S-28

Blind hem stitches ..................................................................... S-40

Block move key ...................................................................... S-102

Bobbin

pulling up the bobbin thread ................................................ B-47

runs out of thread .................................................................. E-26

setting .................................................................................. B-45

winding ................................................................................ B-40

Bobbin case

bobbin case .......................................................................... E-21

cleaning ............................................................................... A-19

Bobbin clip .............................................................................. B-17

Bobbin cover ................................................................ B-13, B-46

Bobbin holder (switch) ............................................................. B-42

Bobbin winder ......................................................................... B-12

Bobbin work .............................................................................. A-2

Border key ..................................................................... E-72, E-76

Button sewing ........................................................................... S-55

4 hole buttons ....................................................................... S-56

shank .................................................................................... S-56

Buttonhole lever ................................................. B-13, S-51, S-53

Buttonholes

odd-shaped/buttons that do not fit the button holder plate .... S-52

one-step ................................................................................ S-49

Calibrating the sensor pen ........................................................ B-74

Character spacing key ............................................................... E-64

Character/Decorative Stitches

adjustments ........................................................................... S-76

combining ............................................................................. S-83

editing ................................................................................... S-78

key functions ......................................................................... S-78

retrieving .................................................................... S-92, S-93

saving ............................................................. S-89, S-90, S-91

selecting ................................................................................ S-71

sewing .................................................................................. S-75

Cleaning

LCD screen ........................................................................... A-19

machine casing .................................................................... A-19

race ...................................................................................... A-19

Combining Patterns

character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-83

embroidery edit .................................................................... E-80

Cord guide bobbin cover .......................................................... S-32

Crazy quilt ............................................................................... S-32

Custom Thread Table ..................................................... E-68, E-71

Cut/Tension key ....................................................................... E-30

Darning .................................................................................... S-53

Dart seam ................................................................................. S-28

Density key .............................................................................. E-40

Dual feed foot .......................................................................... B-67

Eco mode ................................................................................. B-32

Editing

character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-78

embroidery ........................................................................... E-36

embroidery edit .................................................................... E-61

MY CUSTOM STITCH .......................................................... S-99

Elastic zigzag stitches ............................................................... S-33

Elongation key .......................................................................... S-80

Embroidery

adjusting the speed ............................................................... E-33

automatic thread cutting function (END COLOR TRIM) ........ E-32

edges or corners ................................................................... E-16

key functions ........................................................................ E-10

restarting from the beginning ................................................ E-28

resuming embroidery after turning off the power .................. E-28

ribbons or tape ..................................................................... E-16

selecting patterns .................................................................... E-3

small fabrics ......................................................................... E-16

thread color display .............................................................. E-34

thread trimming function (JUMP STITCH TRIM) .................... E-32

Embroidery card ......................................................................... E-7

Embroidery card reader .............................................................. E-7

Embroidery edit

changing the thread color ..................................................... E-67

combined patterns ...................................................... E-80, E-83

custom thread table .................................................... E-68, E-71

explanation of functions ....................................................... E-57

key functions ........................................................................ E-62

repeated patterns .................................................................. E-72

Embroidery foot ........................................................................ B-61

Embroidery foot with LED pointer ............................................ B-61

Embroidery frame display ......................................................... E-35

Embroidery frames

attaching .............................................................................. E-17

inserting fabric ...................................................................... E-14

removing .............................................................................. E-17

types ..................................................................................... E-13

using the embroidery sheet ................................................... E-15

Embroidery key ........................................................................ E-79

Embroidery needle plate cover ................................................. E-22

Embroidery patterns

aligning the position ............................................................. E-36

checking the position ........................................................... E-19

combining ............................................................................ E-80

duplicating ........................................................................... E-78

editing .................................................................................. E-61

linked characters .................................................................. E-41

patterns which use appliqué ................................................. E-23

INDEX

Appendix A-41

retrieving ................................................................... E-48, E-49

revising ................................................................................. E-36

saving .............................................................. E-45, E-46, E-47

selecting ...................................................................... E-3, E-58

sewing .................................................................................. E-21

using a frame pattern to make an appliqué ................ E-51, E-52

Embroidery sheet ...................................................................... E-15

Embroidery unit ............................................................. B-14, B-64

carriage ................................................................................ B-14

Enlarger key ............................................................................ S-100

Error messages .......................................................................... A-34

Eyelet ....................................................................................... S-57

Fabrics

fabric/thread/needle combinations ........................................ B-59

sewing heavyweight fabrics .................................................... S-7

sewing lightweight fabrics ....................................................... S-9

sewing stretch fabrics ................................................... S-9, S-52

Fagoting ................................................................................... S-46

Feed dogs ...................................................................... B-13, S-39

Flat bed attachment ....................................................... B-12, B-64

Flat fell Seam ............................................................................ S-29

Foot controller ................................................................. B-12, S-4

Forward/Back key .......................................................... E-27, E-28

Free motion sewing mode ........................................................ S-39

Gathering ................................................................................. S-29

Grid direction key .................................................................. S-100

Guideline marker ..................................................................... S-14

Handle ..................................................................................... B-12

Handwheel ............................................................................... B-12

Heirloom .................................................................................. S-48

Hemstitching

daisy stitch ............................................................................ S-48

drawn work .......................................................................... S-49

Home page screen .................................................................... B-24

Image key ............................................... S-22, S-82, S-101, E-20

Insert key ................................................................................ S-103

Key functions

character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-78

embroidery ........................................................................... E-10

embroidery edit .................................................................... E-62

MY CUSTOM STITCH .......................................................... S-99

utility stitches ........................................................................ B-26

Knee lifter ...................................................................... B-12, S-15

L/R SHIFT ................................................................................. S-11

LCD screen .................................................................... B-12, B-24

cleaning ................................................................................ A-19

locking ................................................................................. S-18

Lower threading

pulling up the bobbin thread ................................................ B-47

setting the bobbin ................................................................. B-45

winding the bobbin .............................................................. B-40

Machine operation mode key ................................................... A-23

Main power switch ............................................. B-12, B-21, B-71

Mirror image key ................................................ S-21, S-80, E-39

Multi color key .............................................................. E-40, E-66

Multi-directional sewing ........................................................... S-57

MY CUSTOM STITCH

designing .............................................................................. S-97

entering data ......................................................................... S-99

key functions ......................................................................... S-99

retrieving ............................................................................. S-105

saving ................................................................................. S-104

storing in your list ............................................................... S-104

Needle

changing the needle ............................................................. B-57

changing the needle position ................................................ S-25

checking the needle location ................................................. B-7

fabric/thread/needle combinations ....................................... B-59

mode ................................................................................... B-24

twin needle .......................................................................... B-51

Needle bar thread guides .............................................. B-13, B-52

Needle clamp screw ................................................................ B-13

Needle mode selection key ...................................................... B-51

Needle plate ............................................................................ B-13

Needle position ............................................................. S-18, S-25

Needle Position button ............................................................ B-14

Operation buttons ......................................................... B-12, B-14

Overcasting ................................................................... S-31, S-33

Patchwork ................................................................................. S-32

Piecing ...................................................................................... S-36

Pintuck ..................................................................................... S-30

Pivoting .................................................................................... S-15

Point delete key ...................................................................... S-101

Power cord .............................................................................. B-22

Power cord receptacle ............................................................. B-12

Presser foot

adapter ................................................................................. B-55

attaching .............................................................................. B-55

pressure ................................................................................ S-17

removing .............................................................................. B-55

types ..................................................................................... S-62

Presser foot code ......................................................................... E-9

Presser foot holder ........................................................ B-13, B-55

Presser foot holder screw ......................................................... B-13

Presser foot lever .............................................................. B-12, S-8

Presser Foot Lifter button .......................................................... B-14

Presser foot/Needle exchange key ........... B-52, B-55, B-57, B-61

Pre-tension disk ................................................. B-12, B-42, B-44

Quilting .................................................................................... S-35

free motion ........................................................................... S-39

with satin stitches .................................................................. S-38

Race ........................................................................................ A-19

Reinforcement Stitch button ............................................. B-14, S-5

Repeated patterns ..................................................................... E-72

Retrieving

character/decorative stitch patterns ....................................... S-92

computer ................................................................... S-94, E-50

embroidery patterns .............................................................. E-48

machine’s memory ..................................................... S-92, E-48

MY CUSTOM STITCH designs ............................................ S-105

stitch settings ......................................................................... S-23

USB media ................................................................. S-93, E-49

INDEX

A-42

utility stitches ........................................................................ S-23

Reverse Stitch button ....................................................... B-14, S-5

Reverse/Reinforcement stitches ................................................... S-5

Rotate key ...................................................................... E-38, E-63

Satin stitches .................................................................. S-38, S-81

Saving

character/decorative stitches ................................................. S-89

computer ................................................................... S-91, E-47

embroidery patterns .............................................................. E-45

machine’s memory ..................................................... S-89, E-45

MY CUSTOM STITCH designs ............................................ S-104

stitch settings ......................................................................... S-22

USB media ................................................................. S-90, E-46

utility stitches ........................................................................ S-22

Scallop stitches ......................................................................... S-44

Screen brightness ..................................................................... A-22

Sensor functions ....................................................................... B-70

embroidering position .......................................................... B-83

guideline marker .................................................................. B-76

L/R SHIFT ............................................................................. B-79

needle drop position ............................................................ B-78

sewing end point .................................................................. B-81

Sensor pen ............................................................................... B-71

Sensor pen holder .................................................................... B-72

Set key .................................................................................... S-100

Settings

automatic reinforcement stitching ........................................... S-5

automatic thread cutting ............................................ S-13, E-32

display language .................................................................. B-33

embroidery settings .............................................................. B-31

general settings .................................................................... B-29

machine setting mode key ............................... B-28, E-33, E-68

sewing settings ..................................................................... B-28

stitch length .......................................................................... S-10

stitch width ........................................................................... S-10

thread tension ............................................................ S-12, E-30

thread trimming .................................................................... E-32

Sewing machine help key ........................................................ B-36

Sewing speed controller (speed control slide) ........ B-12, B-14, S-3

Sewing type selection key ........................................................ B-38

Shelltuck stitches ...................................................................... S-43

Shutoff support mode ............................................................... B-32

Single/Repeat sewing key .......................................................... S-80

Single/Triple stitching key ....................................................... S-100

Size key ......................................................................... E-37, E-63

Size selection key ..................................................................... S-80

Smocking stitches ..................................................................... S-45

Speaker .................................................................................... B-29

Special spool cap ..................................................................... B-41

Specifications ........................................................................... A-37

Spool cap ................................................................................. B-12

Spool net ................................................................................. B-53

Spool pin ................................................................................. B-12

Stabilizer ................................................................................... E-11

Start/Stop button ...................................................................... B-14

Starting point key ...................................................................... E-37

Step stitch patterns .................................................................... S-86

Stitch setting chart ..................................................................... S-62

Straight stitch foot ..................................................................... S-26

Straight stitch needle plate ........................................................ S-26

Straight stitches ......................................................................... S-24

Supplemental spool pin ..................................... B-12, B-40, B-52

Tape attaching .......................................................................... S-33

Tape or elastic attaching ........................................................... S-47

Test key ..................................................................... S-101, S-104

Thread

fabric/thread/needle combinations ....................................... B-59

thread tension ............................................................ S-12, E-30

Thread color display ................................................................. E-34

Thread cutter ................................................................... B-12, S-4

Thread Cutter button ................................................................ B-14

Thread density key ................................................................... S-81

Thread guide ........................................... B-12, B-41, B-44, B-52

Thread guide plate ............................................. B-12, B-44, B-48

Thread marks ........................................................................... E-75

Thread palette key ............................................... E-66, E-67, E-71

Top cover ................................................................................. B-12

Top stitching ............................................................................ S-45

Touch pen ........................................................ S-100, E-67, A-22

Trial key ................................................................................... E-19

Troubleshooting ....................................................................... A-23

Twin needle ............................................................................. B-51

Uninterrupted embroidering ..................................................... E-43

Upgrading ................................................................................ A-38

Upper threading

twin needle mode ................................................................. B-51

using the “Automatic Threading” button ............................... B-48

using the spool net ............................................................... B-53

USB cable ..................................... B-66, S-91, E-47, E-50, A-39

USB media

recalling ..................................................................... S-93, E-49

saving ......................................................................... S-90, E-46

usable ......................................................................... S-88, E-44

USB mouse ................................................................... B-32, B-67

USB port connector

for computer .................................................... B-12, S-91, E-47

for media .................................................................... S-90, E-46

Utility stitches

key functions ........................................................................ B-26

pattern explanation key ........................................................ B-39

retrieving .............................................................................. S-23

saving ................................................................................... S-22

selecting ............................................................................... S-21

sewing type selection key ..................................................... B-38

stitch setting chart ................................................................. S-62

Walking foot ............................................................................ B-55

Zigzag stitches .......................................................................... S-31

Zipper insertion

centered ............................................................................... S-58

side ...................................................................................... S-59

English

882-C40/C42

Printed in Taiwan

XF3615-001

Please visit us at http://solutions.brother.com where you can get

product support and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs).

Brother Xl 3030 Owner S Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation